Marketing Cloud Release Notes: Salesforce, Spring '22

Marketing Cloud Release Notes
Salesforce, Spring ’22
@salesforcedocs
Last updated: February 24, 2022
© Copyright 2000–2022 salesforce.com, inc. All rights reserved. Salesforce is a registered trademark of salesforce.com, inc.,
as are other names and marks. Other marks appearing herein may be trademarks of their respective owners.
CONTENTS
Marketing Cloud Release Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

Spring '22 Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
October 2021 Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
August 2021 Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
June 2021 Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
April 2021 Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
January 2021 Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
October 2020 Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
July 2020 Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
May 2020 Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
March 2020 Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
January 2020 Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Marketing Cloud 2022 Release Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Earlier Marketing Cloud Release Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Receive Release Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
MARKETING CLOUD RELEASE NOTES
Check out our latest features and updates from the Marketing Cloud! Be in the know by signing up for our product release communications
- it's easy!
Receive Release Communications.
Review overall Salesforce release notes.
Spring '22 Release

Starting with the Spring '22 release, Marketing Cloud plans a new release cycle. In 2022, you can expect new Marketing Cloud features
available in your orgs during the Spring ‘22 (Feb 5-18), Summer ‘22 (June 4-17), and Winter ‘23 (Oct 8-21) releases. This plan gives
you a more consistent Salesforce experience because it aligns Marketing Cloud releases with the release schedule of other Salesforce
products. Aside from the timing, nothing changes for you. In this section, continue to find information about what to expect in each
release. If you have any questions about these changes, speak to your Salesforce account executive.
October 2021 Release
The October 2021 Marketing Cloud release occurs October 16, 2021 through October 23, 2021. Some features are made available
to your instance within a week of the release.
August 2021 Release
The August 2021 Marketing Cloud release occurs August 7, 2021 through August 14, 2021. Some features are made available to your
instance within a week of the release.
June 2021 Release
The June 2021 Marketing Cloud release occurs June 5, 2021 through June 12, 2021. Some features are made available to your instance
within a week of the release.
April 2021 Release
The April 2021 Marketing Cloud release occurs on April 10, 2021 through April 17, 2021. Some features are made available to your
January 2021 Release
The January 2021 Marketing Cloud release occurs on January 30, 2021 through February 6, 2021. Some features are made available
The October 2020 Marketing Cloud release occurs on October 17, 2020 through October 24, 2020. Some features are made available
July 2020 Release
The July 2020 Marketing Cloud release occurs on July 25, 2020 through August 1, 2020. Some features are made available to your
May 2020 Release
The May 2020 Marketing Cloud occurs on May 30, 2020. Some features are made available to your instance within a week of the
release.
March 2020 Release
The March 2020 Marketing Cloud occurs on March 21 through March 28, 2020. The Social Studio release occurs on March 28, 2020.
Some features are made available to your instance within a week of the release.
1
Marketing Cloud Release Notes Spring '22 Release

The January 2020 Marketing Cloud and Social Studio release occurs on January 25, 2020. Some features are made available to your
Marketing Cloud 2022 Release Schedule
Review the schedule for major Marketing Cloud releases in 2022.
Salesforce Audience Studio Releases
Review the release notes for Salesforce Audience Studio (formerly known as Salesforce DMP) in Marketing Cloud.
Earlier Marketing Cloud Release Notes
This page includes Marketing Cloud release notes older than two calendar years. Each year is stored in PDF format and includes a
table of contents for navigation.
Receive Release Communications
Follow these steps to receive release communications from Marketing Cloud.
Spring '22 Release

Starting with the Spring '22 release, Marketing Cloud plans a new release cycle. In 2022, you can expect new Marketing Cloud features
available in your orgs during the Spring ‘22 (Feb 5-18), Summer ‘22 (June 4-17), and Winter ‘23 (Oct 8-21) releases. This plan gives you
a more consistent Salesforce experience because it aligns Marketing Cloud releases with the release schedule of other Salesforce products.
Aside from the timing, nothing changes for you. In this section, continue to find information about what to expect in each release. If you
have any questions about these changes, speak to your Salesforce account executive.
Get an exclusive, in-depth look at our new features by tuning into the Spring '22 Marketing Cloud Release New Feature Overview. Join
this webinar on February 24, 2022 at 12:00 PM EST.
Be in the know by signing up for our product release communications.
1. Visit sforce.co/preferencecenter.
2. Click the Subscriptions tab.
3. Select Marketing Communications regarding Salesforce Products, Services, and Event.
4. Click Save All Changes.
Release Highlights
• Datorama Reports: New Fields (Measurements and Dimensions)
• Real-time Behavioral Engagement for Mobile Apps
• Salesforce CDP and App Exchange: Partner Apps
• BU Aware Integration between CDP and Journey Builder
• Datorama Enhancements for Ecommerce
• Datorama Budget Allocator
• New Einstein Innovations for Marketing Cloud
• Pardot Opens Activity Audit
Check out these resources to prepare for the release.
• Spring '22 Release FAQ
• Spring '22 Release Demo Videos
2
Marketing Cloud Release Notes Marketing Cloud App and Setup Spring '22 Release Notes
Release Edits
Date Reason for Edit
February 23, 2022 Removed Get Einstein Messaging Insights in Slack release note
January 20, 2022 Original publish date
Marketing Cloud App and Setup Spring '22 Release Notes

Learn about enforcing multi-factor authentication (MFA) in your tenant and adding tenant-specific endpoint information to your
SSO metadata. Expand your use of Marketing Cloud Package Manager with update actions. Use Amazon S3 for encrypted file transfer
activities and exports.
Marketing Cloud Data Management Spring '22 Release Notes
To manage profiles in your Interaction Studio dataset, delete all members of a segment to remove user profiles.
Marketing Cloud Einstein Spring '22 Release Notes
Get information about Einstein Messaging Insights directly in Slack. Use Einstein Send Time Optimization in single send journeys
and in Automation Studio. Use momentum analytics to enhance your Einstein engagement strategy by analyzing subscriber personas
over time. Use hierarchical nested tagging in Einstein Content Tagging. Use a new API to create a daily report for Einstein Content
Selection that shows a log of asset selections and clicks for each subscriber. Enhance your content selection experience with multiple
criteria support for Spotlight ad support for multiple attribute values. And explore the new model card for Einstein Email Engagement
Scoring.
Marketing Cloud Cross-Cloud Integrations Spring '22 Release Notes
Increase your confidence in audience selection with Quick Send enhancements. You can use Case or Opportunity data to enrich
content personalization, journey decisions, and more.
Marketing Cloud Journeys Spring '22 Release Notes
Android’s Deep Linking in Setup now allows you to support Android 12’s new App Link Verification process. For an enhanced user
experience, subscribers on Android 12 can click a link that directly deep-links into the mobile application. AMPscript functions now
allow users to generate JavaScript Web Tokens (JWTs), which they can use to authenticate and exchange their information securely.
Four new SMS status codes are launching with this release. MobilePush SDK is now called Engagement SDK.
Marketing Cloud Datorama Reports Spring '22 Release Notes
Learn about the expanded list of email dimensions and measurements, and more, from MC Datorama Reports.
Marketing Cloud App and Setup Spring '22 Release Notes

Learn about enforcing multi-factor authentication (MFA) in your tenant and adding tenant-specific endpoint information to your SSO
metadata. Expand your use of Marketing Cloud Package Manager with update actions. Use Amazon S3 for encrypted file transfer activities
and exports.
Use a Single Identity Provider for Multiple Marketing Cloud Tenants

You can now use a single Identity Provider (IdP) to configure SSO logins across multiple Marketing Cloud tenants. This solution
provides a tenant-specific SP Entity ID value that you can use for each tenant while maintaining a single IdP across all your Marketing
Cloud accounts. Enable the Use Tenant-Specific SP Entity ID setting in the Security Settings section of the tenant’s Setup.
3
Marketing Cloud Release Notes Marketing Cloud App and Setup Spring '22 Release Notes
Multi-Factor Authentication Opt-In Enabled for All Marketing Cloud Tenants

Multi-factor authentication (MFA) is now automatically enabled for all applicable Marketing Cloud tenants created before the August
2020 release. With this change, the login process invites users to register a verification method and receive MFA challenges. If users
aren't ready for MFA, they can temporarily skip the invitation. However, beginning February 1, 2022, all customers are contractually
required to use MFA when accessing Marketing Cloud. Customers who started using Marketing Cloud after August 2020 or who
have already enabled MFA for direct or SSO logins, don’t see any changes to the login experience.
Manage File Locations and Security Credentials with File Locations REST API
Use the new File Locations REST API to rotate and manage access keys such as Amazon S3 credentials and external SFTP usernames
and passwords. You can also create, manage, and delete file locations for file transfer. These API requests require File Locations READ
and WRITE permissions in Installed Packages in your Marketing Cloud account.
Settings for Amazon S3 File Locations Are Updated
Amazon S3 integration in Automation Studio supports import and export of encrypted and unencrypted files. When creating an
Amazon S3 File Location, settings now reflect AWS naming conventions. Region Name is now a required field.
Password Expiration Email Notifications Are Sent to FTP Users
Password expiration email notifications are now automatically sent to FTP users, helping you remember to change your password.
Enterprise admins continue to receive these notifications.
Update Deployed Items with Package Manager
Easily manage versions and push updates across environments by updating packaged items, such as journeys and content, during
deployment.
Use a Single Identity Provider for Multiple Marketing Cloud Tenants

You can now use a single Identity Provider (IdP) to configure SSO logins across multiple Marketing Cloud tenants. This solution provides
a tenant-specific SP Entity ID value that you can use for each tenant while maintaining a single IdP across all your Marketing Cloud
accounts. Enable the Use Tenant-Specific SP Entity ID setting in the Security Settings section of the tenant’s Setup.
How: After you download the metadata, follow these steps to implement SSO for each tenant that your company manages. Use the
same IdP metadata for all Marketing Cloud tenants. The tenant-specific SP Entity ID is unique for each Marketing Cloud account. This
tenant-specific entity ID change affects users currently logging in using SSO. Update your IdP configuration to continue using SSO.

2020 release. With this change, the login process invites users to register a verification method and receive MFA challenges. If users aren't
ready for MFA, they can temporarily skip the invitation. However, beginning February 1, 2022, all customers are contractually required
to use MFA when accessing Marketing Cloud. Customers who started using Marketing Cloud after August 2020 or who have already
enabled MFA for direct or SSO logins, don’t see any changes to the login experience.
Manage File Locations and Security Credentials with File Locations REST API
Use the new File Locations REST API to rotate and manage access keys such as Amazon S3 credentials and external SFTP usernames and
passwords. You can also create, manage, and delete file locations for file transfer. These API requests require File Locations READ and
WRITE permissions in Installed Packages in your Marketing Cloud account.
SEE ALSO:
File Location API Reference
4
Marketing Cloud Release Notes Marketing Cloud Data Management Spring '22 Release Notes
Settings for Amazon S3 File Locations Are Updated

Amazon S3 integration in Automation Studio supports import and export of encrypted and unencrypted files. When creating an Amazon
S3 File Location, settings now reflect AWS naming conventions. Region Name is now a required field.
How: These Amazon Simple Storage Service File Location settings are updated:
• Authentication Type is now Authorization Type.
• Public Key/Private Key is now Access Key.
• AWS Security Token Service is now Access Key with IAM Role.
• Public Key is now Access Key ID.
• Private Key is now Secret Access Key.
• Region Name is now a required field.
Learn how to Set Up an Amazon S3 File Location.
Password Expiration Email Notifications Are Sent to FTP Users

Password expiration email notifications are now automatically sent to FTP users, helping you remember to change your password.
Enterprise admins continue to receive these notifications.
Update Deployed Items with Package Manager

Easily manage versions and push updates across environments by updating packaged items, such as journeys and content, during
deployment.
How: When you deploy an updated version of your package, Package Manager checks for previously deployed items of the same name.
For each of those items, you can keep the existing version, update to the new version, or keep both items by renaming the new version.
You can update all supported items except data extensions.
Marketing Cloud Data Management Spring '22 Release Notes

To manage profiles in your Interaction Studio dataset, delete all members of a segment to remove user profiles.
Interaction Studio Release Notes Spring '22

Learn how to manage profiles stored in your Interaction Studio dataset. For Marketing Cloud Interaction Studio release notes prior
to January 2022, see New in Interaction Studio.
Interaction Studio Release Notes Spring '22

Learn how to manage profiles stored in your Interaction Studio dataset. For Marketing Cloud Interaction Studio release notes prior to
January 2022, see New in Interaction Studio.
Manage Profiles Stored in Your Interaction Studio Dataset

Now you can delete all members of a user segment to permanently remove each member’s user profile and all its data from your
Interaction Studio dataset.
5
Marketing Cloud Release Notes Marketing Cloud Einstein Spring '22 Release Notes
Manage Profiles Stored in Your Interaction Studio Dataset

Now you can delete all members of a user segment to permanently remove each member’s user profile and all its data from your
Interaction Studio dataset.
Who: To delete all members of a segment, you need administrator permissions for Interaction Studio.
How: From the main navigation, select User Segments, then open the segment. Click Delete All Users In Segment. Review the modal
and select the confirmation message checkbox. Click Confirm to start the deletion job.
SEE ALSO:
External Link: Bulk User Deletion Using Segments
Marketing Cloud Einstein Spring '22 Release Notes

Get information about Einstein Messaging Insights directly in Slack. Use Einstein Send Time Optimization in single send journeys and in
Automation Studio. Use momentum analytics to enhance your Einstein engagement strategy by analyzing subscriber personas over
time. Use hierarchical nested tagging in Einstein Content Tagging. Use a new API to create a daily report for Einstein Content Selection
that shows a log of asset selections and clicks for each subscriber. Enhance your content selection experience with multiple criteria
support for Spotlight ad support for multiple attribute values. And explore the new model card for Einstein Email Engagement Scoring.
1
Create a Daily Log Report for Einstein Content Selection via API
If you track subscriber engagements in another system, such as an analytics tool, now you can use an API to get daily insights into
individual subscriber asset selections and clicks.
Enhance Einstein Content Selection with Multiple Criteria Support for Spotlight and Support for Multiple Asset Attribute Values
Limit the need for data transformation by assigning multiple values that describe an asset’s attribute. Using the existing Spotlight
feature, you can now create a more targeted campaign by filtering the options in an email’s Einstein Content Selection content
block.
Use Nested Tagging for Einstein Content Tagging
Nested, or hierarchical, tagging provides a clearer distinction between Einstein-applied tags and self-managed tags, and it lets you
edit and delete content tags more efficiently. Content Builder and Einstein Content Selection use Einstein Content Tags. The newly
generated tags group all of a member’s tags under the member identifier plus ECT, and all the tags end in .ai. For example, a fully
nested Einstein Content Tag appears as 123456 ECT, with penguins.ai nested underneath.
Explore the New Model Card for Einstein Email Engagement Scoring
Marketing Cloud’s Einstein Email Engagement Scoring model card provides insight into how our AI model analyzes messages and
the factors that it uses. Factors include the types of inputs the model uses, the best applications for the model, and ethical
considerations in its use.
Use Momentum Analytics to Enhance Your Einstein Engagement Scoring Strategy
Learn how your messages resonate with subscribers by analyzing subscriber persona changes over time. To see persona changes
over time, you need Einstein Engagement Scoring to actively evaluate subscribers in each business unit for at least 14 days.
Use Einstein Send Time Optimization with Automation Studio
Now you can use Einstein Send Time Optimization for your bulk and batch send emails from Automation Studio. This feature sends
the emails to your contacts at the best predicted time for each individual to maximize engagement.
1
Rights of ALBERT EINSTEIN are used with permission of The Hebrew University of Jerusalem. Represented exclusively by Greenlight.
6
Marketing Cloud Release Notes Marketing Cloud Einstein Spring '22 Release Notes
Create a Daily Log Report for Einstein Content Selection via API
If you track subscriber engagements in another system, such as an analytics tool, now you can use an API to get daily insights into
individual subscriber asset selections and clicks.
Learn more about the Daily Log Report API.
Enhance Einstein Content Selection with Multiple Criteria Support for Spotlight and
Support for Multiple Asset Attribute Values
Limit the need for data transformation by assigning multiple values that describe an asset’s attribute. Using the existing Spotlight feature,
you can now create a more targeted campaign by filtering the options in an email’s Einstein Content Selection content block.
How: To broaden a Spotlight selection, identify multiple attribute values that can apply an asset attribute using an OR filter. To narrow
Spotlight assets, add multiple asset attributes that must be present by using an AND filter. Learn more.
Use Nested Tagging for Einstein Content Tagging

Nested, or hierarchical, tagging provides a clearer distinction between Einstein-applied tags and self-managed tags, and it lets you edit
and delete content tags more efficiently. Content Builder and Einstein Content Selection use Einstein Content Tags. The newly generated
tags group all of a member’s tags under the member identifier plus ECT, and all the tags end in .ai. For example, a fully nested Einstein
Content Tag appears as 123456 ECT, with penguins.ai nested underneath.
How: Your Salesforce admin can set up Hierarchical Einstein Content Tagging by first deactivating and deleting your current tagging,
which can take about 24 hours. Then, they can re-enable Einstein Content Tagging in Setup.
Explore the New Model Card for Einstein Email Engagement Scoring
Marketing Cloud’s Einstein Email Engagement Scoring model card provides insight into how our AI model analyzes messages and the
factors that it uses. Factors include the types of inputs the model uses, the best applications for the model, and ethical considerations
in its use.
Check out the new model card for Einstein Email Engagement Scoring.
Use Momentum Analytics to Enhance Your Einstein Engagement Scoring Strategy

Learn how your messages resonate with subscribers by analyzing subscriber persona changes over time. To see persona changes over
time, you need Einstein Engagement Scoring to actively evaluate subscribers in each business unit for at least 14 days.
Why: For example, the detailed information that shows population changes over time also shows how it relates to subscriber categories.
So let’s say you have a scenario where your total active number of subscribers increased by 10,000 since the last period. You see that
your Loyalist category increased by 5,000 and that 70% of your new Loyalists came from your Selective Subscriber bucket.
How: To analyze subscriber persona data, click the Time Comparison option on the Einstein Email Engagement Scoring Dashboard.
Use Einstein Send Time Optimization with Automation Studio

Now you can use Einstein Send Time Optimization for your bulk and batch send emails from Automation Studio. This feature sends the
emails to your contacts at the best predicted time for each individual to maximize engagement.
How: Configure your Einstein Send Time Optimization in the Automation Studio Send Email Activity. You select the best send window,
and Einstein does the rest.
7
Marketing Cloud Release Notes Marketing Cloud Cross-Cloud Integrations Spring '22 Release
Notes
Marketing Cloud Cross-Cloud Integrations Spring '22 Release Notes

Increase your confidence in audience selection with Quick Send enhancements. You can use Case or Opportunity data to enrich content
personalization, journey decisions, and more.
Enhance Personalization Flow with Quick Send Enhancements

Increase your confidence in audience selection with Quick Send enhancements. Account names are now appended to the Contact
name, and Company names are now appended to the Lead name. The Object Id is now available in the Journey Entry Source when
you initiate a Quick Send from a Case or Opportunity. Use Case or Opportunity data to enrich content personalization, journey
decisions, and more.
Enhance Personalization Flow with Quick Send Enhancements

Increase your confidence in audience selection with Quick Send enhancements. Account names are now appended to the Contact
name, and Company names are now appended to the Lead name. The Object Id is now available in the Journey Entry Source when you
initiate a Quick Send from a Case or Opportunity. Use Case or Opportunity data to enrich content personalization, journey decisions, and
more.
Marketing Cloud Journeys Spring '22 Release Notes

Android’s Deep Linking in Setup now allows you to support Android 12’s new App Link Verification process. For an enhanced user
experience, subscribers on Android 12 can click a link that directly deep-links into the mobile application. AMPscript functions now allow
users to generate JavaScript Web Tokens (JWTs), which they can use to authenticate and exchange their information securely. Four new
SMS status codes are launching with this release. MobilePush SDK is now called Engagement SDK.
These activities will be made available on a rolling basis through March: Increase and specify customer engagement with new Journey
Builder activities: Mobile Event Entry and Exit, Push Notification and In-App Engagement, and Wait Until activity for in-app messages.
Enable Android Deep Linking in Setup

Android’s Deep Linking now allows you to support Android 12’s new App Link Verification process from Setup. You can host the
asset link file on Marketing Cloud click domain servers. For a better user experience, subscribers on Android 12 can click a link that
directly deep-links into the mobile application rather than a mobile web page.
Generate JavaScript Web Tokens with AMPscript Functions
AMPscript functions now allow users to generate JavaScript Web Tokens (JWTs) in content resolved by Outbound Mail Manager
(OMM) rendering engines. Users can use JWTs to authenticate and securely exchange your information. These functions are available
for messages and landing pages.
Email Form Shared Items No Longer Available in Response Capture Options
Previously, a Share Items option was available that included Shared Data Extensions when selecting “Use an existing data extension”
for the Response Capture Method in the Email Form block. Due to inconsistent behavior across stacks that resulted in unsuccessful
submissions, this option is removed. This change avoids situations where a user doesn’t know why or doesn’t notice that their
submissions are failing and writing to the error log data extension.
Email Studio Classic Web Tools Are Retiring
As stated earlier this year, Marketing Cloud is gradually retiring Email Studio classic Web Tools including landing pages and microsites
in future releases.
Classic Editor CloudPages Migrated to Content Builder
CloudPages created with the classic editor are migrated to Content Builder. Code Resources are now created from the code view in
Content Builder.
8
Marketing Cloud Release Notes Marketing Cloud Journeys Spring '22 Release Notes
Enjoy CloudPages Enhancements

With this release, we improved the Marketing Cloud CloudPages user interface and experience.
Get More Features and Flexibility with MobilePush SDK Renamed Engagement SDK
MobilePush SDK architecture adds features for behavioral in-app messages and mobile-triggered journeys in a more extensible,
flexible framework. You can mix and match the building blocks of SDK functionality from the MobilePush module, the CDP module,
or both, for your app. Merging MobilePush and Salesforce CDP SDKs into a single set of universal methods streamlines implementation.
To reflect support for MobilePush and Salesforce CDP, MobilePush SDK is renamed Engagement SDK.
Orchestrate Journeys Based on User Behavior with Mobile App Event Entry and Exit
Your mobile app is a critical component in delivering contextual, omnichannel experiences for your customers. Now, you can create
a direct link between your mobile app and Journey Builder and easily orchestrate journeys based on real-time user behavior.
Target Customers in Real Time with Journey Builder Entries for Push Notification and In-App Message Engagement
Easily retarget a contact when they open a push notification or engage with an in-app message. The Push Message Engagement
and In-App Message Engagement Entry Sources listen for engagement from the selected messages and enter contacts into a journey.
These features allow you to easily retarget contacts by listening for the engagement of up to 10 separate messages.
Engage Customers in Real Time with the Wait Until Activity for In-App Messages
React in real time based on whether a contact engages with an in-app message within a certain period. The Wait Until In-App
Message Engagement activity listens for engagement from a corresponding in-app message activity. Keep contacts in a wait step
in the journey until the specified engagement with the message occurs. If engagement doesn’t occur within the predefined time
frame, you can send the contact down an alternate path.
Get More Information About Your SMS Sends with New Status Codes
Now you can find more information about your SMS sends with four new status codes. These codes add specificity to the failure
response set so you can better address a failing call.
Enable Android Deep Linking in Setup

Android’s Deep Linking now allows you to support Android 12’s new App Link Verification process from Setup. You can host the asset
link file on Marketing Cloud click domain servers. For a better user experience, subscribers on Android 12 can click a link that directly
deep-links into the mobile application rather than a mobile web page.
Why: This feature provides Marketing Cloud admins with a self-serve feature in the Setup app that allows them to upload their asset
link JSON file to click domain servers.
Generate JavaScript Web Tokens with AMPscript Functions

AMPscript functions now allow users to generate JavaScript Web Tokens (JWTs) in content resolved by Outbound Mail Manager (OMM)
rendering engines. Users can use JWTs to authenticate and securely exchange your information. These functions are available for messages
and landing pages.
Email Form Shared Items No Longer Available in Response Capture Options

Previously, a Share Items option was available that included Shared Data Extensions when selecting “Use an existing data extension” for
the Response Capture Method in the Email Form block. Due to inconsistent behavior across stacks that resulted in unsuccessful submissions,
this option is removed. This change avoids situations where a user doesn’t know why or doesn’t notice that their submissions are failing
and writing to the error log data extension.
9
Marketing Cloud Release Notes Marketing Cloud Journeys Spring '22 Release Notes

in future releases.
When: You can still view and edit any existing landing pages and microsites in the classic Web Tools and continue migrating existing
items to CloudPages, as needed. Classic landing pages and microsites are fully retiring in June 2022. Familiarize yourself with CloudPages
for your landing pages and microsite needs. To learn more, see Email Studio Classic Web Tools and Classic Cloudpages End of Life
Frequently Asked Questions.
How: To access CloudPages, in the Marketing Cloud navigation menu, select CloudPages in the Web Studio app switcher dropdown.
Classic Editor CloudPages Migrated to Content Builder

CloudPages created with the classic editor are migrated to Content Builder. Code Resources are now created from the code view in
Content Builder.
Why: To provide our customers with the best reliability, performance, and security, we updated the platform to a new experience.
CloudPages now has a cleaner, faster user interface. New features include improved content and collection sorting, and the ability to
copy existing content. The CloudPages Legacy Experience was removed from the Marketing Cloud navigation in a previous release as
part of its retirement. This final update moves all code from CloudPages built with the classic editor to Content Builder.
Enjoy CloudPages Enhancements

With this release, we improved the Marketing Cloud CloudPages user interface and experience.
Those changes include:
• Code Resources - Code Resources are now created with Content Builder and have a properties page for viewing Page Details and
unpublishing
• On the properties page, Advanced Settings and Unpublishing have been moved to the gear menu next to Page Details
• When publishing a page while editing, the URL for the newly published page becomes immediately clickable after publishing
• CloudPages now remembers your view (grid or list) and sorting (name, created date, modified date) preferences
• Microsites now have an Unpublish button
Get More Features and Flexibility with MobilePush SDK Renamed Engagement SDK
MobilePush SDK architecture adds features for behavioral in-app messages and mobile-triggered journeys in a more extensible, flexible
framework. You can mix and match the building blocks of SDK functionality from the MobilePush module, the CDP module, or both, for
your app. Merging MobilePush and Salesforce CDP SDKs into a single set of universal methods streamlines implementation. To reflect
support for MobilePush and Salesforce CDP, MobilePush SDK is renamed Engagement SDK.
How: Download and implement Engagement SDK, which contains and improves on the same methods introduced in October’s
MobilePush SDK.
Orchestrate Journeys Based on User Behavior with Mobile App Event Entry and Exit
Your mobile app is a critical component in delivering contextual, omnichannel experiences for your customers. Now, you can create a
direct link between your mobile app and Journey Builder and easily orchestrate journeys based on real-time user behavior.
When: The new Mobile App Event Journey Builder entry source and exit criteria will be made available on a rolling basis through March.
10
Marketing Cloud Release Notes Marketing Cloud Datorama Reports Spring '22 Release Notes
How: Define your mobile app events through the new Mobile App Event Management screen in Journey Builder. Update your app to
use the next-generation MobilePush SDK (Engagement SDK). Then, use the new Mobile App Event entry source or exit criteria to enter
or exit contacts from journeys based on their behavior.
Target Customers in Real Time with Journey Builder Entries for Push Notification and
In-App Message Engagement
Easily retarget a contact when they open a push notification or engage with an in-app message. The Push Message Engagement and
In-App Message Engagement Entry Sources listen for engagement from the selected messages and enter contacts into a journey. These
features allow you to easily retarget contacts by listening for the engagement of up to 10 separate messages.
When: These new entry source activities will be made available on a rolling basis through March.
How: Drag the Push Message Engagement Entry Source or the In-App Message Engagement Entry Source onto the journey canvas and
then configure them. The Push Message Engagement Entry Source enters a contact into the journey when the contact opens the specified
push notification. The In-App Message Engagement Entry Source enters a contact into the journey when the contact displays or dismisses
a message or clicks a button.
Engage Customers in Real Time with the Wait Until Activity for In-App Messages
React in real time based on whether a contact engages with an in-app message within a certain period. The Wait Until In-App Message
Engagement activity listens for engagement from a corresponding in-app message activity. Keep contacts in a wait step in the journey
until the specified engagement with the message occurs. If engagement doesn’t occur within the predefined time frame, you can send
the contact down an alternate path.
When: The new Wait Until In-App Engagement activity will be made available on a rolling basis through March.
How: Drag the Wait Until In-App Message Engagement activity onto your journey canvas directly before an In-App Message activity.
The Wait Until In-App Message Engagement activity listens for engagement from the In-App Message activity that directly precedes it.
Get More Information About Your SMS Sends with New Status Codes
Now you can find more information about your SMS sends with four new status codes. These codes add specificity to the failure response
set so you can better address a failing call.
How: Check out SMS Status Codes for more information.
Marketing Cloud Datorama Reports Spring '22 Release Notes

Learn about the expanded list of email dimensions and measurements, and more, from MC Datorama Reports.
Expand Email Reporting with New Dimensions and Measurements in Datorama Reports
Create new types of breakdowns with the expanded list of email dimensions and measurements. For example, create a report on
send performance by device type or compare open and click totals. Users with a Datorama Reports Advanced license can use the
new measurements and dimensions when customizing dashboards and when creating calculated measurements and dimensions.
Emails Configured to Suppress from Send Reports Are Excluded from Datorama Reports
Previously, Datorama Reports included Marketing Cloud sends that were configured with the Suppress from Send Reports option.
Now, emails configured with this option are no longer included in Datorama Reports.
11
Marketing Cloud Release Notes October 2021 Release
Expand Email Reporting with New Dimensions and Measurements in Datorama

Reports
Create new types of breakdowns with the expanded list of email dimensions and measurements. For example, create a report on send
performance by device type or compare open and click totals. Users with a Datorama Reports Advanced license can use the new
measurements and dimensions when customizing dashboards and when creating calculated measurements and dimensions.
Where: This change applies to Datorama Reports for Marketing Cloud in Pro, Corporate, and Enterprise editions.
When: You can migrate all Discover reports to Datorama Reports before Discover’s end-of-life on April 1, 2022.
Emails Configured to Suppress from Send Reports Are Excluded from Datorama
Reports
Previously, Datorama Reports included Marketing Cloud sends that were configured with the Suppress from Send Reports option. Now,
emails configured with this option are no longer included in Datorama Reports.
Where: This change applies to Datorama Reports for Marketing Cloud in Pro, Corporate, and Enterprise editions.

The October 2021 Marketing Cloud release occurs October 16, 2021 through October 23, 2021. Some features are made available to
your instance within a week of the release.
Get an exclusive, in-depth look at our new features by tuning into the October 2021 Marketing Cloud Release New Feature Overview.
Join this webinar on October 28, 2021 at 12:00 PM EDT.
Release Highlights
• iOS 15: Updates and Enhancements on page 21
• Mobile Marketing Enhancements on page 16
• Interaction Studio: Journey Builder Activity on page 16
• Salesforce CDP: Advanced Data Intelligence
• Salesforce CDP: Extensibility Enhancements
• Datorama: Personalization Insights for Interaction Studio
• Pardot: Extensibility Enhancements
• October 2021 Release FAQ
• October 2021 Release Demo Videos
12
Marketing Cloud Release Notes Marketing Cloud App and Setup October 2021 Release Notes
Release Edits
September 30, 2021 Original publish date
October 7, 2021 Add Package Manager release note
October 14, 2021 Removed Smart Capture sentence from Package Manager release
note
January 13, 2022 Removed File Location REST API release note
Marketing Cloud App and Setup October 2021 Release Notes

Learn about enforcing multi-factor authentication (MFA) in your tenant, expand your use of Marketing Cloud Package Manager, and
use Amazon AWS for encrypted file transfer activities and exports when exporting data out of Marketing Cloud.
Marketing Cloud Data Management October 2021 Release Notes
To use Google Advertising Leads in Marketing Cloud Ad Studio, download and install Google Lead Form from AppExchange. To
learn about Interaction Studio changes, see the New in Interaction Studio topic in the Interaction Studio Knowledge Base. Use the
updated Marketing Cloud or Sales Cloud Lead Capture applications in AppExchange.
Marketing Cloud Journeys and Messages October 2021 Release Notes
Update to the next-generation MobilePush SDK to orchestrate journeys based on user behavior with Mobile App Events. Let user
behavior guide your in-app messages by adding event triggers, and improve in-app message timing with enhanced display controls.
Check out your journey analytics on the new Journey History interface. Gain deeper insights into subscriber engagement with Partner
Seed List Integration. The default suppression period for Contact Deletes is now two days.
Marketing Cloud Einstein October 2021 Release Notes
Updated Einstein apps provide more reliable data based on some mail client providers’ mail privacy updates. Einstein apps show
you more overview details on the app facts. Einstein content testing shows predicted winners, and you can test more subject lines
at once using Einstein Copy Insights. Einstein Engagement Scoring updates threshold defaults for more accurate data, and they
allow you to create smarter segments in Salesforce CDP. Web & Mobile Analytics is being retired in October.
Marketing Cloud Cross-Cloud Integrations October 2021 Release Notes
We retired Marketing Cloud Connector Package Logging feature and Microsoft Dynamics Connector.
Datorama Personalization Insights for Interaction Studio App
The new insights app combines your Interaction Studio personalization efforts with your cross-channel marketing channels and
sources. Located in Salesforce Datorama’s Marketplace, this all-clicks, no-code app provides outcome-based insights that help you
optimize the ROI of your marketing channels and sources and improve the LTV of your segments.
Marketing Cloud Social October 2021 Release Notes
As a super user or admin, be aware that in the future, Salesforce will start enforcing the use of multi-factor authentication (MFA) for
direct logins to Social Studio.

Learn about enforcing multi-factor authentication (MFA) in your tenant, expand your use of Marketing Cloud Package Manager, and use
Amazon AWS for encrypted file transfer activities and exports when exporting data out of Marketing Cloud.
13

2020 release. With this change, the login process invites users to register a verification method and receive MFA challenges. If users
aren't ready for MFA, they can temporarily skip the invitation. However, beginning February 1, 2022, all customers are contractually
required to use MFA when accessing Marketing Cloud. Customers who started using Marketing Cloud after August 2020 or who
have already enabled MFA for direct or SSO logins, don’t see any changes to the login experience.
Get Ready for Future Multi-Factor Authentication Enforcement for Marketing Cloud Journeys and Messages
As of February 1, 2022, customers are contractually required to use multi-factor authentication (MFA) to access Marketing Cloud,
either when logging in directly or through single sign-on (SSO)*. To help customers comply with the MFA requirement, Salesforce
will enforce MFA for all direct logins to Marketing Cloud accounts in the June to July 2022 timeframe. For the protection of your
valuable data, we encourage you to implement MFA as soon as possible.
Import and Export Encrypted Files for Amazon S3 Without Using SFTP
Marketing Cloud can move encrypted data to and from an Amazon S3 file location. The new process removes client-side FTP and
lets you self-manage folders, permissions, and security controls within your S3 implementation. In Automation Studio, use the File
Transfer and Import activities to import an encrypted file in Amazon S3 into a data extension. Use the Data Extract and File Transfer
activities to encrypt and move data to your S3 bucket or folder.
Expand the Supported Use Cases for Marketing Cloud Package Manager
The Use Existing Item option avoids creating duplicate items for each package deployment. This option matches existing items by
name and skips creating an item but doesn’t update the definition of the item. Package Manager now also supports CloudPages,
including all form types other than microsites, which we plan to support in a future release. Select a CloudPages collection to add
all dependencies and supported items within that collection. Journey Builder has expanded to support journey goals and exit criteria
and Einstein activities.

2020 release. With this change, the login process invites users to register a verification method and receive MFA challenges. If users aren't
ready for MFA, they can temporarily skip the invitation. However, beginning February 1, 2022, all customers are contractually required
to use MFA when accessing Marketing Cloud. Customers who started using Marketing Cloud after August 2020 or who have already
enabled MFA for direct or SSO logins, don’t see any changes to the login experience.
Get Ready for Future Multi-Factor Authentication Enforcement for Marketing Cloud
Journeys and Messages
As of February 1, 2022, customers are contractually required to use multi-factor authentication (MFA) to access Marketing Cloud, either
when logging in directly or through single sign-on (SSO)*. To help customers comply with the MFA requirement, Salesforce will enforce
MFA for all direct logins to Marketing Cloud accounts in the June to July 2022 timeframe. For the protection of your valuable data, we
encourage you to implement MFA as soon as possible.
Where: This change applies to all Marketing Cloud tenants.
How: Here’s what to expect when Salesforce enforces MFA for direct logins to Marketing Cloud–Email Studio, Mobile Studio, and Journey
Builder accounts.
• Enforcement will take place in the June to July 2022 timeframe. We’ll update you with the actual enforcement date when it’s
confirmed.
• At that time, all Marketing Cloud users will be required to use MFA when logging in directly. If they haven’t done so already, they’ll
be prompted to register for MFA before they can get access.
• The option to disable MFA will be removed for all Marketing Cloud accounts.
14
Marketing Cloud Release Notes Marketing Cloud Data Management October 2021 Release
Notes
*
If you use SSO to access Marketing Cloud, Salesforce won't enable or enforce MFA for your SSO identity provider. However, you’re still
contractually obligated to implement MFA for all your users who access Marketing Cloud through SSO. To comply with this requirement,
you can use your SSO provider’s MFA service.
If you’re concerned about satisfying the MFA requirement by the deadline or what it means to be out of compliance, see MFA Requirement:
What's Top of Mind for Salesforce Trailblazers.
SEE ALSO:
Future Requirement to Enable Multi-Factor Authentication
Multi-Factor Authentication
Knowledge Article: Salesforce MFA FAQ
Knowledge Article: Multi-Factor Authentication Enforcement Roadmap
External Link: MFA for Salesforce Customer Site
Import and Export Encrypted Files for Amazon S3 Without Using SFTP
Marketing Cloud can move encrypted data to and from an Amazon S3 file location. The new process removes client-side FTP and lets
you self-manage folders, permissions, and security controls within your S3 implementation. In Automation Studio, use the File Transfer
and Import activities to import an encrypted file in Amazon S3 into a data extension. Use the Data Extract and File Transfer activities to
encrypt and move data to your S3 bucket or folder.
Expand the Supported Use Cases for Marketing Cloud Package Manager
The Use Existing Item option avoids creating duplicate items for each package deployment. This option matches existing items by name
and skips creating an item but doesn’t update the definition of the item. Package Manager now also supports CloudPages, including all
form types other than microsites, which we plan to support in a future release. Select a CloudPages collection to add all dependencies
and supported items within that collection. Journey Builder has expanded to support journey goals and exit criteria and Einstein activities.
When: We plan to make this expansion available to all Marketing Cloud customers by October 28, 2021.

To use Google Advertising Leads in Marketing Cloud Ad Studio, download and install Google Lead Form from AppExchange. To learn
about Interaction Studio changes, see the New in Interaction Studio topic in the Interaction Studio Knowledge Base. Use the updated
Marketing Cloud or Sales Cloud Lead Capture applications in AppExchange.
Capture Ad Data Leads from Facebook and Google in Updated AppExchange App
Enhance first-party data from Facebook and Google with additional profiles using the updated Lead Capture application in Marketing
Cloud or Sales Cloud. The Lead Capture application ingests lead data from Facebook and Google lead ad forms. In the previous
version, only lead ad forms from Facebook could be ingested.
Connect Google Advertising Leads in Salesforce
Enhance your first-party dataset with additional profiles, nurture prospects, and drive transactions by connecting your Google
advertising leads with Marketing Cloud or Sales Cloud. Download the Google Lead Form Extension from AppExchange and begin
capturing leads. Google Lead Form Extension requires the new Lead Capture version and isn’t available for legacy Lead Capture
applications.
Learn What's New in Interaction Studio
For Marketing Cloud Interaction Studio release notes, see New in Interaction Studio.
15
Marketing Cloud Release Notes Marketing Cloud Journeys and Messages October 2021
Release Notes
Capture Ad Data Leads from Facebook and Google in Updated AppExchange App
Enhance first-party data from Facebook and Google with additional profiles using the updated Lead Capture application in Marketing
Cloud or Sales Cloud. The Lead Capture application ingests lead data from Facebook and Google lead ad forms. In the previous version,
only lead ad forms from Facebook could be ingested.
When: Lead Capture is available in November 2021.
Why: The new versions replace the legacy versions which are due for retirement at a later date.
How: If you already have Lead Capture, uninstall the existing version. Then in AppExchange, download the new Lead Capture application
for either Marketing Cloud or Sales Cloud.
Connect Google Advertising Leads in Salesforce

Enhance your first-party dataset with additional profiles, nurture prospects, and drive transactions by connecting your Google advertising
leads with Marketing Cloud or Sales Cloud. Download the Google Lead Form Extension from AppExchange and begin capturing leads.
Google Lead Form Extension requires the new Lead Capture version and isn’t available for legacy Lead Capture applications.
Where: Google Lead Form Extensions are available in the Lightning Experience and for customers using the new versions of the Lead
Capture applications.
When: The Google Lead Form Extensions package is available in November 2021.
How: If you don’t have the latest version of Marketing Cloud or Sales Cloud Lead Capture, install it from AppExchange. Then, in
AppExchange, download Google Lead Form Extension for Marketing Cloud or Sales Cloud. Google Lead Form Extension appears as an
option when you create lead tasks.

SEE ALSO:
External Link: Interaction Studio Knowledge Base - New in Interaction Studio

Update to the next-generation MobilePush SDK to orchestrate journeys based on user behavior with Mobile App Events. Let user behavior
guide your in-app messages by adding event triggers, and improve in-app message timing with enhanced display controls. Check out
your journey analytics on the new Journey History interface. Gain deeper insights into subscriber engagement with Partner Seed List
Integration. The default suppression period for Contact Deletes is now two days.
Orchestrate Journeys Based on User Behaviors with Mobile App Events

Marketing Cloud now allows direct communication between your mobile app and Journey Builder to orchestrate journeys or trigger
in-app messages based on real-time user behavior. Define your mobile app events on the new Journey Builder Mobile App Event
Management page. Then use a new Mobile App Event entry source to enter contacts into journeys based on their mobile app
behavior. Separately, you can trigger the display of an in-app message based on the user’s mobile app behavior.
Engage Customers Based on Specific Behaviors with In-App Message Triggers
Display in-app messages based on user behavior anywhere within the app by creating triggers. For example, you can trigger an
in-app message when a user views a specific screen in your mobile app. Use event triggers to create meaningful engagement,
increase brand loyalty, and generate a higher return on investment for your marketing campaigns.
16
Release Notes
Engage Customers in Real Time with the Wait Until Activity for Push Notifications
React in real time based on whether a contact opens a push notification within a certain time frame. The Wait Until Push Engagement
activity listens for engagement from a corresponding Push Message activity. Keep contacts in a wait step in the journey until the
specified engagement with a MobilePush message occurs. If engagement doesn’t occur within the predefined time frame, you can
send the contact down an alternate path.
Improve In-App Message Timing with Enhanced Display Controls
You can now better control the timing and scenarios of when to display an in-app message.
Experience Improved Performance with Our Next-Generation MobilePush SDK
The new MobilePush software development kit (SDK) for native Android and iOS is built with a modular architecture that offers
improved performance and more easily allows for future enhancements. The SDK also includes the ability to track user actions and
trigger in-app messages based on user behavior.
in future releases.
CloudPages Classic Editor Migrated to Content Builder
With the next release, CloudPages created with the classic editor are migrated to Content Builder, and code resources are created
from the code view in Content Builder.
CloudPages URLs Support Tenant-Specific Endpoints
As part of our ongoing commitment to customer trust and security, integrations into Marketing Cloud are soon required to use
tenant-specific endpoints. Starting with the June 2021 release, CloudPages migrated to more secure URLs that use tenant-specific
endpoints and away from the older stack-specific endpoints. Certain types of existing CloudPages URLs can be impacted by this
change and require updating. CloudPages created and published after the change on their stack use the new TSE-based URLs and
aren’t affected.
Advance Your Deliverability Features Using Partner Seed List Integration
AppExchange deliverability partners can now integrate their seed lists with Marketing Cloud. The Partner Seed List Integration
provides deeper insights into subscriber engagement. You can also include these seeds in your email sends.
Delete Contacts Faster by Changing the Default Suppression Period
The 14-day default suppression for contact deletes has changed. Setting the default value to 0–2 days deletes your contacts sooner.
We recommend setting the suppression period to 0 to ensure that the contact deletion doesn’t pause after the contacts in the
request are suppressed.
Easily Add an Automatic Fallback for Interactive Email Forms
Automatic fallback lets marketers add a call-to-action button that links directly to the email form on the Interactive Email CloudPage
destination they set for the block.
Orchestrate Journeys Based on User Behaviors with Mobile App Events

Marketing Cloud now allows direct communication between your mobile app and Journey Builder to orchestrate journeys or trigger
in-app messages based on real-time user behavior. Define your mobile app events on the new Journey Builder Mobile App Event
Management page. Then use a new Mobile App Event entry source to enter contacts into journeys based on their mobile app behavior.
Separately, you can trigger the display of an in-app message based on the user’s mobile app behavior.
When: Mobile App Events and in-app message triggers are available with the October release.
How: In Journey Builder, navigate to the Events tab and select the Mobile App Events dropdown option. Register your app’s events by
uploading a .csv event schema file. Update your app to use the next-generation MobilePush SDK (v8.0), and implement it to track your
app events. Finally, use the Mobile App Event Journey Builder Entry Source, to be released later this year, to enter contacts into journeys
or trigger the display of in-app messages.
17
Release Notes
Engage Customers Based on Specific Behaviors with In-App Message Triggers

Display in-app messages based on user behavior anywhere within the app by creating triggers. For example, you can trigger an in-app
message when a user views a specific screen in your mobile app. Use event triggers to create meaningful engagement, increase brand
loyalty, and generate a higher return on investment for your marketing campaigns.
How: Update your app to the next-generation MobilePush SDK (v8.0). Work with your mobile app developer to configure events using
the new Journey Builder Event Management screen. Ask your mobile app developer to track your defined events with the updated
MobilePush SDK. Then configure your in-app messages with the applicable trigger criteria.
activity listens for engagement from a corresponding Push Message activity. Keep contacts in a wait step in the journey until the specified
engagement with a MobilePush message occurs. If engagement doesn’t occur within the predefined time frame, you can send the
contact down an alternate path.
When: This feature will be provisioned to customers who didn’t get it during the prior release.
How: Drag the Wait Until Push Engagement activity onto your journey canvas directly before a Push Message activity.
Improve In-App Message Timing with Enhanced Display Controls

You can now better control the timing and scenarios of when to display an in-app message.
How: Update your app to the next-generation MobilePush SDK (v8.0) to take advantage of these features.
• Session Limits—In MobilePush Administration, cap the maximum number of In-App Messages that show within a session. Set the
minimum time between message displays.
• Dynamic Expiration—In the In-App Message Activity in Journey Builder, set a unique expiration date for your In-App Message on a
per-user basis based on when they reach the activity.
• Delay Display—In the In-App Message Activity in Journey Builder, control how long to delay the display of a message after all trigger
criteria are met.
Experience Improved Performance with Our Next-Generation MobilePush SDK

The new MobilePush software development kit (SDK) for native Android and iOS is built with a modular architecture that offers improved
performance and more easily allows for future enhancements. The SDK also includes the ability to track user actions and trigger in-app
messages based on user behavior.
How: In Journey Builder, navigate to the Events tab and select the Mobile App Events dropdown option. Register your app’s events by
uploading a .csv event schema file. Then update your app to use the next-generation MobilePush SDK, and implement it to track your
app events. Finally, use the Mobile App Event Journey Builder Entry Source, to be released later this year.

in future releases.
When: You can still view and edit any existing landing pages and microsites in the classic Web Tools and continue migrating existing
items to CloudPages, as needed. Classic landing pages and microsites are fully retiring in June 2022. Familiarize yourself with CloudPages
for your landing pages and microsite needs. To learn more, see Email Studio Classic Web Tools and Classic Cloudpages End of Life
Frequently Asked Questions.
18
Release Notes
CloudPages Classic Editor Migrated to Content Builder

With the next release, CloudPages created with the classic editor are migrated to Content Builder, and code resources are created from
the code view in Content Builder.
copy existing content. The CloudPages Legacy Experience was removed from the Marketing Cloud navigation in a previous release as
part of its retirement. The final update in the next release moves all code from CloudPages built with the classic editor to Content Builder.

As part of our ongoing commitment to customer trust and security, integrations into Marketing Cloud are soon required to use
tenant-specific endpoints. Starting with the June 2021 release, CloudPages migrated to more secure URLs that use tenant-specific
endpoints and away from the older stack-specific endpoints. Certain types of existing CloudPages URLs can be impacted by this change
and require updating. CloudPages created and published after the change on their stack use the new TSE-based URLs and aren’t affected.
Note: Old CloudPage URLs still function via redirect to TSE-based URLs when accessed from a web browser. This redirect is a
temporary service to allow impacted customers to change their URLs to the TSE-based URLs.
How: Select Web Studio, then CloudPages in the Marketing Cloud app switcher. Select the collection that contains the page to update.
In the collection, click the specific page you need. The URL is visible below the page name.
URL Change Examples:
Old URLs = https://pub.exacttarget.com or https://[GUID].pub.sfmc-content.com
New URL = https://[string].pub.sfmc-content.com
Ensure that you evaluate where your CloudPage URLs direct traffic and update any hard-coded references to the new URL, which can
be found in Marketing Cloud. Use the CloudPagesURL function whenever possible to generate CloudPagesURLs within Marketing Cloud
rather than hard-coding them. Also, any customers performing additional validations on the domain or referrer in their custom scripting
can experience issues when the change occurs.
Note: CloudPages that use a private domain don’t require an update.
Advance Your Deliverability Features Using Partner Seed List Integration

AppExchange deliverability partners can now integrate their seed lists with Marketing Cloud. The Partner Seed List Integration provides
deeper insights into subscriber engagement. You can also include these seeds in your email sends.
Delete Contacts Faster by Changing the Default Suppression Period

The 14-day default suppression for contact deletes has changed. Setting the default value to 0–2 days deletes your contacts sooner. We
recommend setting the suppression period to 0 to ensure that the contact deletion doesn’t pause after the contacts in the request are
suppressed.
Easily Add an Automatic Fallback for Interactive Email Forms

Automatic fallback lets marketers add a call-to-action button that links directly to the email form on the Interactive Email CloudPage
destination they set for the block.
19
Marketing Cloud Release Notes Marketing Cloud Einstein October 2021 Release Notes
The Email Form block lets marketers easily create forms that render in many email clients. Until now, marketers had to create their own
fallback experiences. Some were able to drive to an existing form, but others had to create a second form with CloudPages smart capture
or another tool, which was more difficult.
See Interactive Email Form Display FAQ.

Updated Einstein apps provide more reliable data based on some mail client providers’ mail privacy updates. Einstein apps show you
more overview details on the app facts. Einstein content testing shows predicted winners, and you can test more subject lines at once
using Einstein Copy Insights. Einstein Engagement Scoring updates threshold defaults for more accurate data, and they allow you to
create smarter segments in Salesforce CDP. Web & Mobile Analytics is being retired in October.
2
Learn How Einstein Apps Are Addressing Mail Privacy Protection Updates
Some email client providers are making privacy protection changes that can impact open rate metrics and calculations. Some of the
Einstein apps now use an engagement rate metric instead of using a traditional open rate metric only in response to these privacy
changes. This metric is a blend of clicks and open rates that provide a more holistic view of your customers’ content engagement.
Compare More Subject Lines in Einstein Copy Insights
With Global Models, you can compare up to 10 subject lines at once to predict performance. More subject line comparisons give
marketers a broader view of the data points. It’s more efficient to get predictions and selected winners by comparing many subject
lines together. The feature is initially available in English only.
Create Smarter Segments with Einstein Engagement Scores for Salesforce CDP
Email Studio and MobilePush starter bundles automatically include Einstein Engagement Scores and make them available in the
attribute library when building segments. Building segments based on these scores lets marketers target the most engaged users
and suppress disengaged users for higher click-through rates, as well as create personalized and intelligent campaigns. To build
your segments, use the EinsteinEmailEngagementScores and EinsteinMobileEngagementScores objects in the attribute library.
Identify Predicted Winners in Einstein Content Selection
In Content Testing, winning assets with statistically significant results are identified with a new predicted winner badge. The badge
appears when you stop a test and when you review the asset details page in Content Testing.
Learn about Model Summaries with Einstein Overview AppFact Enhancements
Most Marketing Cloud Einstein Apps now include model summaries. Model summaries provide high level, easily digestible explanations
of how AI data is consumed and created, adding clarity about how the models work for non-technical users.
Optimize Einstein Engagement Scoring with New Thresholds
Einstein Engagement Scoring now uses the Local or Global Average settings as the default threshold instead of the Industry Average
setting. The new default settings are optimized for the new Einstein Engagement Rate. This rate is used in Einstein Engagement
Scoring Email as an improved means of Persona evaluation.
Web & Mobile Analytics Is Being Retired
Web & Mobile Analytics is scheduled for retirement in Salesforce Marketing Cloud on October 26, 2021. If you use the Abandoned
Cart tile in Web & Mobile Analytics, you can now use Abandoned Cart, Abandoned Browse, and Abandoned Wishlist using Behavioral
Triggers. If you relied on the Web & Mobile Analytics data export functions, try the Einstein Recommendation Integration with Contact
Builder. If you complete the Prerequisites for Einstein Recommendations, including importing a product and content catalog and
leaving Collect Tracking Code on your site, most data automatically populates in data extensions in your account. For analytics, we
recommend customers use Marketing Cloud Google Analytics Integration.
2
20
Learn How Einstein Apps Are Addressing Mail Privacy Protection Updates
Some email client providers are making privacy protection changes that can impact open rate metrics and calculations. Some of the
Einstein apps now use an engagement rate metric instead of using a traditional open rate metric only in response to these privacy
changes. This metric is a blend of clicks and open rates that provide a more holistic view of your customers’ content engagement.
Where: This change applies to these Einstein apps:
• Einstein Send Time Optimization
• Einstein Engagement Frequency
• Einstein Content InsightsI
• Einstein Engagement Scoring
• Einstein Content Selection
Note: For more details about the impact for each app, see the Marketing Cloud Einstein Updates for Email Client Privacy Changes
overview document.
Compare More Subject Lines in Einstein Copy Insights

With Global Models, you can compare up to 10 subject lines at once to predict performance. More subject line comparisons give marketers
a broader view of the data points. It’s more efficient to get predictions and selected winners by comparing many subject lines together.
The feature is initially available in English only.
Create Smarter Segments with Einstein Engagement Scores for Salesforce CDP
Email Studio and MobilePush starter bundles automatically include Einstein Engagement Scores and make them available in the attribute
library when building segments. Building segments based on these scores lets marketers target the most engaged users and suppress
disengaged users for higher click-through rates, as well as create personalized and intelligent campaigns. To build your segments, use
the EinsteinEmailEngagementScores and EinsteinMobileEngagementScores objects in the attribute library.
Where: This change applies to Lightning Experience with Einstein Engagement Scoring enabled in Marketing Cloud.
Identify Predicted Winners in Einstein Content Selection

In Content Testing, winning assets with statistically significant results are identified with a new predicted winner badge. The badge
appears when you stop a test and when you review the asset details page in Content Testing.
Learn about Model Summaries with Einstein Overview AppFact Enhancements

Most Marketing Cloud Einstein Apps now include model summaries. Model summaries provide high level, easily digestible explanations
of how AI data is consumed and created, adding clarity about how the models work for non-technical users.
Optimize Einstein Engagement Scoring with New Thresholds

Einstein Engagement Scoring now uses the Local or Global Average settings as the default threshold instead of the Industry Average
setting. The new default settings are optimized for the new Einstein Engagement Rate. This rate is used in Einstein Engagement Scoring
Email as an improved means of Persona evaluation.
Why: Local default averages use your business unit’s email or, for MobilePush, the app’s own historical performance. Local default
averages subjectively compare your customers’ likely engagement. Alternatively, use global default averages that let Einstein detect
aggregate, anonymous trends across many Salesforce customers, and then use a broader set of aggregated data to train and improve
21
Marketing Cloud Release Notes Marketing Cloud Cross-Cloud Integrations October 2021
Release Notes
modeling. Opting in to use global model data broadens the amount of data that Einstein can use to make predictions. As a result,
predictions are more accurate and can cover more contacts in your Enterprise, leading to better engagement rates
Web & Mobile Analytics Is Being Retired

Web & Mobile Analytics is scheduled for retirement in Salesforce Marketing Cloud on October 26, 2021. If you use the Abandoned Cart
tile in Web & Mobile Analytics, you can now use Abandoned Cart, Abandoned Browse, and Abandoned Wishlist using Behavioral Triggers.
If you relied on the Web & Mobile Analytics data export functions, try the Einstein Recommendation Integration with Contact Builder. If
you complete the Prerequisites for Einstein Recommendations, including importing a product and content catalog and leaving Collect
Tracking Code on your site, most data automatically populates in data extensions in your account. For analytics, we recommend customers
use Marketing Cloud Google Analytics Integration.
Note: If you use any of these Marketing Cloud features, don’t change your Collect Tracking Code implementation or Marketing
Cloud rejects all data from your site. If you don’t use these features, remove Collect Tracking Code from your site.
• Einstein Email Recommendations
• Einstein Web Recommendations
• Einstein Engagement Scoring
• Behavioral Triggers
How: To learn more about Behavioral Triggers and Einstein Recommendations, use these resources:
• Einstein Recommendations Prerequisites
• Einstein Recommendations
• Einstein Recommendation Integration with Contact Builder
• Getting Started with Einstein Recommendations (video)
• Einstein Email and Web Recommendations (Trailhead modules)
• Getting Started with Behavioral Triggers (Trailhead module)
For analytics, use these resources:
• Google Analytics Home
• Get Started With Analytics
• Google Analytics Academy
• Google Analytics Basics (Trailhead modules)
• Google Analytics 360 Integration for Marketing Cloud (Trailhead modules)

We retired Marketing Cloud Connector Package Logging feature and Microsoft Dynamics Connector.
Microsoft Dynamics Connector Is Being Retired for All Versions

The MSCRM connector with Marketing Cloud is being retired for all Salesforce orgs as of October 29, 2021. This retirement is due to
the enforcement of the Unified Interface by MS Dynamics. The MS Dynamics Connector by Marketing Cloud isn’t compatible with
the Unified Interface. To add new subscribers, send emails, and access email tracking data, you must now use Marketing Cloud Email
Studio.
22
Marketing Cloud Release Notes Datorama Personalization Insights for Interaction Studio App
Marketing Cloud Connector Package Log Has Been Retired

We retired the Marketing Cloud Connect Package Logging feature to make our product more secure. The data collected by this
feature is used by customers to troubleshoot triggered sends and Journey Builder Salesforce Entry Event issues. We recommend
that customers remove all documents that have been generated by this logging.
Microsoft Dynamics Connector Is Being Retired for All Versions

The MSCRM connector with Marketing Cloud is being retired for all Salesforce orgs as of October 29, 2021. This retirement is due to the
enforcement of the Unified Interface by MS Dynamics. The MS Dynamics Connector by Marketing Cloud isn’t compatible with the Unified
Interface. To add new subscribers, send emails, and access email tracking data, you must now use Marketing Cloud Email Studio.
How: Information about the MS Dynamics transition to a Unified Interface is available here.
For more information, see Microsoft Dynamics CRM Retirement.
Marketing Cloud Connector Package Log Has Been Retired

We retired the Marketing Cloud Connect Package Logging feature to make our product more secure. The data collected by this feature
is used by customers to troubleshoot triggered sends and Journey Builder Salesforce Entry Event issues. We recommend that customers
remove all documents that have been generated by this logging.
How: To remove logged documents, select all the files that start with “Log::” and click Del. Then to permanently delete the logs, remove
them from the Org recycle bin.
For information on how to validate these features without logging enabled, see Initiate Log.
Datorama Personalization Insights for Interaction Studio App

The new insights app combines your Interaction Studio personalization efforts with your cross-channel marketing channels and sources.
Located in Salesforce Datorama’s Marketplace, this all-clicks, no-code app provides outcome-based insights that help you optimize the
ROI of your marketing channels and sources and improve the LTV of your segments.
Where: Available to any Interaction Studio Premium with Data Warehouse add on + any full Datorama license.
When: The Interaction Studio app is available on a rolling basis to a limited number of customers starting with the October 2021 release.
If it’s not available to you, contact your Salesforce account executive regarding timing and eligibility.
How: Available for download in the Datorama Marketplace.

As a super user or admin, be aware that in the future, Salesforce will start enforcing the use of multi-factor authentication (MFA) for direct
logins to Social Studio.
Get Ready for Future Multi-Factor Authentication Enforcement for Marketing Cloud Social
As of February 1, 2022, customers are contractually required to use multi-factor authentication (MFA) to access Marketing Cloud–Social
products, either when logging in directly or through single sign-on (SSO)*. Starting in early 2022, to help customers comply with
the MFA requirement, Salesforce will automatically enable MFA for all direct logins to Marketing Cloud–Social accounts. Enforcement
of MFA will follow later in 2022. For the protection of your valuable data, we encourage you to implement MFA as soon as possible.
23
Marketing Cloud Release Notes August 2021 Release
Get Ready for Future Multi-Factor Authentication Enforcement for Marketing Cloud
Social
As of February 1, 2022, customers are contractually required to use multi-factor authentication (MFA) to access Marketing Cloud–Social
products, either when logging in directly or through single sign-on (SSO)*. Starting in early 2022, to help customers comply with the
MFA requirement, Salesforce will automatically enable MFA for all direct logins to Marketing Cloud–Social accounts. Enforcement of
MFA will follow later in 2022. For the protection of your valuable data, we encourage you to implement MFA as soon as possible.
Where: This change applies to all Marketing Cloud–Social tenants.
How: Here’s what to expect:
• On behalf of customers, Salesforce will automatically enable MFA for direct logins on this schedule:
When Who is Affected

Between January - March 2022 all site administrators
Between June - August 2022 all users not already using MFA
With this change, affected users start receiving ongoing invitations to opt into using MFA. Users can skip these invitations, or admins
can disable MFA if their users aren't ready yet.
• Between October and December 2022, Salesforce will enforce MFA for all direct logins. At this time, all users must use MFA to
access their accounts and will be prompted to register for it if they haven’t already. If you disabled MFA, we’ll turn it back on. The
option to disable MFA will be removed for all Marketing Cloud–Social accounts.
*
If you use SSO to access Marketing Cloud–Social products, Salesforce won't enable or enforce MFA for your SSO identity provider.
However, you’re still contractually obligated to implement MFA for all your users who access Marketing Cloud–Social accounts through
SSO. To comply with this requirement, you can use your SSO provider’s MFA service.
If you’re concerned about satisfying the MFA requirement by the deadline or what it means to be out of compliance, see MFA Requirement:
What's Top of Mind for Salesforce Trailblazers.
SEE ALSO:
Enable Multi-Factor Authentication as a Social Studio
Knowledge Article: Salesforce MFA FAQ
Knowledge Article: Multi-Factor Authentication Enforcement Roadmap
External Link: MFA for Salesforce Customer Site
August 2021 Release

The August 2021 Marketing Cloud release occurs August 7, 2021 through August 14, 2021. Some features are made available to your
Get an exclusive, in-depth look at our new features by tuning into the August 2021 Marketing Cloud Release New Feature Overview.
Join this webinar on August 19, 2021 at 12:00 PM EST.
24
Marketing Cloud Release Notes August 2021 Release

Release Highlights
• Datorama Insights for Slack
• Datorama Reports for Marketing Cloud Enhancements
• Interaction Studio: Experience Cloud Integration on page 29
• Wait Until Push Engagement - Journey Builder Activity on page 32
• Distributed Marketing: CPI for Bulk Sends on page 29
• Datorama: Scenario Planning for Media Planning Center
• August 2021 Release FAQ
Release Edits
July 22, 2021 Original publish date
August 9, 2021 Added Self-Serve SSL topic
Marketing Cloud App and Setup August 2021 Release Notes

Learn about enforcing multi-factor authentication (MFA) in your tenant, expand your use of Marketing Cloud Package Manager, and
use Amazon AWS for file transfer activities and exports when exporting data out of Marketing Cloud.
Marketing Cloud Cross-Cloud Integrations August 2021 Release Notes
Marketing Cloud Connect version 2 has been retired. Synchronized data extensions pause when record collection filter isn’t available.
You can now use custom personalization interaction tabs in Bulk Sends.
Marketing Cloud Data Management August 2021 Release Notes
To learn about Interaction Studio changes, see the New in Interaction Studio topic in the Interaction Studio Knowledge Base.
Marketing Cloud Einstein August 2021 Release Notes
Einstein Content Testing makes it easier than ever to conduct content experiments. Copy insights are enhanced to detect potential
bias. App Facts Overview is updated to broaden and maximize the impact Einstein can have on your bottom line. You can configure
upper and lower thresholds now for Einstein Engagement Scoring (EES) Email. For EES Email customers in the European Union
(EU-based customers), data now resides in Ireland instead of Germany. Einstein Engagement Scores are now refreshed weekly instead
of monthly, aligning to the new model refresh schedule.
Marketing Cloud Journeys and Messages August 2021 Release Notes
Engage Journey Builder customers in real time with the Wait Until activity. Email Studio Classic web tools are being retired. Sync
Marketing Cloud contact data to Sitecore with new Journey Builder activity. Legacy CloudPages is removed. Contact Deletes default
suppression window is changing from 14 days to 2 days in the October release. You can now delete the queue for triggered sends
associated with Journey Builder in Email Studio Interactions. Legacy UI customers are being upgraded to the latest UI.
Marketing Cloud Analytics August 2021 Release Notes
Enable Datorama Reports with Corporate, Enterprise, and now Pro Editions. For Datorama Reports Advanced: use the new Queries
feature to explore your data on a deeper level, and improved ways to manage custom fields and credentials.
25
Marketing Cloud Release Notes Marketing Cloud App and Setup August 2021 Release Notes
Marketing Cloud App and Setup August 2021 Release Notes

Learn about enforcing multi-factor authentication (MFA) in your tenant, expand your use of Marketing Cloud Package Manager, and use
Amazon AWS for file transfer activities and exports when exporting data out of Marketing Cloud.
Export Data and Transfer Files with AWS S3

You can now choose an AWS S3 bucket for file transfer activities, imports, and exports when moving data between Marketing Cloud
and AWS. You can also use IAM Roles as an authentication option when configuring an AWS S3 bucket as a file location.
Work in an Updated Marketing Cloud Package Manager
Experience Marketing Cloud Package Manager with more options for creating your packaged solutions. Show recently created
package definitions and download the latest version of your packaged items in the new Package tab. Review your recently deployed
packages in the new Deploy tab. This change splits up the packaging and deployment workflows to improve your packaged solution
management. You get visibility into previously defined and deployed packages, and you can both edit an existing definition and
download a new file based on previous definitions.
Get Extended Data Extension Support in Marketing Cloud Package Manager
Include synchronized and shared data extensions in your Marketing Cloud Package Manager deployment. Create synchronized and
shared data extensions for audiences, decision splits, and more. Then deploy them with Marketing Cloud Package Manager. Previously,
Marketing Cloud Package Manager couldn’t package or deploy items that reference these data extensions. All shared data extensions
must reside in the top-level account of a Marketing Cloud tenant. Any other shared data extensions are deployed as local items and
aren’t shared. All synchronized data extensions must exist in the business unit targeted for deployment. Otherwise, you receive an
error and the deployment fails.
Apply Granular Permissions for Marketing Cloud Package Manager
This release adds a permission set called Marketing Cloud Package Manager. These new permissions allow you to assign separate
permissions to users for packaging and deployment. Marketing Cloud Package Manager is available to all Marketing Cloud admins.
Enforce Multi-Factor Authentication in Your Tenant
Marketing Cloud admins can enforce multi-factor authentication (MFA) for all users. This setting prevents users in your tenant from
skipping the registration process and forces them to register their verification method the next time they log in. This option applies
only to Marketing Cloud tenants created before the August 2020 Marketing Cloud release.
Self-Serve SSL Certificates for Custom Domains
This feature lets you use Marketing Cloud Setup to secure custom domains configured for Sender Authentication Package (SAP) or
private domains configured for CloudPages.
Export Data and Transfer Files with AWS S3

You can now choose an AWS S3 bucket for file transfer activities, imports, and exports when moving data between Marketing Cloud
and AWS. You can also use IAM Roles as an authentication option when configuring an AWS S3 bucket as a file location.
How: When creating a file location, select Amazon Simple Storage Service for the location type. When running extracts, imports, and
exports, choose your configured AWS S3 bucket.
See File Locations.
26
Marketing Cloud Release Notes Marketing Cloud App and Setup August 2021 Release Notes
Work in an Updated Marketing Cloud Package Manager

Experience Marketing Cloud Package Manager with more options for creating your packaged solutions. Show recently created package
definitions and download the latest version of your packaged items in the new Package tab. Review your recently deployed packages
in the new Deploy tab. This change splits up the packaging and deployment workflows to improve your packaged solution management.
You get visibility into previously defined and deployed packages, and you can both edit an existing definition and download a new file
based on previous definitions.
How: Open Marketing Cloud Package Manager to see the new landing page, including separate starting points for packaging and
deployment. The Packaging tab displays all previous packages. Create a package from scratch or a new package based on an existing
definition. Edit the contents of an existing package definition. Download the latest items for an existing package definition. The Deployment
tab displays all previous deployments. We plan for changes to Package Manager to appear in Marketing Cloud accounts by August 16.
Get Extended Data Extension Support in Marketing Cloud Package Manager

Include synchronized and shared data extensions in your Marketing Cloud Package Manager deployment. Create synchronized and
shared data extensions for audiences, decision splits, and more. Then deploy them with Marketing Cloud Package Manager. Previously,
Marketing Cloud Package Manager couldn’t package or deploy items that reference these data extensions. All shared data extensions
must reside in the top-level account of a Marketing Cloud tenant. Any other shared data extensions are deployed as local items and
aren’t shared. All synchronized data extensions must exist in the business unit targeted for deployment. Otherwise, you receive an error
and the deployment fails.
How: When you package an item that includes a reference to a shared data extension, Marketing Cloud Package Manager shows a
warning that the shared data extension must exist in the parent tenant before deploying in the target business unit. Otherwise, the data
extension deploys as a local (non-shared) item. If you deploy from one tenant to another, Marketing Cloud Package Manager creates a
new shared data extension in the new tenant. If you deploy to a child business unit, Marketing Cloud Package Manager tries to locate
a shared data extension in that business unit. Otherwise, the data extension deploys as a local (non-shared) item.
When you package a synchronized data extension, Marketing Cloud Package Manager shows a warning that the synchronized data
extension must exist in the target business unit to deploy any item that references that data extension. If Marketing Cloud Package
Manager finds the referenced data extension in the target business unit, it deploys the items referencing the data extension. Otherwise,
the deployment fails. We plan for changes to Package Manager to appear in Marketing Cloud accounts by August 16.
Apply Granular Permissions for Marketing Cloud Package Manager

This release adds a permission set called Marketing Cloud Package Manager. These new permissions allow you to assign separate
permissions to users for packaging and deployment. Marketing Cloud Package Manager is available to all Marketing Cloud admins.
Users with the Administrator or Marketing Cloud Administrator roles receive these permissions shortly after the release. Add these
permissions to custom roles or specific individuals manually. We plan for changes to Package Manager to appear in Marketing Cloud
accounts by August 16.
Enforce Multi-Factor Authentication in Your Tenant

Marketing Cloud admins can enforce multi-factor authentication (MFA) for all users. This setting prevents users in your tenant from
skipping the registration process and forces them to register their verification method the next time they log in. This option applies only
to Marketing Cloud tenants created before the August 2020 Marketing Cloud release.
You can enable this setting in the Security Settings section of Setup in Marketing Cloud. We plan to make this feature available to all
applicable Marketing Cloud accounts by the end of August. You cannot disable this setting after you enable it. MFA will be mandatory
for all Marketing Cloud customers beginning February 1, 2022.
27
Marketing Cloud Release Notes Marketing Cloud Cross-Cloud Integrations August 2021
Release Notes
Self-Serve SSL Certificates for Custom Domains

This feature lets you use Marketing Cloud Setup to secure custom domains configured for Sender Authentication Package (SAP) or
private domains configured for CloudPages.
When: This feature is available after August 17, 2021.
Why: Previously, the Marketing Cloud process for provisioning SSL Certificates took up to 4-6 weeks to secure the domains. Now customers
who have delegated control of their domain to Salesforce Marketing Cloud can secure custom domains in less than 10 days.
How:
1. Navigate to Setup, then search for and select Domain SSL Certificates.
2. Click the action arrow next to a domain, then select Secure this Domain.
See Secure a Delegated Custom Domain.
Marketing Cloud Cross-Cloud Integrations August 2021 Release Notes

Marketing Cloud Connect version 2 has been retired. Synchronized data extensions pause when record collection filter isn’t available.
You can now use custom personalization interaction tabs in Bulk Sends.
Marketing Cloud Connector Version 2 Retired

To improve security, the Marketing Cloud Connector version 2 (V2), which lets users interact with Marketing Cloud features (Email
Classic) in Salesforce, has been retired. Salesforce no longer supports unmanaged packages with security patches that can’t be
pushed to customer environments.
Retiring Marketing Cloud Microsoft Dynamics
On December 1, 2020, Marketing Cloud Microsoft Dynamics (MSCRM) retired online integration due to the enforcement of the
Unified Interface by Microsoft Dynamics. On October 29, 2021, we’ll retire the Marketing Cloud Microsoft Dynamics (MSCRM)
on-premises integration as well. The Microsoft Dynamics Connector by Marketing Cloud isn’t compatible with the Unified Interface.
With the MSCRM integrations being retired, customers must use Marketing Cloud Email Studio functionality to add new subscribers,
send emails and access tracking data for emails. See this knowledge article for more information.
Synchronized Entity Paused When Record Collection Filter Is Unavailable
When the field used as a record collection filter for the synchronized data source in Marketing Cloud Connect is unavailable,
synchronization pauses. The field is often unavailable because it’s being renamed or removed from the Salesforce object.
Enhance Distributed Marketing Bulk Sends with Custom Personalization
You can now add custom personalization interaction tabs for more complex use cases, such as carbon copying or using an alternate
from email address. For optimal performance, use no more than 10 custom interaction tabs with no more than 10 fields each. Tabs
appear in the personalization workflow from top to bottom in the order that they were registered.
Marketing Cloud Connector Version 2 Retired

To improve security, the Marketing Cloud Connector version 2 (V2), which lets users interact with Marketing Cloud features (Email Classic)
in Salesforce, has been retired. Salesforce no longer supports unmanaged packages with security patches that can’t be pushed to
customer environments.
How: If you’ve been using V2, we recommend choosing one of these options.
• For Sales or Service Cloud Enterprise or Unlimited Edition, upgrade to the latest version of Marketing Cloud Connect. In Marketing
Cloud, turn on Subscriber Key. Customer support enables the Subscriber Key option.
28
Marketing Cloud Release Notes Marketing Cloud Data Management August 2021 Release
Notes
• For Salesforce Professional Edition, upgrade your Salesforce Sales or Service Cloud Edition to either Enterprise or Unlimited to access
V5.
• Log in to Marketing Cloud to send email.
For more details about differences between the two versions, check out Marketing Cloud Connect Features.
Retiring Marketing Cloud Microsoft Dynamics

On December 1, 2020, Marketing Cloud Microsoft Dynamics (MSCRM) retired online integration due to the enforcement of the Unified
Interface by Microsoft Dynamics. On October 29, 2021, we’ll retire the Marketing Cloud Microsoft Dynamics (MSCRM) on-premises
integration as well. The Microsoft Dynamics Connector by Marketing Cloud isn’t compatible with the Unified Interface. With the MSCRM
integrations being retired, customers must use Marketing Cloud Email Studio functionality to add new subscribers, send emails and
access tracking data for emails. See this knowledge article for more information.
Synchronized Entity Paused When Record Collection Filter Is Unavailable

When the field used as a record collection filter for the synchronized data source in Marketing Cloud Connect is unavailable, synchronization
pauses. The field is often unavailable because it’s being renamed or removed from the Salesforce object.
How: The Activity page logs all actions for review and troubleshooting purposes. Implement Synchronized Data Sources Best Practices
by removing the field from your Marketing Cloud synchronized data source first before modifying the original source.
Enhance Distributed Marketing Bulk Sends with Custom Personalization

You can now add custom personalization interaction tabs for more complex use cases, such as carbon copying or using an alternate
from email address. For optimal performance, use no more than 10 custom interaction tabs with no more than 10 fields each. Tabs
appear in the personalization workflow from top to bottom in the order that they were registered.
Who: This feature is available to all customers who have Distributed Marketing version 233 or later installed.
Marketing Cloud Data Management August 2021 Release Notes

To learn about Interaction Studio changes, see the New in Interaction Studio topic in the Interaction Studio Knowledge Base.


SEE ALSO:
29
Marketing Cloud Release Notes Marketing Cloud Einstein August 2021 Release Notes
Marketing Cloud Einstein August 2021 Release Notes

Einstein Content Testing makes it easier than ever to conduct content experiments. Copy insights are enhanced to detect potential bias.
App Facts Overview is updated to broaden and maximize the impact Einstein can have on your bottom line. You can configure upper
and lower thresholds now for Einstein Engagement Scoring (EES) Email. For EES Email customers in the European Union (EU-based
customers), data now resides in Ireland instead of Germany. Einstein Engagement Scores are now refreshed weekly instead of monthly,
aligning to the new model refresh schedule.
3
Manage Einstein for Marketing Cloud Content Selection Programmatically

The new Einstein Content Selection API enables automated or programmatic management of Einstein Content Selection assets,
profiles, and configuration. It covers use cases not provided previously by the Einstein Content Selection user interface or the batch
import via a CSV file. For example, a sports news service now can add content to Einstein Content Selection every time a new story
is posted to its site. Or a marketer can push assets from a digital asset management platform to Einstein Content Selection. Also, you
can now update subscriber profiles in Einstein Content Selection the moment their attribute value changes. For example, attribute
values are changed when a subscriber updates their location or if their preferred product category changes.
Configure Thresholds for Einstein Engagement Scoring Email
Marketing Cloud admins can now customize the upper and lower thresholds for each Engagement Scoring KPI. KPIs include Likelihood
to Open, Click, Unsubscribe, and Purchase (Requires Einstein Recommendations). This enhancement gives marketers greater control
over how Engagement Scoring categorizes their contacts to better align their business goals with Einstein’s predictions.
App Facts Overview Updates
Review where each Einstein application can help you without ever leaving Marketing Cloud. Simple app-specific details help you
understand the data an app can use. Details include the channels and parts of Marketing Cloud it supports, and the workflows it’s
designed to help you optimize. Hover over each detail to review deeper compatibility information, compare apps side by side, and
click out to the app’s corresponding help documentation without needing to search.
Test Your Content Assets
Marketers continually test content to determine what’s working with the audience. But setting up tests and getting results the old
way takes time. Einstein Content Testing is designed to make it easy to test content variations. Create a test, add the content you
want to test, and then add the Einstein Content Testing content block to an email. Einstein performs the test and shows you the
results in real time.
Get More Copy Insights
The Einstein Copy Insights performance tester for subject lines now evaluates language for the possibility of bias based on categories
like age, gender, orientation, socioeconomic status, and ability. When potential bias is detected, users are gently altered. Your users
can still run tests and aren’t required to change wording. And they can use these alerts and help documentation to spot and rethink
language that potentially facilitates unethical use. And, the Einstein Copy Insights overview card now shows a summary of your
business unit’s top- and bottom-performing insights plus your top-performing subject lines.
Manage Einstein for Marketing Cloud Content Selection Programmatically

The new Einstein Content Selection API enables automated or programmatic management of Einstein Content Selection assets, profiles,
and configuration. It covers use cases not provided previously by the Einstein Content Selection user interface or the batch import via
a CSV file. For example, a sports news service now can add content to Einstein Content Selection every time a new story is posted to its
site. Or a marketer can push assets from a digital asset management platform to Einstein Content Selection. Also, you can now update
subscriber profiles in Einstein Content Selection the moment their attribute value changes. For example, attribute values are changed
when a subscriber updates their location or if their preferred product category changes.
3
30
Marketing Cloud Release Notes Marketing Cloud Einstein August 2021 Release Notes
Configure Thresholds for Einstein Engagement Scoring Email

Marketing Cloud admins can now customize the upper and lower thresholds for each Engagement Scoring KPI. KPIs include Likelihood
to Open, Click, Unsubscribe, and Purchase (Requires Einstein Recommendations). This enhancement gives marketers greater control
over how Engagement Scoring categorizes their contacts to better align their business goals with Einstein’s predictions.
How: You can configure thresholds in the Einstein Engagement Scoring section of the Einstein Setup page. Or use the new prompt
available in the Einstein Engagement Scoring Email app. Set up Einstein Engagement Scoring for Email. Setup includes allowing Einstein’s
models to perform an initial run, which takes from 48 to 72 hours. After setup, you can configure the thresholds.
App Facts Overview Updates

Review where each Einstein application can help you without ever leaving Marketing Cloud. Simple app-specific details help you
understand the data an app can use. Details include the channels and parts of Marketing Cloud it supports, and the workflows it’s
designed to help you optimize. Hover over each detail to review deeper compatibility information, compare apps side by side, and click
out to the app’s corresponding help documentation without needing to search.
Where: App Facts are available in Einstein Overview. You don’t have to activate applications to review the facts.
Why: Einstein applications support many Marketing Cloud applications and experiences that don’t necessarily exist in the same screen
or workflows. Einstein App Facts use marketer-friendly terms and an easy-to-scan framework. These items help you quickly understand
which apps work together and with your existing workflows, or even workflows you’re considering.
How: In Einstein Overview, click the Details link on an individual Einstein application. To go back to the app’s primary experience, click
Back.
Test Your Content Assets

Marketers continually test content to determine what’s working with the audience. But setting up tests and getting results the old way
takes time. Einstein Content Testing is designed to make it easy to test content variations. Create a test, add the content you want to
test, and then add the Einstein Content Testing content block to an email. Einstein performs the test and shows you the results in real
time.
How: In Einstein Content Selection, from the main menu Einstein tab, click the Content Testing tab. A list of the tests created appears.
To see test results, click a test. Click New Test to create a test. Name the test and add the content that you want to test. When the test
is ready to go, click Publish. After a test is published you can add it to an email in Content Builder. Drag the new Einstein Content Testing
content block into your message.
Get More Copy Insights

The Einstein Copy Insights performance tester for subject lines now evaluates language for the possibility of bias based on categories
like age, gender, orientation, socioeconomic status, and ability. When potential bias is detected, users are gently altered. Your users can
still run tests and aren’t required to change wording. And they can use these alerts and help documentation to spot and rethink language
that potentially facilitates unethical use. And, the Einstein Copy Insights overview card now shows a summary of your business unit’s
top- and bottom-performing insights plus your top-performing subject lines.
Why: It’s crucial to use the power of AI in an ethical way. Salesforce builds tools to help champion ethical marketing at every step of the
process.
How: Bias flagging is available in the Einstein Copy Insights performance tester. Language with the potential to permit bias is flagged
automatically. Use the flag and your understanding of the context to make a responsible decision about whether to include, edit, or
exclude certain language. Consult Identify Attributes that Can Introduce Bias for hints on detecting bias.
31
Marketing Cloud Release Notes Marketing Cloud Journeys and Messages August 2021
Release Notes
Marketing Cloud Journeys and Messages August 2021 Release Notes

Engage Journey Builder customers in real time with the Wait Until activity. Email Studio Classic web tools are being retired. Sync Marketing
Cloud contact data to Sitecore with new Journey Builder activity. Legacy CloudPages is removed. Contact Deletes default suppression
window is changing from 14 days to 2 days in the October release. You can now delete the queue for triggered sends associated with
Journey Builder in Email Studio Interactions. Legacy UI customers are being upgraded to the latest UI.
activity listens for engagement from a corresponding Push Message activity. Keep contacts in a wait step in the journey until the
specified engagement with a MobilePush message occurs. If engagement doesn’t occur within the predefined time frame, you can
send the contact down an alternate path.
Email Studio Classic Web Tools Are Being Retired
We’re gradually retiring Email Studio Classic web tools, including landing pages and microsites, and replacing them with an updated
platform in CloudPages. CloudPages has a cleaner, faster user interface with improved content and collection sorting, and the ability
to copy existing content. In this release, we removed the Create button, and you can now create landing pages and microsites in
CloudPages. You can still view and edit existing landing pages and microsites in the classic Web Tools and continue migrating items
to CloudPages.
Sync Connect Contact Data to Sitecore
Use the Sitecore Connect for SFMC activity to send contact status from Marketing Cloud to Sitecore as a contact moves through a
journey.
CloudPages Legacy Experience Removed
The CloudPages Legacy Experience is removed from the Marketing Cloud navigation. All classic editor CloudPages content is still
accessible in CloudPages. As stated earlier this year, Marketing Cloud is gradually retiring Classic CloudPages. For the last release, we
renamed the new experience CloudPages and the previous CloudPages application CloudPages Legacy Experience.
With the June release, we began migrating CloudPages to more secure URLs that use Tenant-Specific Endpoints (TSE) and away
from the older Stack-Specific endpoints. Certain types of existing CloudPages URLs can be impacted by this change and require
updating. CloudPages created and published after the change on their stack use the new TSE-based URLs and aren’t affected.
Although the new TSE-based URLs are live as of June 2021, the old CloudPage URLs still function via redirect. This redirect capability
is a temporary service to allow impacted customers to change their old CloudPage URLs to the new TSE-based URLs.
Default Suppression Period for Contact Deletes Is Being Reduced
The default suppression 14-day window for deleting contacts is changing to 2 days. We recommend setting the suppression period
to 0 to ensure that contact deletion doesn’t pause after the contacts in the request are suppressed. Contacts can’t be reintroduced
and messaged while they’re suppressed, so shortening the default suppression facilitates reintroduction and messaging.
Update Email Studio from Legacy ASPX UI
If you’re still using the Email Studio legacy ASPX user interface, you get upgraded to the new UI in this release.
Delete the Journey Builder Triggered Send Queue
You can now manage and delete the queue for triggered sends associated with Journey Builder in Email Studio Interactions. You
no longer have to create a support case to clear the queue of subscribers who have opted out of receiving a campaign.
32
Release Notes
activity listens for engagement from a corresponding Push Message activity. Keep contacts in a wait step in the journey until the specified
engagement with a MobilePush message occurs. If engagement doesn’t occur within the predefined time frame, you can send the
contact down an alternate path.
How: Drag the Wait Until Push Engagement activity onto your journey canvas directly next to a Push Message activity.
When: This feature is available on a rolling basis after the August 2021 release.
Email Studio Classic Web Tools Are Being Retired

We’re gradually retiring Email Studio Classic web tools, including landing pages and microsites, and replacing them with an updated
platform in CloudPages. CloudPages has a cleaner, faster user interface with improved content and collection sorting, and the ability to
copy existing content. In this release, we removed the Create button, and you can now create landing pages and microsites in CloudPages.
You can still view and edit existing landing pages and microsites in the classic Web Tools and continue migrating items to CloudPages.
When: Classic landing pages and microsites are being fully retiring in June 2022. Familiarize yourself with CloudPages for your landing
pages and microsite needs. See Email Studio Classic Web Tools and Classic Cloudpages End of Life Frequently Asked Questions.
Sync Connect Contact Data to Sitecore

Use the Sitecore Connect for SFMC activity to send contact status from Marketing Cloud to Sitecore as a contact moves through a journey.
See Configure the Sitecore Connect for SFMC Activity.
CloudPages Legacy Experience Removed

The CloudPages Legacy Experience is removed from the Marketing Cloud navigation. All classic editor CloudPages content is still accessible
in CloudPages. As stated earlier this year, Marketing Cloud is gradually retiring Classic CloudPages. For the last release, we renamed the
new experience CloudPages and the previous CloudPages application CloudPages Legacy Experience.
copy existing content. To learn more, see Email Studio Classic Web Tools and Classic Cloudpages End of Life Frequently Asked Questions.
How:Select Web Studio, then CloudPages in the Marketing Cloud app switcher.

With the June release, we began migrating CloudPages to more secure URLs that use Tenant-Specific Endpoints (TSE) and away from
the older Stack-Specific endpoints. Certain types of existing CloudPages URLs can be impacted by this change and require updating.
CloudPages created and published after the change on their stack use the new TSE-based URLs and aren’t affected. Although the new
TSE-based URLs are live as of June 2021, the old CloudPage URLs still function via redirect. This redirect capability is a temporary service
to allow impacted customers to change their old CloudPage URLs to the new TSE-based URLs.
Note: Although the new TSE-based URLs are updating as of June 2021, the old CloudPage URLs still function via redirect. This
redirect is a temporary service to allow impacted customers to change their URLs to the TSE-based URLs.
33
Release Notes

Default Suppression Period for Contact Deletes Is Being Reduced

The default suppression 14-day window for deleting contacts is changing to 2 days. We recommend setting the suppression period to
0 to ensure that contact deletion doesn’t pause after the contacts in the request are suppressed. Contacts can’t be reintroduced and
messaged while they’re suppressed, so shortening the default suppression facilitates reintroduction and messaging.
When: This change takes effect in the October Marketing Cloud release. This change has no impact if your organization has overwritten
the default setting.
Update Email Studio from Legacy ASPX UI

If you’re still using the Email Studio legacy ASPX user interface, you get upgraded to the new UI in this release.
How: Check out a couple of images of the modern user interface.
34
Marketing Cloud Release Notes Marketing Cloud Analytics August 2021 Release Notes
Delete the Journey Builder Triggered Send Queue

You can now manage and delete the queue for triggered sends associated with Journey Builder in Email Studio Interactions. You no
longer have to create a support case to clear the queue of subscribers who have opted out of receiving a campaign.
How: In Journey Builder, select the journey name and version, and click View Queue. You then have the option to delete the queue.
Marketing Cloud Analytics August 2021 Release Notes

Enable Datorama Reports with Corporate, Enterprise, and now Pro Editions. For Datorama Reports Advanced: use the new Queries feature
to explore your data on a deeper level, and improved ways to manage custom fields and credentials.
Get Datorama Reports with Pro Edition

Generate, view, and share a detailed analysis of your email and journey campaign data to optimize performance and increase
engagement with your customers. Datorama Reports for Marketing Cloud is now available for Pro edition, in addition to Enterprise
and Corporate editions.
Expand Your Messaging and Journey Data with Queries
Explore your data on a deeper level. The Queries feature offers insights on more-granular data that is not available in your dashboards,
such as subscriber-level insights. Query your data with the clicks, not code, Query Builder, or by using SQL.
Manage Calculated Fields and Custom KPIs from a Single Location
View, edit, and delete your custom fields in one location. Use Find and Replace to locate where a dimension or measurement is used
across your dashboards, reports, and pivot tables, and then replace it with another measurement or dimension.
Manage App Credentials
Use the new Manage App Credentials feature to edit and manage credentials to all platforms from a single location.
Send Insights to Slack from Datorama Reports for Marketing Cloud
Easily share and collaborate on your Datorama Reports for Marketing Cloud data with Datorama Insights for Slack. Slack is a collaboration
hub where the right people are always in the loop and key information is at their fingertips. With this integration, you can send
visualizations and dashboard pages directly to a public Slack channel with just a few clicks.
Get Datorama Reports with Pro Edition

Generate, view, and share a detailed analysis of your email and journey campaign data to optimize performance and increase engagement
with your customers. Datorama Reports for Marketing Cloud is now available for Pro edition, in addition to Enterprise and Corporate
editions.
Where: All Corporate, Enterprise, and now Pro edition customers can access Datorama Reports. Contact your account executive.
Why: Datorama Reports offers these tools:
• Dashboards—Easily analyze your data and make informed, data-driven decisions with prebuilt dashboards that visualize email and
journey campaign data up to the business unit level.
• Scheduled reports—Retrieve, view, and share a detailed analysis of your data. Schedule and share reports via Excel, .csv files, and
text or through visual formats like PowerPoint, PDF, and PNG.
• Pivot tables—Create custom reports that organize, summarize, and slice your data to explore comparisons, trends, and patterns.
How: From Analytics Builder, select Datorama Reports.
35
Marketing Cloud Release Notes June 2021 Release
Expand Your Messaging and Journey Data with Queries

Explore your data on a deeper level. The Queries feature offers insights on more-granular data that is not available in your dashboards,
such as subscriber-level insights. Query your data with the clicks, not code, Query Builder, or by using SQL.
Who: This feature is available to customers with Datorama Reports Advanced.
How: From Analytics Builder, select Datorama Reports, and then select the Queries tab.
Manage Calculated Fields and Custom KPIs from a Single Location

View, edit, and delete your custom fields in one location. Use Find and Replace to locate where a dimension or measurement is used
across your dashboards, reports, and pivot tables, and then replace it with another measurement or dimension.
How: From Analytics Builder, select Datorama Reports. On the Setup tab, click Calculated Dimensions or Calculated Measurements.
Manage App Credentials

Use the new Manage App Credentials feature to edit and manage credentials to all platforms from a single location.
How: From Analytics Builder, select Datorama Reports. On the Cross Channel tab, click Manage App Credentials.
Send Insights to Slack from Datorama Reports for Marketing Cloud

Easily share and collaborate on your Datorama Reports for Marketing Cloud data with Datorama Insights for Slack. Slack is a collaboration
hub where the right people are always in the loop and key information is at their fingertips. With this integration, you can send visualizations
and dashboard pages directly to a public Slack channel with just a few clicks.
Where: All Corporate, Enterprise, and Pro customers can access Datorama Reports for Marketing Cloud. Contact your account executive
to learn more about how to get started.
How: From the Analytics Builder, select Datorama Reports, and then select the Setup tab.
June 2021 Release

The June 2021 Marketing Cloud release occurs June 5, 2021 through June 12, 2021. Some features are made available to your instance
Get an exclusive, in-depth look at our new features by tuning into the June 2021 Marketing Cloud Release New Feature Overview. Join
this webinar on June 17, 2021 at 12:00 PM EST.
36
Marketing Cloud Release Notes June 2021 Release
Release Highlights
• Salesforce CDP Enhancements
• Datorama Reports for Marketing Cloud — Advanced on page 41
• Datorama: CDP Connector
• Einstein for Marketing Enhancements on page 44
• Pardot: Accounts as Campaign Members
• Advertising Studio Enhancements on page 42
• June 2021 Release FAQ
• June 2021 Top Feature Demos
Release Edits
May 20, 2021 Original publish date
May 20, 2021 Added What’s New in Interaction Studio topic.
June 3, 2021 Removed Supply Einstein for Marketing Cloud with Content Assets
Programmatically topic.
December 8, 2021 Update links for Einstein for Marketing Enhancements and Pardot:
Accounts as Campaign Members
Marketing Cloud App and Setup June 2021 Release Notes

Learn about objects and activities now supported in Marketing Cloud Package Manager.
Marketing Cloud Cross-Cloud Integrations June 2021 Release Notes
V2 of Marketing Cloud Connect is being retired on June 9, 2021. Distributed Marketing updates include an option to upload local
images from your computer, and an Auto Send feature for Campaigns.
Marketing Cloud Data Management June 2021 Release Notes
Use targeted advertising that is tailored to match Snapchat users with Advertising Studio’s Snap Audience Match. Use Lead Capture
Error Detail View in Advertising Studio for a failed leads view, associated lead form error details, and the lead failure date.
Marketing Cloud Analytics June 2021 Release Notes
Datorama Reports Advanced features provide options to expand on your messaging and journeys data. Datorama Reports has
enhancements around downloading pivot tables and options for dashboards. Also in Datorama Reports, you can now view and
analyze push notifications.
Marketing Cloud Einstein June 2021 Release Notes
Einstein Content Selection helps you discover which key content features are engaging your audience using automated tags in
Performance Analytics. Einstein Content Testing makes it easier than ever to conduct content experiments. Einstein Copy Insights
can analyze new subject lines so you can see how Einstein predicts they’ll perform before including them in a message. See the send
times that Einstein would use before initiating a send with data extension preview in Send Time Optimization. Plus, the power of
Einstein Engagement Frequency is now available for push notifications.
37
Marketing Cloud Release Notes Marketing Cloud App and Setup June 2021 Release Notes
Marketing Cloud Journeys and Messages June 2021 Release Notes

The SMS message preview character count in Content Builder is 160 in Canada. New CloudPages Experience replaces legacy
CloudPages and supports data extension upsert and other new features. Email Studio classic web tools retire. Email Studio has new
Optional Features for Compliance. Journey Builder Integrations and Synchronized Data Extensions now support the latest API version
51. Journey Builder entry source data extension is no longer required. Now choose whether to use the data extension phone number
or the phone number from the contact details. In the October release, the contact deletes default suppression is changing.
Marketing Cloud App and Setup June 2021 Release Notes

Learn about objects and activities now supported in Marketing Cloud Package Manager.
Package and Deploy More Objects and Activities with Marketing Cloud Package Manager
Marketing Cloud Package Manager now adds support for more objects and activities. You can include Transactional Email, API Event,
and Date-Based Event entry sources in journeys when you create and deploy a package. You can also include more automation
activities such as File Transfer, File Import, Data Extract for the data extensions, and Verification. These feature enhancements are
generally available in all Marketing Cloud accounts at no additional cost.
Package and Deploy More Objects and Activities with Marketing Cloud Package
Manager
Marketing Cloud Package Manager now adds support for more objects and activities. You can include Transactional Email, API Event,
and Date-Based Event entry sources in journeys when you create and deploy a package. You can also include more automation activities
such as File Transfer, File Import, Data Extract for the data extensions, and Verification. These feature enhancements are generally available
in all Marketing Cloud accounts at no additional cost.
To access this app, select Package Manager from the Platform dropdown menu.
For more information, see Package Manager Supported Objects.
Marketing Cloud Cross-Cloud Integrations June 2021 Release Notes

V2 of Marketing Cloud Connect is being retired on June 9, 2021. Distributed Marketing updates include an option to upload local images
from your computer, and an Auto Send feature for Campaigns.
V2 of Marketing Cloud Connect Is Being Retired June 9

The Marketing Cloud Connector version 2 (V2), which allows users to interact with Marketing Cloud features (Email Classic) in
Salesforce is being retired on June 9, 2021. At Salesforce, trust is our #1 value when serving our customers. To provide security
patching on potential vulnerabilities, we can no longer support unmanaged packages where security patches can’t be pushed to
customer environments.
Distributed Marketing Local Image Upload
Now you can create more personalized campaigns by uploading images to Marketing Cloud from your computer using the Local
Image Upload feature. The corporate marketing team can enable this feature for business users.
Distributed Marketing Collaborative Campaign (Auto Send)
With the proper permission set, you can set up an Auto Send for a Campaign. At the selected date and time, all Campaign members
that aren’t sent to yet and not part of a scheduled or bulk send are added to the linked journey with the Auto Send defaults specified.
38
Marketing Cloud Release Notes Marketing Cloud Data Management June 2021 Release Notes
V2 of Marketing Cloud Connect Is Being Retired June 9

The Marketing Cloud Connector version 2 (V2), which allows users to interact with Marketing Cloud features (Email Classic) in Salesforce
is being retired on June 9, 2021. At Salesforce, trust is our #1 value when serving our customers. To provide security patching on potential
vulnerabilities, we can no longer support unmanaged packages where security patches can’t be pushed to customer environments.
Who:This retirement applies to Marketing Cloud Connect V2. To determine the version that you have installed in Salesforce, from Setup,
in the Quick Find box, enter Installed Packages and then select Installed Packages. If you see Exact Target for App Exchange
- 2007, you have Marketing Cloud Connect V2. The current version, V5, of the Marketing Cloud Connector is named Marketing Cloud.
How: If you use V2, we recommend that you choose one of these options:
• For Sales or Service Cloud Enterprise or Unlimited Edition, upgrade to the latest version of Marketing Cloud Connect and turn on the
Subscriber Key option in Marketing Cloud. Customer support enables the Subscriber Key option.
• For Salesforce Professional Edition, upgrade your Salesforce Sales or Service Cloud edition to either Enterprise or Unlimited to access
V5.
• With the user credentials for Marketing Cloud, you can log directly into the Marketing Cloud user interface to perform sendings.
For more details about differences between the two product versions, check out Marketing Cloud Connect Features.
Distributed Marketing Local Image Upload

Now you can create more personalized campaigns by uploading images to Marketing Cloud from your computer using the Local Image
Upload feature. The corporate marketing team can enable this feature for business users.
How: Enable the Local Image Upload feature in Marketing Cloud to give users a new image option. In addition to Image Library and
URL, business users can choose Local to select an image on their computer. We recommend limiting the file size to about 3 MB. Before
you upload the image to Marketing Cloud, you can crop the image as needed.

With the proper permission set, you can set up an Auto Send for a Campaign. At the selected date and time, all Campaign members
that aren’t sent to yet and not part of a scheduled or bulk send are added to the linked journey with the Auto Send defaults specified.
Who: This feature is packaged in a permission set. Users need the DM Auto Send permission and access to the new object and classes.
We recommend assigning the permission set to any users who want to use the Auto Send feature.
How: Launch Auto Send by clicking the Settings cog wheel in the Campaign Messages component. You can have one active Auto Send
per Campaign at a time. Auto Sends can contain up to 25,000 members. To ensure that all Campaign members are included, we
recommend that the person who sets up Auto Send is also in charge of the Campaign. For example, if you set up an Auto Send for
another person’s Campaign and you can only access 40 of 100 campaign members, then only 40 members receive the campaign. You
can personalize at the Campaign level only for Auto Send. You can’t personalize at the person level.
Marketing Cloud Data Management June 2021 Release Notes

Use targeted advertising that is tailored to match Snapchat users with Advertising Studio’s Snap Audience Match. Use Lead Capture
Error Detail View in Advertising Studio for a failed leads view, associated lead form error details, and the lead failure date.
Gain Visibility and Control Over Failed Leads

In Advertising Studio Lead Capture, a new Lead Capture Error Detail View shows a list of failed leads, associated lead form error
details, and the lead failure date. Use this information to resolve formatting and other errors. You can also bulk retry failed leads.
39
Marketing Cloud Release Notes Marketing Cloud Data Management June 2021 Release Notes
Tailor and Target Advertising with Snap Audience Match

As a marketer, use Snap Audience Match in Marketing Cloud Advertising Studio. You can target and tailor advertising to the millennial
and Gen Z markets using a customer list of emails. Use the list to reach Snapchat users who’ve interacted with your brand or business.
And you can create Lookalike Audiences to expand audience reach.
Gain Visibility and Control Over Failed Leads

In Advertising Studio Lead Capture, a new Lead Capture Error Detail View shows a list of failed leads, associated lead form error details,
and the lead failure date. Use this information to resolve formatting and other errors. You can also bulk retry failed leads.
Why: Customers often lack visibility into why leads fail. Not knowing the reason can limit opportunities to resolve and retry leads
effectively and decrease the lead success rate. The Lead Capture Error Detail View offers detailed insight into lead errors for faster resolution,
increasing the lead volume. The new view also prevents failed leads within a lead task from disqualifying a lead task in its entirety.
How: Within Marketing Cloud and Sales Cloud Lead Capture apps, a user sees a Warning icon next to a lead task that contains failed
leads. You can click the icon and navigate to a new Lead Capture Error Detail View featuring a list of failed leads and error details.
SEE ALSO:
Lead Capture Error Detail View in Advertising Studio
Tailor and Target Advertising with Snap Audience Match

As a marketer, use Snap Audience Match in Marketing Cloud Advertising Studio. You can target and tailor advertising to the millennial
and Gen Z markets using a customer list of emails. Use the list to reach Snapchat users who’ve interacted with your brand or business.
And you can create Lookalike Audiences to expand audience reach.
Where: Advertising Studio
When: Available in the June 2021 Marketing Cloud release.
How: Advertising Studio customers can push customer email lists to Snapchat for targeted advertising. Customers should first add and
authorize their Snapchat account before creating an audience to activate to Snapchat.
SEE ALSO:
Add, Reauthorize, or Remove Ad Accounts

SEE ALSO:
40
Marketing Cloud Release Notes Marketing Cloud Analytics June 2021 Release Notes
Marketing Cloud Analytics June 2021 Release Notes

Datorama Reports Advanced features provide options to expand on your messaging and journeys data. Datorama Reports has
enhancements around downloading pivot tables and options for dashboards. Also in Datorama Reports, you can now view and analyze
push notifications.
Expand on Messaging and Journey Data with Datorama Reports Advanced

With Datorama Reports for Marketing Cloud Advanced, you can customize your dashboards, enrich your messaging and journey
data with custom KPIs and data extracts, and unlock cross-channel insights with four ready-made apps. Datorama Reports Advanced
is a premium upgraded version of Datorama Reports, released in the January 2021 Marketing Cloud release.
Datorama Reports Enhancements for Marketing Cloud
Download pivot tables that exceed the maximum allowed rows, apply filters to dashboards, and exclude test sends in dashboards.
Analyze Push Notifications with Datorama Reports
Now you can view and analyze your push notifications as well as your email and journey campaign level data in Datorama Reports
for Marketing Cloud.
Optimize Your First-Party Audience Strategy
Explore and measure how your audiences are performing across channels with a ready-made dashboard. Use the Audience Insights
for Advertising Studio App to easily connect Advertising Studio to Facebook Ads and Twitter Ads.
Expand on Messaging and Journey Data with Datorama Reports Advanced

With Datorama Reports for Marketing Cloud Advanced, you can customize your dashboards, enrich your messaging and journey data
with custom KPIs and data extracts, and unlock cross-channel insights with four ready-made apps. Datorama Reports Advanced is a
premium upgraded version of Datorama Reports, released in the January 2021 Marketing Cloud release.
Who: The premium upgrade is available to Corporate and Enterprise customers, as well as Pro customers who have access to Discover.
Contact your account executive about accessing Datorama Reports for Marketing Cloud and upgrade options.
How: Select Datorama Reports in Marketing Cloud Analytics Builder.
SEE ALSO:
Datorama Reports for Marketing Cloud
Datorama Reports Enhancements for Marketing Cloud

Download pivot tables that exceed the maximum allowed rows, apply filters to dashboards, and exclude test sends in dashboards.
Where: This change applies to all Corporate and Enterprise editions.
When: Datorama Reports is available on a rolling basis starting in the January 2021 release. Contact your Salesforce account executive
for details about timing and eligibility. These enhancements were introduced in provisioned accounts over the last few months.
Why: These enhancements are designed to optimize your Datorama Reports experience.
• Previously, results of more than 8,000 rows weren't returned when creating pivot tables. Now you can download to view the full
results even when pivot table results exceed 8,000 rows.
• To apply filters to dashboards, click Apply. Filtering improves dashboard speed and performance.
• Test sends are now excluded from Dashboards and don’t appear in the data.
41
Marketing Cloud Release Notes Marketing Cloud Analytics June 2021 Release Notes
How: Select Datorama Reports in Marketing Cloud Analytics Builder.
SEE ALSO:
Reports Overview
Analyze Push Notifications with Datorama Reports

Now you can view and analyze your push notifications as well as your email and journey campaign level data in Datorama Reports for
Marketing Cloud.
Where: This change applies to Corporate and Enterprise editions.
When: This feature is available on a rolling basis during the month of August 2021.
Why: Analyze your push notification campaigns with predefined Push Message dashboards for delivery, engagement, and journey
performance KPIs. With push-specific data, create customized pivot table reports to optimize performance and increase customer
engagement. Export and share dashboards and pivot table reports across your organization to show the value of your campaigns.
How: From the Analytics Builder, select Datorama Reports.
Optimize Your First-Party Audience Strategy

Explore and measure how your audiences are performing across channels with a ready-made dashboard. Use the Audience Insights for
Advertising Studio App to easily connect Advertising Studio to Facebook Ads and Twitter Ads.
Where: This change applies to Corporate and Enterprise editions that have Datorama Reports Advanced enabled in their accounts.
Who: To use this feature you need Datorama Reports Advanced, Advertising Studio credentials, Facebook Ads, and Twitter Ads credentials.
How: The Audience Insights for Advertising Studio app is available in the Apps tab in Datorama Reports Advanced, or in the Marketplace
in Datorama.
SEE ALSO:
Marketing Cloud Help: Audience Insights for Advertising Studio Solution
42
Marketing Cloud Release Notes Marketing Cloud Einstein June 2021 Release Notes
Marketing Cloud Einstein June 2021 Release Notes

Einstein Content Selection helps you discover which key content features are engaging your audience using automated tags in Performance
Analytics. Einstein Content Testing makes it easier than ever to conduct content experiments. Einstein Copy Insights can analyze new
subject lines so you can see how Einstein predicts they’ll perform before including them in a message. See the send times that Einstein
would use before initiating a send with data extension preview in Send Time Optimization. Plus, the power of Einstein Engagement
Frequency is now available for push notifications.
4
Predict Subject Line Performance

Einstein’s AI capabilities can help marketers understand how their subject lines are likely to perform and how to improve them. And
you can see how a subject line is likely to perform versus past subject lines. The Einstein Copy Insights new performance tester also
analyzes a range of possible open rates based on your historical sends and the most likely open rate based on local and global
historical open rates.
See Einstein Content Tags in Performance Analytics
Now with Einstein Content Selection, you can see the aspects of your content that get the most clicks, and which aren’t doing as
well. Using AI, Einstein Content Tagging automatically finds the prominent features of your content, such as a beach, or a campfire,
or a fire engine. With Einstein Content Selection Performance Analytics those tags help you gain insights about your content
performance.
Preview Einstein’s Send Times for Specific Data Extensions
Einstein can now show you the best send times for any set of contacts in a data extension before you send. Ask Einstein for timings
for a journey that you’re planning or for the best times for customers that you plan to batch email. Understand when Einstein sends
to correlate sending with traffic patterns for your website or contact center. With built-in sampling, Einstein can quickly preview
results for large sets of contacts. Previews are a snapshot at a point in time using that time’s set of Einstein scores. And you can
refresh or delete them.
Get Einstein Engagement Frequency for MobilePush
Now you can predict the optimal number of mobile push notifications to send to contacts. Einstein Engagement Frequency for
MobilePush predicts the optimal number of push notifications to send to every contact. Predictions are based on a contact’s individual
preferred frequency to increase open rates and avoid message fatigue. We updated the dashboard to show data quality metrics and
personalized and non-personalized contacts at the app level. And the Journey Builder Frequency Split activity also supports MobilePush.
You can automatically segment contacts at send time based on their frequency.
Predict Subject Line Performance

Einstein’s AI capabilities can help marketers understand how their subject lines are likely to perform and how to improve them. And you
can see how a subject line is likely to perform versus past subject lines. The Einstein Copy Insights new performance tester also analyzes
a range of possible open rates based on your historical sends and the most likely open rate based on local and global historical open
rates.
4
43
Marketing Cloud Release Notes Marketing Cloud Einstein June 2021 Release Notes
How: Find the performance tester on the Einstein Copy Insights dashboard. Paste or build your subject line in the performance tester
field and evaluate it. The tester shows how your subject line is likely to perform in comparison to past subject line performance and
global data analysis.
SEE ALSO:
Test a Subject Line Before You Send
Einstein Copy Insights Dashboard
See Einstein Content Tags in Performance Analytics

Now with Einstein Content Selection, you can see the aspects of your content that get the most clicks, and which aren’t doing as well.
Using AI, Einstein Content Tagging automatically finds the prominent features of your content, such as a beach, or a campfire, or a fire
engine. With Einstein Content Selection Performance Analytics those tags help you gain insights about your content performance.
How: In the main Marketing Cloud menu, from the Einstein tab, go to Einstein Content Selection, and then the Performance Analytics
tab. At the top right, under Show select Asset Attribute in the first dropdown, and then Tags in the second dropdown. Then scroll down
to the performance graphs and tables to see how different tags perform.
SEE ALSO:
Einstein Content Selection Performance Analytics
Preview Einstein’s Send Times for Specific Data Extensions

Einstein can now show you the best send times for any set of contacts in a data extension before you send. Ask Einstein for timings for
a journey that you’re planning or for the best times for customers that you plan to batch email. Understand when Einstein sends to
correlate sending with traffic patterns for your website or contact center. With built-in sampling, Einstein can quickly preview results for
large sets of contacts. Previews are a snapshot at a point in time using that time’s set of Einstein scores. And you can refresh or delete
them.
Why: Einstein can now break down recommended timings to a more granular level than just business unit or enterprise. With data
extension preview, you can get to the data extension that contains the specific group of contacts that are most relevant.
How: In the Einstein Overview, find the Preview tab. Select a data extension to preview. Next, select a channel and time frame for the
preview. When the preview is built, it takes no more than a few minutes to collect results. Results appear in the list on the Preview tab.
You can navigate away from the tab and return later. When the preview is ready, the results appear there. Details of When Would Einstein
Send? are shown, along with the selected time frame, time zone, and channel options. And you can see whether results are sampled or
not.
SEE ALSO:
Preview Einstein’s Optimal Send Times
Get Einstein Engagement Frequency for MobilePush

Now you can predict the optimal number of mobile push notifications to send to contacts. Einstein Engagement Frequency for MobilePush
predicts the optimal number of push notifications to send to every contact. Predictions are based on a contact’s individual preferred
frequency to increase open rates and avoid message fatigue. We updated the dashboard to show data quality metrics and personalized
and non-personalized contacts at the app level. And the Journey Builder Frequency Split activity also supports MobilePush. You can
automatically segment contacts at send time based on their frequency.
44
Marketing Cloud Release Notes Marketing Cloud Journeys and Messages June 2021 Release
Notes
Who: This feature is available for all users with Einstein Engagement Frequency. Pro license customers must have Journey Builder.
How: Navigate to Einstein Engagement Frequency in Marketing Cloud Setup. Click MobilePush and activate it. Choose the available
mobile apps to activate Einstein Engagement Frequency for.
After activation, navigate to the Einstein Engagement Frequency dashboard. Click the MobilePush tab and choose an app to view its
results on the dashboard.
To access the Frequency Split activity in Journey Builder, start by creating a multi-step journey. Add the Frequency Split to your journey,
and select MobilePush as the channel. After that’s selected, select the app for which the Frequency Split will be used. Complete activity
and journey setup and you’re ready to get Einstein’s predictive power with your push notification sends, too.
SEE ALSO:
Activate Einstein Engagement Frequency
The Einstein Engagement Frequency Dashboard
Configure a Frequency Split
Marketing Cloud Journeys and Messages June 2021 Release Notes

The SMS message preview character count in Content Builder is 160 in Canada. New CloudPages Experience replaces legacy CloudPages
and supports data extension upsert and other new features. Email Studio classic web tools retire. Email Studio has new Optional Features
for Compliance. Journey Builder Integrations and Synchronized Data Extensions now support the latest API version 51. Journey Builder
entry source data extension is no longer required. Now choose whether to use the data extension phone number or the phone number
from the contact details. In the October release, the contact deletes default suppression is changing.
SMS Message Preview in Content Builder Was Limited to 160 Characters for Canada
To improve validation when you create an SMS message in Content Builder or Journey Builder with a Canadian code, the character
count now supports up to 160 characters.
Content Builder Create Button Loads Faster
We improved the load time of the Create button so you can start your work more quickly without waiting for the page to load.
CloudPages Smart Capture Supports Upsert
The Smart Capture block in CloudPages now supports the ability to upsert to existing data extensions that have primary key fields.
Previously, Smart Capture supported the addition of new rows to the target data extension selected, but it didn’t allow the update
of existing records, which limited some use cases.
We migrated CloudPages to newer, more secure URLs that use Tenant-Specific Endpoints (TSE) and away from the older Stack-Specific
endpoints. Certain types of existing CloudPages URLs can be impacted by this change and require updating. CloudPages created
and published after the June 2021 release use the new TSE-based URLs and aren’t affected. Although the new TSE-based URLs are
live as of June 2021, the old CloudPage URLs still function via redirect. This redirect capability is a temporary service to allow impacted
customers to change their old CloudPage URLs to the new TSE-based URLs.
Email Studio Classic Web Tools Retirement
We’re retiring the outdated landing pages and microsites experience in favor of the updated platform available in CloudPages.
Marketing Cloud is gradually retiring Email Studio classic Web Tools, including landing pages and microsites in future releases starting
in June 2022. Landing pages and microsites are still available in CloudPages. Familiarize yourself with CloudPages for your landing
pages and microsite needs.
45
Notes
Get Tagging and Reporting with Google Analytics 4

The new Marketing Cloud Google Analytics integration features include cross-channel tagging and reporting built on Google’s new
event-based GA4 property framework. App and web conversion events surfaced in context with native Journey metrics in a configurable
dashboard tab are included. They’re applied to mobile and web tagging for journey web links and app events. And you can turn on
and turn off some UTM parameters for classic UA tracking.
New CloudPages Experience Is CloudPages
We renamed the New CloudPages Experience to CloudPages. The previous CloudPages application is now available as CloudPages
Legacy Experience for one release. All classic editor CloudPages content remains accessible in the New Experience. As stated in the
April 2021 release, Marketing Cloud is gradually retiring Classic CloudPages.
WhatsApp Contact Key Sending
The mobile number from a Journey Builder entry source data extension is no longer required. Customers can choose whether to
use the data extension phone number or the phone number from the contact details. The system checks the phone number of the
contact from contact details. Previously, customers who already had data extensions created to send messages included the mobile
number to send WhatsApp messages.
Marketing Cloud Connect API v51 Upgrade
Journey Builder Integrations and Synchronized Data Extensions now support the latest API version 51, unlocking access to Loyalty
Management and Order Management objects for use as the source of events and activities.
Email Studio Optional Features for Compliance
Profile Link Check, Physical Address Check, and Unsubscribe Link Check are three new Email Studio setup options that enable admins
to have direct control over these compliance settings. Having control over these options prevents delays when standing up email
campaigns, and it helps customers adhere to CAN-SPAM laws or equivalent local regulations. Admins can set up these options by
business unit. Previously, customers who didn’t use Marketing Cloud’s first-party services for subscriber management and content
called support to have these options disabled.
Contact Deletes Default Suppression Changing
The default suppression 14-day window for contact deletes changes to 2 days in the October Marketing Cloud release. Contact
Delete best practices recommend setting the suppression period to 0 to ensure that contact deletion doesn’t pause after the contacts
in the request are suppressed.
SMS Message Preview in Content Builder Was Limited to 160 Characters for Canada
To improve validation when you create an SMS message in Content Builder or Journey Builder with a Canadian code, the character count
now supports up to 160 characters.
How: In Content Builder or as part of a journey in Journey Builder, these maximum character counts apply for messages sent to mobile
devices in Canada:
• Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) messages: 160 characters
• GSM messages with concatenation: 153 characters
• Non-GSM messages: 70 characters
• Non-GSM messages with concatenation: 67 characters
Content Builder Create Button Loads Faster

We improved the load time of the Create button so you can start your work more quickly without waiting for the page to load.
46
Notes
CloudPages Smart Capture Supports Upsert

The Smart Capture block in CloudPages now supports the ability to upsert to existing data extensions that have primary key fields.
Previously, Smart Capture supported the addition of new rows to the target data extension selected, but it didn’t allow the update of
existing records, which limited some use cases.
How: In the Smart Capture block, select Data Extension from the Data Target dropdown, click Select a Data Extension, then choose
a data extension with primary keys. Select the attributes to collect in the Smart Capture form. When the form is submitted, if the primary
keys match an existing record, the other attributes for that record are updated. If there’s no match, a record is added to the data extension.

We migrated CloudPages to newer, more secure URLs that use Tenant-Specific Endpoints (TSE) and away from the older Stack-Specific
endpoints. Certain types of existing CloudPages URLs can be impacted by this change and require updating. CloudPages created and
published after the June 2021 release use the new TSE-based URLs and aren’t affected. Although the new TSE-based URLs are live as of
June 2021, the old CloudPage URLs still function via redirect. This redirect capability is a temporary service to allow impacted customers
to change their old CloudPage URLs to the new TSE-based URLs.
Email Studio Classic Web Tools Retirement

We’re retiring the outdated landing pages and microsites experience in favor of the updated platform available in CloudPages. Marketing
Cloud is gradually retiring Email Studio classic Web Tools, including landing pages and microsites in future releases starting in June 2022.
Landing pages and microsites are still available in CloudPages. Familiarize yourself with CloudPages for your landing pages and microsite
needs.
Why: To provide our customers with the best reliability, performance, and security, CloudPages now has a cleaner, faster user interface.
New features include improved content and collection sorting, and the ability to copy existing content. For more information, see Email
Studio Classic Web Tools and Classic Cloudpages End of Life Frequently Asked Questions.
How:In the Marketing Cloud app switcher, select Email Studio. From the Interactions dropdown, select Microsites to view your microsites
and landing pages created in the classic Web Tools. To access CloudPages, in the Marketing Cloud navigation menu, select CloudPages
in the Web Studio app switcher dropdown.
Get Tagging and Reporting with Google Analytics 4

The new Marketing Cloud Google Analytics integration features include cross-channel tagging and reporting built on Google’s new
event-based GA4 property framework. App and web conversion events surfaced in context with native Journey metrics in a configurable
dashboard tab are included. They’re applied to mobile and web tagging for journey web links and app events. And you can turn on and
turn off some UTM parameters for classic UA tracking.
When: This feature and associated updates, including help documentation, are released in your instance within 40 days of the June
2021 Marketing Cloud release.
Who: The free GA4 integration is available with Journey Builder and an enterprise 2.0 account.
47
Notes
Why: Google is moving all future feature development to a new property type in Google Analytics called GA4. The new platform is a
modern event-based framework that uses first-party and Google data to understand and analyze multiple sites and apps together.
Marketers can better understand their customers from acquisition to conversion and retention using a common set of conversion events
that are measured consistently across mobile and web.
How: Configure GA4 properties in the Google Analytics Setup App. To apply the new GA4 parameters to Journey Builder links, turn on
web tagging in Parameter Management in Marketing Cloud Setup. To apply the new GA4 parameters to app events in Journey Builder,
turn on app event tagging. MobilePush is the only app events that are supported in this release.
For App events, you must log Marketing Cloud-specific custom Campaign details to Google Analytics 4 (GA4) using the Firebase SDK.
You can turn on or turn off the UA web parameters utm_source, umt_campaign or utm_term in Parameter Management.
New CloudPages Experience Is CloudPages

We renamed the New CloudPages Experience to CloudPages. The previous CloudPages application is now available as CloudPages
Legacy Experience for one release. All classic editor CloudPages content remains accessible in the New Experience. As stated in the April
2021 release, Marketing Cloud is gradually retiring Classic CloudPages.
CloudPages now has a cleaner, faster user interface. New features include improved content and collection sorting and the ability to
copy existing content. To learn more, see Email Studio Classic Web Tools and Classic Cloudpages End of Life Frequently Asked Questions.
How:Select Web Studio, then CloudPages in the Marketing Cloud app switcher.
WhatsApp Contact Key Sending

The mobile number from a Journey Builder entry source data extension is no longer required. Customers can choose whether to use
the data extension phone number or the phone number from the contact details. The system checks the phone number of the contact
from contact details. Previously, customers who already had data extensions created to send messages included the mobile number to
send WhatsApp messages.
Who: This feature applies to all WhatsApp customers using Journey Builder.
How: When marketers open the configuration section within the WhatsApp activity, they can access phone number options with the
dropdown menu. The marketer chooses which phone number to use. After the marketer selects the phone number to use, the system
is configured to send messages to the selected phone number option.
Marketing Cloud Connect API v51 Upgrade

Journey Builder Integrations and Synchronized Data Extensions now support the latest API version 51, unlocking access to Loyalty
Management and Order Management objects for use as the source of events and activities.
When: This feature is enabled by a controlled release, which means that the upgrade remains disabled at the time of the main release.
After the 232 Marketing Cloud release deployment is complete, every Salesforce org will be upgraded to v51 the week of June 21.
Who: This change applies to all Marketing Cloud Connect and Journey Builder customers with the Integrations package enabled.
How: After the upgrade, new objects and fields are available to configure in Synchronized Data Sources and Salesforce events and
activities.
48
Marketing Cloud Release Notes April 2021 Release
Email Studio Optional Features for Compliance

Profile Link Check, Physical Address Check, and Unsubscribe Link Check are three new Email Studio setup options that enable admins
to have direct control over these compliance settings. Having control over these options prevents delays when standing up email
campaigns, and it helps customers adhere to CAN-SPAM laws or equivalent local regulations. Admins can set up these options by
business unit. Previously, customers who didn’t use Marketing Cloud’s first-party services for subscriber management and content called
support to have these options disabled.
Who: This feature is available for all Email Studio customers.
How: This feature is in Email Studio Setup in the Email Optional Features section. To enable or disable the respective compliance check,
go to the Email Optional Features section. If you already have one or more of these features enabled in your organization, the features
show as enabled in Setup. If you don’t already have these features enabled, they aren’t enabled in Setup.

The default suppression 14-day window for contact deletes changes to 2 days in the October Marketing Cloud release. Contact Delete
best practices recommend setting the suppression period to 0 to ensure that contact deletion doesn’t pause after the contacts in the
request are suppressed.
Where: The new contact delete suppression window applies to all Contact Builder users who don’t have the default suppression period
overwritten. If your organization has the default setting overwritten before the change is implemented, this change has no impact.
Why: Most customers set the suppression period to 0–2 days, while some leave it at the default value. Setting the default value to 2
days gets contacts deleted sooner. Contacts can’t be reintroduced and messaged to while they’re suppressed, so shortening the default
suppression facilitates reintroduction and messaging.
April 2021 Release

The April 2021 Marketing Cloud release occurs on April 10, 2021 through April 17, 2021. Some features are made available to your instance
Get an exclusive, in-depth look at our new features by tuning into the April 2021 Marketing Cloud Release New Feature Overview. Join
this webinar on April 22, 2021 at 12:00 PM EST!
Release Highlights
• Salesforce CDP Connector with Tableau
• Interaction Studio Surveys on page 55
• Datorama Multi-Touch Attribution App
• Data Quality Metrics for Einstein Send Time Optimization, Einstein Engagement Frequency, and Einstein Engagement Scoring on
page 56
• Marketing Cloud Package Manager on page 51
• Datorama Marketing Insights for Sales Cloud App
49
Marketing Cloud Release Notes Marketing Cloud App and Setup April 2021 Release Notes

• April 2021 Top Feature Demos
• April 2021 Release FAQ
Release Edits
March 25, 2021 Original publish date
March 26, 2021 Added Import Amazon S3 Data into Marketing Cloud topic.
April 12, 2021 Added links to release documentation
April 22, 2021 Added Understand Your Einstein Engagement Frequency Customer
Base topic and MFA information
May 11, 2021 Updated this page with Salesforce CDP product name
Marketing Cloud App and Setup April 2021 Release Notes

Learn about changes to tenant-specific endpoints and clickjacking protection. Import AWS data into Marketing Cloud.
Marketing Cloud Cross-Cloud Integrations April 2021 Release Notes
A limited roll-out of the Collaborative Campaign feature, Auto Send, is available in the April 2021 Marketing Cloud release. V2 of
Marketing Cloud Connect is scheduled to retire in March 31, 2021 and the Microsoft Dynamics CRM on-premise integration with
Marketing Cloud is being retired October 29, 2021
Marketing Cloud Data Management April 2021 Release Notes
Learn about enhancements to the Journey Analytics dashboard, where Google Analytics tracking results appear. Check out the latest
features and updates from Salesforce CDP Audiences, a customer data management, segmentation, and activation tool that drives
personalization and engagement. To learn about Interaction Studio changes, see the New in Interaction Studio topic in the Interaction
Studio Knowledge Base.
Marketing Cloud Einstein April 2021 Release Notes
Understand your data quality across more Einstein for Marketing products. In this release, we added data quality metrics to the
Einstein Learning Center and the Engagement Frequency and Engagement Scoring dashboards. Target the content Einstein selects
with more precision, and add or upload content assets easily with new upload options in Einstein Content Selection. Plus, Einstein
Messaging Insights now gives more context to insights detected in your journey sends.
Marketing Cloud Journeys and Messages April 2021 Release Notes
MobilePush supports .p12 sending on Apple’s upgraded HTTP/2 sending service. Now, you can flag contacts who have opted out
of WhatsApp chat messages. Classic CloudPages moves to new experience. In a future release, the contact deletes default suppression
is changing.
Marketing Cloud App and Setup April 2021 Release Notes

Learn about changes to tenant-specific endpoints and clickjacking protection. Import AWS data into Marketing Cloud.
50
Decrease Time to Value with Marketing Cloud Package Manager

With Marketing Cloud Package Manager, you can export and import fully configured content, automations, data models, and journeys.
If the content assets include personalization strings, you can include prompts for the end user to input default values. This application
gives administrators the ability to deploy fully configured items from any Marketing Cloud instance to another for faster scalability
than ever before. Use Marketing Cloud Package Manager to share best practices across the global enterprise and accelerate onboarding
of new business units or geographies.
Update Your Legacy Stack-Specific Endpoints with Tenant Specific Endpoints
As part of our ongoing commitment to customer trust and security, integrations into Marketing Cloud are now required to use
tenant-specific endpoints. Update all of your REST, SOAP, Single Sign On (SSO), Mobile Push, and Secure FTP integrations to
tenant-specific endpoints.
Clickjacking Protection is Automatically Enabled
With this release, Marketing Cloud enables clickjacking protection by default for all Marketing Cloud accounts. This feature stops
malicious pages from loading in the background of trusted Marketing Cloud pages to gain access to confidential information. Trusted
Marketing Cloud domains can load pages in frames. This change does not affect any accounts that already enabled the clickjacking
protection, and this protection benefits all users. This release also removes the enablement option from Security Settings.
Import Amazon S3 Data into Marketing Cloud
Customers can now define an AWS S3 bucket as a file location source to import data into Marketing Cloud. This provides a new
alternative for FTP users who already house data inside of AWS.
Determine Who Hasn’t Opted In to Multi-Factor Authentication
A new column in the All Users screen in the Users section of Setup shows your users’ multi-factor authentication (MFA) enrollment
status. See which users haven’t opted in to MFA and registered a verification method for their account.
On February 2, 2021, we announced a future requirement for all customers to enable multi-factor authentication (MFA) for their
Salesforce products. To satisfy the MFA requirement, all your internal users who log in to Marketing Cloud through the user interface
must use MFA. You can turn on MFA directly in Marketing Cloud or use your SSO provider's MFA service. Salesforce MFA is available
at no extra cost.
Decrease Time to Value with Marketing Cloud Package Manager

With Marketing Cloud Package Manager, you can export and import fully configured content, automations, data models, and journeys.
If the content assets include personalization strings, you can include prompts for the end user to input default values. This application
gives administrators the ability to deploy fully configured items from any Marketing Cloud instance to another for faster scalability than
ever before. Use Marketing Cloud Package Manager to share best practices across the global enterprise and accelerate onboarding of
new business units or geographies.
Where: Marketing Cloud Package Manager is available to all Marketing Cloud customers after April 19, 2021 at no cost. Access is limited
to administrators, but more permissions are planned for a future release. To access this app, navigate to the Platform menu in Marketing
Cloud, and select Package Manager from the dropdown menu.
Why: Customers want quicker time to value and readily available configurations that adhere to best practice.
How: Select Package Manager from the Platform menu in Marketing Cloud. If you have Marketing Cloud administrator rights, a list of
journeys in the current business unit displays. Use the tabs to view other object types including automations, content, and data extensions.
51
When you select a journey, all items such as automations, content, data extensions, and attribute groups associated with that journey
are also selected. You can package multiple journeys together. For example, other automations that create audiences can be packaged
with other items.
To deploy, upload the package, enter any required custom field values, and confirm the items in the package. Then deploy the package
.zip file to the Marketing Cloud instance you select. After they’re deployed, items are ready to activate or send.
For more details, visit Marketing Cloud Package Manager.
Update Your Legacy Stack-Specific Endpoints with Tenant Specific Endpoints

As part of our ongoing commitment to customer trust and security, integrations into Marketing Cloud are now required to use
tenant-specific endpoints. Update all of your REST, SOAP, Single Sign On (SSO), Mobile Push, and Secure FTP integrations to tenant-specific
endpoints.
When: Marketing Cloud hasn’t yet set a required completion date for customer endpoint changes and will keep you advised. Our goal
is for all customers to use tenant-specific endpoints.
How: To make this change, replace any remaining legacy Stack-Specific Endpoints in your endpoint calls with Tenant Specific Endpoints.
If you’re execute REST, SOAP, SSO, SFTP, or Mobile Push API requests with Tenant Specific Endpoints, you’re affected.
See Also
Knowledge Article: Updating Marketing Cloud Endpoints to Tenant Specific Endpoints: FAQ
Clickjacking Protection is Automatically Enabled

With this release, Marketing Cloud enables clickjacking protection by default for all Marketing Cloud accounts. This feature stops malicious
pages from loading in the background of trusted Marketing Cloud pages to gain access to confidential information. Trusted Marketing
Cloud domains can load pages in frames. This change does not affect any accounts that already enabled the clickjacking protection, and
this protection benefits all users. This release also removes the enablement option from Security Settings.
Import Amazon S3 Data into Marketing Cloud

Customers can now define an AWS S3 bucket as a file location source to import data into Marketing Cloud. This provides a new alternative
for FTP users who already house data inside of AWS.
Who: This feature is included for users in all Marketing Cloud editions.
Where: When creating a new file location under Administration > Data Management > File Locations, select the Amazon Simple
Storage Service dropdown for Location Type.
See File Locations.
52
Marketing Cloud Release Notes Marketing Cloud Cross-Cloud Integrations April 2021 Release
Notes
Determine Who Hasn’t Opted In to Multi-Factor Authentication

A new column in the All Users screen in the Users section of Setup shows your users’ multi-factor authentication (MFA) enrollment status.
See which users haven’t opted in to MFA and registered a verification method for their account.
How: This column assigns the status of Enrolled or Not Enrolled to all users in your account.

On February 2, 2021, we announced a future requirement for all customers to enable multi-factor authentication (MFA) for their Salesforce
products. To satisfy the MFA requirement, all your internal users who log in to Marketing Cloud through the user interface must use
MFA. You can turn on MFA directly in Marketing Cloud or use your SSO provider's MFA service. Salesforce MFA is available at no extra
cost.
Where: This change applies to all Marketing Cloud tenants.
When: The MFA requirement is effective beginning February 1, 2022. The terms of service in the Notices and Licenses Information section
of the Salesforce Trust and Compliance Documentation requires MFA for direct and SSO logins to Salesforce products as of this date.
But we encourage you to begin planning now and implement MFA as soon as possible.
Why: The global threat landscape is constantly evolving, and the types of attacks that can cripple a business and exploit consumers are
on the rise. A key part of your security strategy is safeguarding access to your Salesforce user accounts. But used on their own, user
credentials don’t provide sufficient protection against threats such as phishing attacks, man in the middle attacks, and credential stuffing.
That’s where MFA comes in. It’s one of the easiest, most effective ways to prevent unauthorized account access, and safeguard your
business and your customers’ data.
How: MFA requires users to prove that they’re who they say they are by providing two or more pieces of evidence—or factors—when
they log in. One factor is something the user knows, such as their username and password combination. Other factors are verification
methods that the user has in their possession, such as the Salesforce Authenticator app or a physical security key. By tying logins to
multiple, different types of factors, it’s much harder for a bad actor to access your Salesforce environment. To learn more about MFA,
watch the How MFA Works to Protect Account Access video.
We’re here to help you get ready for the MFA requirement. To get started, review Salesforce Help and plan your MFA implementation.
Marketing Cloud Cross-Cloud Integrations April 2021 Release Notes

A limited roll-out of the Collaborative Campaign feature, Auto Send, is available in the April 2021 Marketing Cloud release. V2 of Marketing
Cloud Connect is scheduled to retire in March 31, 2021 and the Microsoft Dynamics CRM on-premise integration with Marketing Cloud
is being retired October 29, 2021
53
Marketing Cloud Release Notes Marketing Cloud Cross-Cloud Integrations April 2021 Release
Notes

With the proper permission set, you can set up an Auto Send for a Campaign. At the selected date and time, all campaign members
not yet sent to and not part of a scheduled or bulk send are added to the linked journey with the Auto Send defaults specified.
Microsoft Dynamics CRM On-Premise Integration Is Being Retired October 29, 2021
The Microsoft Dynamics CRM on-premise integration with Marketing Cloud is being retired October 29, 2021. This retirement is due
to the enforcement of the Unified Interface by MS Dynamics. The MS Dynamics Connector by Marketing Cloud isn’t compatible with
the Unified Interface.
V2 of Marketing Cloud Connect Retiring on March 31, 2021
Marketing Cloud is retiring the Marketing Cloud Connector V2, which allows users to interact with Marketing Cloud features (Email
Classic) in the Salesforce system. We scheduled the retirement of the Marketing Cloud Connector V2 for March 31, 2021.

With the proper permission set, you can set up an Auto Send for a Campaign. At the selected date and time, all campaign members not
yet sent to and not part of a scheduled or bulk send are added to the linked journey with the Auto Send defaults specified.
Who: The Auto Send feature is a limited release for some customers in the Marketing Cloud 231 release. General availability is coming
in a future release.
How: Launch Auto Send by clicking the Settings cog wheel in the Campaign Messages component. You can have one active Auto Send
per Campaign at a time. Auto Sends can contain up to 25,000 members. We recommend that the person setting up Auto Send be in
charge of Campaign to help ensure that all campaign members are included. For example, if someone sets up an Auto Send for another
person’s Campaign and can only access 40 of 100 campaign members, then only 40 members receive the campaign when it sends. You
can personalize at the Campaign level only for Auto Send. You can’t personalize at the person level.
Microsoft Dynamics CRM On-Premise Integration Is Being Retired October 29, 2021
The Microsoft Dynamics CRM on-premise integration with Marketing Cloud is being retired October 29, 2021. This retirement is due to
the enforcement of the Unified Interface by MS Dynamics. The MS Dynamics Connector by Marketing Cloud isn’t compatible with the
Unified Interface.
When: Either October 29, 2021 or when the customer is required to move to the Unified Interface for their on-premise version of Microsoft
Dynamics CRM.
How: With this retirement, customers must use Marketing Cloud Email Studio functionality to add new subscribers, send emails, and
access email tracking data. More information on the MS Dynamics transition to a Unified Interface is available here.
V2 of Marketing Cloud Connect Retiring on March 31, 2021

Classic) in the Salesforce system. We scheduled the retirement of the Marketing Cloud Connector V2 for March 31, 2021.
Who: Customers who are using V2 of Marketing Cloud Connect. You can determine what version is installed in your Salesforce org by
navigating to Setup > Installed Packages. Look for a package named Exact Target for App Exchange - 2007, which is the V2 of Marketing
Cloud Connect. V5 of the Marketing Cloud Connector is named Marketing Cloud.
Why: At Salesforce, trust is our #1 value when serving our customers. To provide security patching on potential vulnerabilities, we can
no longer support unmanaged packages where security patches can’t be pushed to customer environments.
How: Customers currently using V2 have these options:
• Customers using Sales Cloud or Service Cloud Enterprise or Unlimited Editions must upgrade to the latest version of Marketing Cloud
Connect and turn on the Subscriber Key option in Marketing Cloud. Customer support enables the Subscriber Key option.
54
Marketing Cloud Release Notes Marketing Cloud Data Management April 2021 Release Notes
• Customers who currently have a Salesforce Professional Edition must upgrade their Salesforce Sales or Service Cloud edition to
Enterprise or Unlimited to access V5.
• Customers can use their user credentials for Marketing Cloud and log directly into the Marketing Cloud user interface to perform
their sending.
For more details about differences between the two product versions, visit Marketing Cloud Connect Features.
Marketing Cloud Data Management April 2021 Release Notes

Learn about enhancements to the Journey Analytics dashboard, where Google Analytics tracking results appear. Check out the latest
features and updates from Salesforce CDP Audiences, a customer data management, segmentation, and activation tool that drives
personalization and engagement. To learn about Interaction Studio changes, see the New in Interaction Studio topic in the Interaction
Use the Updated Journey Analytics Dashboard

Check out the redesigned Journey Analytics Dashboard. You get the same powerful tracking, but with a cleaner layout and updated
dashboard editing flow. The dashboard’s tiles show the same data, but we condensed the onscreen space for a more data-intensive
look and feel. We also condensed the settings menu. Before, editing dashboard views was a process. Now, there’s a settings panel
where you can do everything in one place.
Learn What’s New in Customer 360 Audiences
Check out the latest features and updates from Customer 360 Audiences: Customer 360 Audiences Release Notes.

look and feel. We also condensed the settings menu. Before, editing dashboard views was a process. Now, there’s a settings panel where
you can do everything in one place.
Where: Customers who integrate Google Analytics can access the updated Journey Analytics dashboard in Journey Builder.
Learn What’s New in Customer 360 Audiences

Check out the latest features and updates from Customer 360 Audiences: Customer 360 Audiences Release Notes.

SEE ALSO:
55
Marketing Cloud Release Notes Marketing Cloud Einstein April 2021 Release Notes
Marketing Cloud Einstein April 2021 Release Notes

Understand your data quality across more Einstein for Marketing products. In this release, we added data quality metrics to the Einstein
Learning Center and the Engagement Frequency and Engagement Scoring dashboards. Target the content Einstein selects with more
precision, and add or upload content assets easily with new upload options in Einstein Content Selection. Plus, Einstein Messaging
Insights now gives more context to insights detected in your journey sends.
5
Gauge Data Quality for More Einstein Products

Use Einstein data quality scores to understand the quality of the data that Einstein applications can use, factors that impact data
quality, and tips to optimize Einstein's predictions and insights. Find data quality scores, supporting metrics, and tips for optimal
performance in the Einstein Overview and the Einstein Send Time Optimization, Engagement Frequency, and Engagement Scoring
dashboards.
Add Content Assets Efficiently
Creating ECS assets is easier and faster. You can add them as they are, from where they are, without publishing them to Content
Builder or another app. We added more ways to specify the ECS image beyond the option to add a URL.
Target the Content Einstein Selects
In the Einstein Content Selection content block, tell Einstein to select only assets that have a specific value for a specific attribute.
Selection Spotlight lets you easily focus on a specific type of content.
Get Context for Journey Insights
Einstein Messaging Insights now gives more context to insights detected in your journey sends. The Einstein Messaging Insights
dashboard includes indicators that represent journey updates to give context about anomalies presented. Get deeper insight into
what is potentially causing under- or overperformance in your journeys.
Send Data to Collect Code Securely
Send product data to Einstein Recommendations or Behavioral Triggers using the Streaming Updates API via HTTP POST, or by
enabling Batch Import. Streaming Updates using the Collect Tracking Code JavaScript Library deprecation is planned.
Understand Your Einstein Engagement Frequency Customer Base
See how many contacts are awaiting a personalized score compared to your total scored contact base. And find out how many
emails Einstein analyzed to generate personalized frequency recommendations.
Gauge Data Quality for More Einstein Products

Use Einstein data quality scores to understand the quality of the data that Einstein applications can use, factors that impact data quality,
and tips to optimize Einstein's predictions and insights. Find data quality scores, supporting metrics, and tips for optimal performance
in the Einstein Overview and the Einstein Send Time Optimization, Engagement Frequency, and Engagement Scoring dashboards.
Why: The quality of the data Einstein accesses dictates the quality of the analytics, insights, and predictions you receive. Use data quality
scores to quickly see opportunities for improvement, data factors to understand the data in play, and tips to identify actionable changes.
How: Check your score at a glance in each app’s card in Einstein Overview. To review which metrics matter for individual apps, click
View Details.
5
56
Marketing Cloud Release Notes Marketing Cloud Einstein April 2021 Release Notes
You can also review your data quality on the Einstein Send Time Optimization, Engagement Frequency, and Engagement Scoring
dashboards.
SEE ALSO:
Gauge Your Einstein Engagement Frequency Data Quality
Gauge Your Einstein Engagement Scoring Data Quality
Gauge Your Einstein Send Time Optimization Data Quality
Add Content Assets Efficiently

Creating ECS assets is easier and faster. You can add them as they are, from where they are, without publishing them to Content Builder
or another app. We added more ways to specify the ECS image beyond the option to add a URL.
How: From the Einstein Content Selection Asset Distribution tab, click View All Assets. Add assets here. Specify the image for the asset
by URL, a desktop file, or from Content Builder. You can even select HTML blocks from Content Builder if they don’t contain any AMPscript.
ECS converts the HTML into an image for you.
Target the Content Einstein Selects

In the Einstein Content Selection content block, tell Einstein to select only assets that have a specific value for a specific attribute. Selection
Spotlight lets you easily focus on a specific type of content.
How: In the Einstein Content Selection content block’s new Advanced section, you can select the asset attribute and the associated
value that you want to select from. For example, you can highlight sweaters for a given send, or summer vacations, or savings account
products.
Get Context for Journey Insights

Einstein Messaging Insights now gives more context to insights detected in your journey sends. The Einstein Messaging Insights dashboard
includes indicators that represent journey updates to give context about anomalies presented. Get deeper insight into what is potentially
causing under- or overperformance in your journeys.
SEE ALSO:
The Einstein Messaging Insights Dashboard
Send Data to Collect Code Securely

Send product data to Einstein Recommendations or Behavioral Triggers using the Streaming Updates API via HTTP POST, or by enabling
Batch Import. Streaming Updates using the Collect Tracking Code JavaScript Library deprecation is planned.
Who: This change impacts all Einstein Recommendation and Behavioral Triggers users. Customers who already implemented Streaming
Updates using the Collect Tracking Code JavaScript Library aren’t immediately impacted.
Why: The JavaScript version of Streaming Updates is an open API that could allow unauthorized changes to recommendation data.
How: Get custom instructions to import catalog data by navigating to Einstein Email Recommendations or Einstein Web Recommendations.
57
Marketing Cloud Release Notes Marketing Cloud Journeys and Messages April 2021 Release
Notes
Understand Your Einstein Engagement Frequency Customer Base

See how many contacts are awaiting a personalized score compared to your total scored contact base. And find out how many emails
Einstein analyzed to generate personalized frequency recommendations.
Where: Find these updates in the Einstein Engagement Frequency dashboard overview section.
Why: Understand the percentage of your contacts that have a personalized engagement frequency score. Then you can contextualize
Einstein Engagement Frequency’s performance when you see how many contacts Einstein has enough data to personalize sending
decisions for. Contacts that don’t have enough data for a personalized score are still sent to using AI. But Einstein’s global models
determine the frequency. And you can find out how many of your emails aren’t analyzed because they’re transactional sends, test sends,
or bounces so you know how much AI your sends can use.
SEE ALSO:
The Einstein Engagement Frequency Dashboard
Marketing Cloud Journeys and Messages April 2021 Release Notes

MobilePush supports .p12 sending on Apple’s upgraded HTTP/2 sending service. Now, you can flag contacts who have opted out of
WhatsApp chat messages. Classic CloudPages moves to new experience. In a future release, the contact deletes default suppression is
changing.
Use the Wait Until API Event Activity to Drive Real-Time Journey Experiences
Create a real-time experience for contacts by allowing an external event to trigger an action mid-journey. Configure the Wait Until
API Event activity to hold contacts until an event, such as a purchase or loan application, occurs before moving to the next activity
in a journey. You can also create customized experiences for contacts who don’t take the specified action within a defined timeframe.
View Recent Contact History for Activities in Journey Builder
View up to 30 days of contacts processed in any non-wait activity in Journey Builder. You can identify trends in contact success and
error rates, which allows you to troubleshoot and resolve issues more quickly.
MobilePush Support for iOS .p12 Certificates
Now, MobilePush customers can choose between using either the recommended .p8 Auth Key or the .p12 certificate when sending
push notifications on Apple’s upgraded HTTP/2 sending service. In 2020, Apple informed vendors that it was deprecating their legacy
iOS push notification service. So to migrate onto Apple’s new sending service, MobilePush temporarily removed support for .p12
certificates and instead required p8 Auth Keys when sending iOS push notifications.
Avoid Sending WhatsApp Chat Messages to Opted-Out Contacts
If a WhatsApp contact is flagged as opted out, Journey Builder automatically removes the contact from the audience source and
doesn’t send a message to them. Customers are charged for every message sent from Marketing Cloud to WhatsApp, regardless of
the delivery status. With this function, you aren’t sending messages to opted-out contacts and your available WhatsApp chat messages
aren’t consumed.
Classic CloudPages Moves to New Experience
Marketing Cloud is gradually retiring Classic CloudPages in future releases. There are no changes for this release but all changes are
announced ahead of time. Check out the new experience already available to customers with classic CloudPages.
The default suppression 14-day window for contact deletes is changing to 2 day in a Salesforce Marketing Cloud release in about 6
months. Contact Delete best practices recommend setting the suppression period to 0 to ensure that contact deletion doesn’t pause
after the contacts in the request are suppressed.
58
Notes

look and feel. We also condensed the settings menu. Before, editing dashboard views was a process. Now, there’s a settings panel
where you can do everything in one place.
Use the Wait Until API Event Activity to Drive Real-Time Journey Experiences
Create a real-time experience for contacts by allowing an external event to trigger an action mid-journey. Configure the Wait Until API
Event activity to hold contacts until an event, such as a purchase or loan application, occurs before moving to the next activity in a
journey. You can also create customized experiences for contacts who don’t take the specified action within a defined timeframe.
Where: This new journey activity is available to all Marketing Cloud Journey Builder customers.
How: Drag the Wait Until API Event activity onto the journey canvas. Click to open the activity, and follow the steps to configure it.
For details, visit Configure a Wait Until Event Activity.
View Recent Contact History for Activities in Journey Builder

View up to 30 days of contacts processed in any non-wait activity in Journey Builder. You can identify trends in contact success and error
rates, which allows you to troubleshoot and resolve issues more quickly.
Where: This enhancement is available to all Marketing Cloud Journey Builder customers.
How: From the journey canvas of any active or paused journey, click the count below any non-wait activity to view a summary of contacts
processed. For more information, click View Contact Details to open the detail view drawer. To see the list of individual contacts, click
View Details.
59
Notes
For more details, visit View Recent Contacts by Activity.
MobilePush Support for iOS .p12 Certificates

Now, MobilePush customers can choose between using either the recommended .p8 Auth Key or the .p12 certificate when sending
push notifications on Apple’s upgraded HTTP/2 sending service. In 2020, Apple informed vendors that it was deprecating their legacy
iOS push notification service. So to migrate onto Apple’s new sending service, MobilePush temporarily removed support for .p12
certificates and instead required p8 Auth Keys when sending iOS push notifications.
How: Navigate to MobilePush Administration, and select the app you want to update. Upload the .p12 certificate, input your app’s
Bundle ID, and select the Apple sending environment. Save the sending configuration.
Avoid Sending WhatsApp Chat Messages to Opted-Out Contacts

If a WhatsApp contact is flagged as opted out, Journey Builder automatically removes the contact from the audience source and doesn’t
send a message to them. Customers are charged for every message sent from Marketing Cloud to WhatsApp, regardless of the delivery
status. With this function, you aren’t sending messages to opted-out contacts and your available WhatsApp chat messages aren’t
consumed.
How: Import WhatsApp chat messaging contacts in Contact Builder, and add 1 for the opted-out field. You can also update existing
contacts the same way. Journey Builder doesn’t send messages to the contacts you mark as opted-out.
60
Marketing Cloud Release Notes January 2021 Release
Classic CloudPages Moves to New Experience

Marketing Cloud is gradually retiring Classic CloudPages in future releases. There are no changes for this release but all changes are
announced ahead of time. Check out the new experience already available to customers with classic CloudPages.
Where:In the Marketing Cloud navigation menu, select New CloudPages Experience in the Web Studio app switcher dropdown.
Why: To provide our customers with the best reliability, performance, and security, we updated the platform to a new experience. The
preview has a cleaner, faster user interface. New features include improved content and collection sorting, and the ability to copy existing
content.

The default suppression 14-day window for contact deletes is changing to 2 day in a Salesforce Marketing Cloud release in about 6
months. Contact Delete best practices recommend setting the suppression period to 0 to ensure that contact deletion doesn’t pause
after the contacts in the request are suppressed.
Where: When released, the new contact delete suppression window applies to all Contact Builder users who don’t have the default
suppression period overwritten. If your organization has the default setting overwritten before the change is implemented, this change
won't have any impact.
Why: Most customers set the suppression period to 0-2 days, while some leave it at the default value. Setting the default value to 2 days
gets contacts deleted sooner. Contacts can’t be reintroduced and messaged to while they’re suppressed, so shortening default suppression
facilitates reintroduction and messaging.

look and feel. We also condensed the settings menu. Before, editing dashboard views was a process. Now, there’s a settings panel where
you can do everything in one place.
Where: Customers who integrate Google Analytics can access the updated Journey Analytics dashboard in Journey Builder.

The January 2021 Marketing Cloud release occurs on January 30, 2021 through February 6, 2021. Some features are made available to
Get an exclusive, in-depth look at our new features by tuning into the January 2021 Marketing Cloud Release New Feature Overview.
Join this webinar on February 11, 2021 at 12:00 PM EST!
Release Highlights
• Datorama Reports for Marketing Cloud on page 73
61
• Salesforce CDP Audiences Enhancements

• Chat Messaging for WhatsApp on page 75
• Datorama: TotalConnect Enhancements
• AMP for Email on page 77
• Pardot: Campaign Cloning with Related Assets
• Datorama: Email to Web Conversion App
• January 2021 Top Feature Demos
• January 2021 Release FAQ
Release Edits
January 21, 2021 Revised the Analyze Emails and Journeys with Datorama Reports
release note
January 21, 2021 Added note to clarify contact error tracking limits
February 1, 2021 Added links to release documentation
February 2, 2021 Updated feature name for One-Click Header Unsubscribe.
February 4, 2021 • Removed Get Enhanced Send Time Insight release note
• Added link to SSO certificate release note
March 18, 2021 Added Get Enhanced Send Time Insight release note
Marketing Cloud App and Setup January 2021 Release Notes

Learn about changes and enhancements to SSO settings, encryption keys, and SSL certificates.
Marketing Cloud Cross-Cloud Integrations January 2021 Release Notes
V2 of Marketing Cloud Connect is scheduled to retire in March 2021. To maintain Marketing Cloud Connect security and connectivity,
update to the Connected App by January 2021. We removed the Go to Marketing Cloud deep links of various sections of the Marketing
Cloud Connect Sales/Service screens. Distributed Marketing updates include the ability to restrict sending, use regular expressions
for restricted words, and the ability to use multiple custom personalization interactions for segmented sends.
Marketing Cloud Data Management January 2021 Release Notes
Learn about changes and enhancements to Bring Your Own Key (BYOK) for file imports, and Contact Builder’s new WhatsApp channel
option. Get more journey reporting with Google Analytics Free. And check out Interaction Studio release notes on the Interaction
Marketing Cloud Einstein January 2021 Release Notes
Find out more about Einstein products, get deeper insights, and let Einstein do more for you. Check out all Einstein products in the
new Einstein Learning Center and dig into use cases. Get better insights and more accurate predictions with the global data pool.
And Einstein can now reduce messaging fatigue in single send journeys and tag new Content Builder images in non-English languages.
62
Marketing Cloud Release Notes Marketing Cloud App and Setup January 2021 Release Notes
Marketing Cloud Journeys and Messages January 2021 Release Notes

Start chatting with your customers with the new WhatsApp chat messaging activity. Classic Content edit email and template is
retiring with this release. Check out the new MobileConnect conversation window and data view values. Use the SMS transactional
API to get data about message delivery.
Marketing Cloud Social January 2021 Release Notes
As a super user or admin, you can enforce that users log in to Social Studio via Single Sign-On (SSO). You can protect user Social
Studio accounts by requiring them to use multi-factor authentication (MFA) when logging into Social Studio.
Marketing Cloud App and Setup January 2021 Release Notes

Learn about changes and enhancements to SSO settings, encryption keys, and SSL certificates.
Update Your SSO Settings with a New Marketing Cloud Certificate

Marketing Cloud is replacing its existing single sign-on (SSO) certificate, which expires on February 18, 2021. If you use our SP-initiated
URL or configured your identity provider to send encrypted assertions, update your identity provider with the new certificate. To
ensure that Marketing Cloud’s SSO functionality continues to work for your users, update your certificate by February 18, 2021.
Bring Encryption Keys from Your System to Marketing Cloud
Marketing Cloud Bring Your Own Key (BYOK) offering is now available to all Marketing Cloud customers using Data at Rest Encryption
for a Dedicated Data Environment! Provide your own generated RSA2048 encryption key for encryption at rest in the dedicated
database for your Marketing Cloud account. This feature enhances the security of your encryption implementation. The key is used
as the key encryption key to encrypt the encryption keys for Data at Rest Encryption. This key takes the place of keys otherwise
generated by Marketing Cloud. You can import, rotate, and revoke your key based on your security and business needs. Revoking
an active key also revokes access to any data in the database, as the database is offline when the key isn’t accessible. Provide the
same encryption key after revocation to bring the database back online. Without the key, you can’t bring the database back online.
Discontinue Use of Internet Explorer 11 for Marketing Cloud
Suspended Account Changes
The process for suspended Marketing Cloud accounts is changing. Enterprise and business unit sending now is canceled when
accounts are suspended. If an account moves from suspended to expired, sending continues to be restricted. If an account moves
from suspended to active sending restrictions are lifted. Customer action is required to reactivate sending, including journeys,
automatons, and triggered sends.

URL or configured your identity provider to send encrypted assertions, update your identity provider with the new certificate. To ensure
that Marketing Cloud’s SSO functionality continues to work for your users, update your certificate by February 18, 2021.
When: Starting January 12, 2021, all Marketing Cloud SSO customers can get a new 2021 certificate from Marketing Cloud. Your identity
provider can use the old certificate to access Marketing Cloud until February 18, 2021.
Where: This change applies to all Marketing Cloud users who implemented our SAML 2.0 SSO functionality and use our SP-initiated
URL or configured their identity provider to send encrypted assertions.
How: From Setup, in Security Settings, click Single Sign-On Settings and opt in to acquire the new 2021 certificate.
63
Marketing Cloud Release Notes Marketing Cloud Cross-Cloud Integrations January 2021
Release Notes

Marketing Cloud Bring Your Own Key (BYOK) offering is now available to all Marketing Cloud customers using Data at Rest Encryption
for a Dedicated Data Environment! Provide your own generated RSA2048 encryption key for encryption at rest in the dedicated database
for your Marketing Cloud account. This feature enhances the security of your encryption implementation. The key is used as the key
encryption key to encrypt the encryption keys for Data at Rest Encryption. This key takes the place of keys otherwise generated by
Marketing Cloud. You can import, rotate, and revoke your key based on your security and business needs. Revoking an active key also
revokes access to any data in the database, as the database is offline when the key isn’t accessible. Provide the same encryption key after
revocation to bring the database back online. Without the key, you can’t bring the database back online.

Support and access to Marketing Cloud for Internet Explorer 11 ended on December 31, 2020.
Use one of the other supported browsers for Marketing Cloud access.
Suspended Account Changes

The process for suspended Marketing Cloud accounts is changing. Enterprise and business unit sending now is canceled when accounts
are suspended. If an account moves from suspended to expired, sending continues to be restricted. If an account moves from suspended
to active sending restrictions are lifted. Customer action is required to reactivate sending, including journeys, automatons, and triggered
sends.
See Suspended Marketing Cloud Account Subscriptions.
Marketing Cloud Cross-Cloud Integrations January 2021 Release Notes

V2 of Marketing Cloud Connect is scheduled to retire in March 2021. To maintain Marketing Cloud Connect security and connectivity,
update to the Connected App by January 2021. We removed the Go to Marketing Cloud deep links of various sections of the Marketing
Cloud Connect Sales/Service screens. Distributed Marketing updates include the ability to restrict sending, use regular expressions for
restricted words, and the ability to use multiple custom personalization interactions for segmented sends.
V2 of Marketing Cloud Connect Scheduled for Retirement on March 31, 2021

Classic) within the Salesforce system. We’ve scheduled the retirement of the Marketing Cloud Connector V2 on March 31, 2021.
Action Required: Maintain Security and Connectivity with the Connected App by January 30, 2021
To maintain the security of your connectivity to Sales and Service Cloud, Marketing Cloud Connect V5 customers must move from
legacy authentication to Connected App authentication. If you aren’t authenticated with the Connected App, you’ll no longer be
able to connect to Sales/Service Cloud after January 30, 2021.
Deep Links Removed from Marketing Cloud Connect Pages in Sales and Service Cloud in January
To improve security, we’re removing the Go To Marketing Cloud links on various sections of the Marketing Cloud Connect Sales/Service
Cloud screens after this release.
Allow Distributed Marketing Multiple Custom Personalization Interactions for Segmented Sends
You can allow multiple custom interaction tabs during the personalization workflow to further customize Distributed Marketing to
fit your company’s needs.
64
Release Notes
Use Regular Expressions and Wildcards for Restricted Words in Distributed Marketing
Give your Distributed Marketing business users more control message personalization content. The enhanced Distributed Marketing
Restricted Words feature lets Distributed Marketing admins control the content with more flexibility and granularity using custom
expressions. The feature is enhanced to allow regular expression strings and wildcards so your company can customize restrictions
on text-based content.
Manage Campaigns with Distributed Marketing Restrict Sending
The Distributed Marketing Restrict Sending feature allows organizations to disable sending for Quick Sends, Campaign Sends, and
Scheduled Sends for campaigns and content that can no longer be available to business users.

Classic) within the Salesforce system. We’ve scheduled the retirement of the Marketing Cloud Connector V2 on March 31, 2021.
Who: Customers who are using V2 of Marketing Cloud Connect. Determine what version is installed in your Salesforce org by navigating
to Setup > Installed Packages. Look for a package named Exact Target for App Exchange - 2007, which is the V2 of Marketing Cloud
Connect. V5 of the Marketing Cloud Connector is named Marketing Cloud.
Why: At Salesforce, trust is our #1 value when serving our customers. To provide security patching on potential vulnerabilities, we can
no longer support unmanaged packages where security patches can’t be pushed to customer environments.
How: We recommend customers currently using V2 pursue one of these options:
• Customers using Sales or Service Cloud Enterprise or Unlimited Edition must upgrade to the latest version of Marketing Cloud Connect
and turn on the Subscriber Key option in Marketing Cloud. Customer support enables the Subscriber Key option.
• Customers who currently have a Salesforce Professional Edition must upgrade their Salesforce Sales or Service Cloud edition to either
their sending.
Action Required: Maintain Security and Connectivity with the Connected App by
January 30, 2021
To maintain the security of your connectivity to Sales and Service Cloud, Marketing Cloud Connect V5 customers must move from legacy
authentication to Connected App authentication. If you aren’t authenticated with the Connected App, you’ll no longer be able to connect
to Sales/Service Cloud after January 30, 2021.
Why: At Salesforce, trust is our #1 value when serving our customers. We’re requiring customers to migrate to the most secure
authentication method we have available.
How: In Marketing Cloud Setup, go to Platform Tools>Apps>Salesforce integration. On the Salesforce Integration screen, if you see the
Tracking User Name and Tracking User Password fields under Configuration Settings, you’re using legacy authentication.
65
Release Notes
If you’re authenticated with the Connected App, you see a section called Connection at the bottom of the Configuration Settings screen.
66
Release Notes
This process can require up to a 2-hour outage. Check out how to Upgrade to the Connected App.
Deep Links Removed from Marketing Cloud Connect Pages in Sales and Service Cloud
in January
To improve security, we’re removing the Go To Marketing Cloud links on various sections of the Marketing Cloud Connect Sales/Service
Cloud screens after this release.
Where: To ensure the most secure connection between Sales/Service Cloud and Marketing Cloud, we’re asking users to log directly
into Marketing Cloud when needed. We removed the deep links from the Email Send page, the A/B Test page, and the Triggered Send
page. We also removed the setting that controls who sees the deep links on the Marketing Cloud Settings page.
How: To access the Marketing Cloud Connect features, log into Marketing Cloud, and navigate to a specific page. You can still access
the links, but they redirect you to the main Marketing Cloud login page.
Allow Distributed Marketing Multiple Custom Personalization Interactions for

Segmented Sends
You can allow multiple custom interaction tabs during the personalization workflow to further customize Distributed Marketing to fit
your company’s needs.
Why: This enhancement extends the CPI feature to allow multiple custom interaction tabs instead of the current limit of one.
67
Marketing Cloud Release Notes Marketing Cloud Data Management January 2021 Release
Notes
How: The multiple customer interactive tabs feature is available for Segmented Sends with Campaigns, Quick Sends with various objects,
and Scheduled Sends. It isn’t available for Bulk Send workflows. We recommend that you use no more than 10 custom interaction tabs
with no more than 10 fields for each to maintain optimum performance. This feature is available to all customers who have the 230 and
higher version of the Distributed Marketing package installed. Follow the instructions on how to Add Custom Personalization Interactions
to Distributed Marketing. You can register multiple custom interaction tabs. The tabs appear in the personalization workflow from top
to bottom in the order that they were registered. To reorder the tabs, delete and then reregister in the order that you want.
Use Regular Expressions and Wildcards for Restricted Words in Distributed Marketing
Give your Distributed Marketing business users more control message personalization content. The enhanced Distributed Marketing
Restricted Words feature lets Distributed Marketing admins control the content with more flexibility and granularity using custom
expressions. The feature is enhanced to allow regular expression strings and wildcards so your company can customize restrictions on
text-based content.
How: Customers must determine which regular expressions to apply to the Distributed Marketing restricted words feature. Customers
can include text content validation rules using regular expressions, including wildcards, which run as business users enter text into
Distributed Marketing content blocks. In Sales or Service Cloud, search in App Launcher and navigate to Distributed Marketing
Administration, then select Restricted Words. Customers can populate their regular expressions in the new List of Regular Expressions
text box. Then, click Apply Changes to save changes. Set the Disable sending when a message includes a restricted word to yes to
apply this feature. We recommend no more than 10 MB of customized regular expressions be entered into the system per Organization.
Manage Campaigns with Distributed Marketing Restrict Sending

The Distributed Marketing Restrict Sending feature allows organizations to disable sending for Quick Sends, Campaign Sends, and
Scheduled Sends for campaigns and content that can no longer be available to business users.
Why: Customers need the ability to restrict sending for Campaigns and Quick Sends without disconnecting the Journey from the sending
workflow. This feature allows Distributed Marketing admins to control content access in a time frame or restrict content sending
immediately when inactive.
How: On the Distributed Marketing package Administration page under Restrict Sending, customers can select their settings. Customers
can use the Active checkbox date ranges for both Campaigns and Quick Sends to control access to content per Campaign and Quick
Send. The Restrict Sending feature uses the existing Active setting, Start Date and End Date for Campaigns and uses the new Quick Send
Active setting, and Start and End Date fields. Based on how you set these fields, the Distributed Marketing admin can use the Content
Activation settings in the Restrict Sending section of Distributed Marketing Administration to control what Content is available. The
admin can choose one or both of the two options Disable sending based on the Active flag and Disable sending based on the date
range. The settings can be different for Quick Send and Campaigns.
Marketing Cloud Data Management January 2021 Release Notes

Learn about changes and enhancements to Bring Your Own Key (BYOK) for file imports, and Contact Builder’s new WhatsApp channel
option. Get more journey reporting with Google Analytics Free. And check out Interaction Studio release notes on the Interaction Studio
Knowledge Base.
BYOK for File Decryption with Automation Studio File Transfer Activities
Discover Reports Retires in April 2022 Release
The Discover reporting tool is scheduled for retirement in all Marketing Cloud accounts on April 1, 2022. Datorama Reports replaces
the Discover reporting tool.
68
Marketing Cloud Release Notes Marketing Cloud Data Management January 2021 Release
Notes
Create Contacts Import Definition for WhatsApp

The new import Target Destination type in the Contacts Import workflow is available exclusively for Chat Messaging Subscriptions.
Use the Chat Messaging Target Definition to create and store WhatsApp subscription uploads for approved channels.
Create an Audience for WhatsApp
If your company has WhatsApp provisioned, you can create an audience for WhatsApp in Contact Builder. This allows Journey Builder
to use WhatsApp audiences when using the WhatsApp messaging channel.
Enhance Your Tracking with Google Analytics
Get journey reporting that gives you a better picture of the impact of your marketing efforts on customer online engagement. The
Google Analytics Free integration opens up some Google Analytics 360 Integration tracking and reporting features for customers
with the free Google Analytics Property Type. Google Analytics Free doesn’t include Google Audiences reporting.
BYOK for File Decryption with Automation Studio File Transfer Activities
You can configure Automation Studio file transfer activities to decrypt a file from a Marketing Cloud FTP site using your own RSA private
key with Marketing Cloud Bring Your Own Key (BYOK). You can then save the decrypted contents to a safehouse location to prepare to
import files. This feature also supports file encryption from a Marketing Cloud Safehouse location before saving that file to a Marketing
Cloud file location for secure data export. Marketing Cloud supports both PGP and GPG encryption.
We recommend that you discontinue use of the Marketing Cloud public key and use your own encryption key as soon as possible. After
June 1, 2021, you can no longer create File Transfer activities using the Marketing Cloud public key for file decryption.
Discover Reports Retires in April 2022 Release

The Discover reporting tool is scheduled for retirement in all Marketing Cloud accounts on April 1, 2022. Datorama Reports replaces the
Discover reporting tool.
When: Discover remains available in 2021. The Discover reporting tool is scheduled for retirement in all Salesforce orgs as of April 1,
2022.
Why: On February 1, 2021 we formally announce Discover’s retirement, starting a countdown so you can learn and get comfortable
with Datorama Reports. After the January 2021 release, more enablement materials will be available.
How: Datorama Reports, which launch in the January 2021 Marketing Cloud release, eventually replace Discover reports for all Discover
customers.
Create Contacts Import Definition for WhatsApp

The new import Target Destination type in the Contacts Import workflow is available exclusively for Chat Messaging Subscriptions. Use
the Chat Messaging Target Definition to create and store WhatsApp subscription uploads for approved channels.
How: This feature is available in Contact Builder on the Contact Builder Imports tab for all customers with WhatsApp provisioned. Navigate
to the Imports tab in Contact Builder and select Create. Select the new Chat Messaging definition for chat subscribers to tell the system
where the contacts are stored and for which app channel. Select WhatsApp as the Chat Messaging App. Set the App Channel for the
designated and approved WhatsApp App channel. The import applies only to this channel. When a contact opts in to multiple channels,
import the contact to each designated channel.
69
Marketing Cloud Release Notes Marketing Cloud Einstein January 2021 Release Notes
Create an Audience for WhatsApp

If your company has WhatsApp provisioned, you can create an audience for WhatsApp in Contact Builder. This allows Journey Builder
to use WhatsApp audiences when using the WhatsApp messaging channel.
How: Set up filtered lists for WhatsApp in Contact Builder. Create one or more app-channels for WhatsApp via Chat Messaging Setup.
In Contact Builder go to All Contacts and click Mobile Lists, and then select WhatsApp from the channel selector. Choose the starting
population for your filtered list as any of the app-channels or All Contacts.
Note: Be sure to create an app channel first so WhatsApp appears as a selection option.
When you select WhatsApp from the channel dropdown, Filtered List is the only available option. All Contacts, and the app channels
that you created appear for you to select your starting population for the audience that you want to define.
You don’t need specific user permissions. But the account needs the Business Rule CHAT_MESSAGING assigned to it, and WhatsApp
channels provisioned to create an audience for WhatsApp.
Enhance Your Tracking with Google Analytics

Get journey reporting that gives you a better picture of the impact of your marketing efforts on customer online engagement. The
Google Analytics Free integration opens up some Google Analytics 360 Integration tracking and reporting features for customers with
the free Google Analytics Property Type. Google Analytics Free doesn’t include Google Audiences reporting.
How: If you have Journey Builder, the Google Analytics Free integration is available. Find tracking configuration in Google Analytics and
Parameter Manager in Setup. After completing setup, find Google Analytics reporting on the Journey Builder Analytics dashboard. Find
enablement information at Google Analytics 360 Integration for Marketing Cloud in Salesforce Help.

SEE ALSO:

Find out more about Einstein products, get deeper insights, and let Einstein do more for you. Check out all Einstein products in the new
Einstein Learning Center and dig into use cases. Get better insights and more accurate predictions with the global data pool. And Einstein
can now reduce messaging fatigue in single send journeys and tag new Content Builder images in non-English languages.
6
Explore Every Marketing Cloud Einstein Product

Our interactive, use case-driven portal lets you not only learn about Einstein products, but you can become an Einstein advocate
who champions for AI to your business. The Learning Center helps you understand the value Einstein brings to your marketing
operations.
6
70
Get Enhanced Send Time Insight

Einstein can now use data from multiple customers to derive insights about the best time to send emails. Einstein securely creates
a model based on opted-in customers’ email engagement data, improving prediction accuracy so you send emails to each customer
at the most optimal time.
Segment by Send Frequency in Single Send Journeys
Capture the power of Einstein when you set up a single send journey. And setting up the activity is now simpler. Use the Frequency
Split activity to message contacts according to engagement frequency in Journey Builder. Suppress saturated contacts or increase
your sending to undermessaged contacts. Try out the Frequency split in a single send journey so you’re in the know when you build
multi-step journeys.
Explore the Einstein Engagement Scoring Model for Mobile
The Einstein Engagement Scoring for Mobile model card provides insight into how the artificial intelligence (AI) model analyzes
messages and the factors that it uses. Factors include the types of inputs the model uses, its best applications, and ethical considerations
in its use.
Tag Images in More Languages
Update Einstein Content Tagging to automatically tag new Content Builder images in non-English languages. Einstein still tags
images in English by default.
Look Inside Einstein's Asset Selection
Understand why a particular asset was selected for a particular subscriber. Find out why Einstein Content Selection didn’t select
other assets. Use asset selection results to fine-tune your selection rules.
Give Asset Attributes Multiple Values
Einstein Content Selection now supports multiple values in asset attributes. Plus, you can make an asset attribute required or restrict
it to a fixed list of values.
Get Redesigned Asset Selection Analytics
Einstein Content Selection performance analytics get a new look that includes more informative graphs. Get a better sense of scale.
See not just the percentage of selections for each asset in an asset class, but also the number of selections for each time frame. Plus,
you get finer detail and a better user experience when there were no selections.
Analyze Emails and Journeys with Datorama Reports
Datorama Reports for Marketing Cloud is a new way to generate, view, and share a detailed analysis of your Email and Journey
campaign level data. You can optimize performance and increase engagement with your customers.
Explore Every Marketing Cloud Einstein Product

Our interactive, use case-driven portal lets you not only learn about Einstein products, but you can become an Einstein advocate who
champions for AI to your business. The Learning Center helps you understand the value Einstein brings to your marketing operations.
Why: Demystify AI by approaching its application with relatable use cases so that you unlock the complete value of Einstein for Marketing.
How: Interact with the Einstein Learning Center on the Marketing Cloud landing page and the Einstein Overview page.
Get Enhanced Send Time Insight

Einstein can now use data from multiple customers to derive insights about the best time to send emails. Einstein securely creates a
model based on opted-in customers’ email engagement data, improving prediction accuracy so you send emails to each customer at
the most optimal time.
Why: More data allows for better predictions. Now Einstein can make improved recommendations for send timing for individuals using
modeling derived from a much larger pool of engagement data.
71
How: Einstein assesses your Marketing Cloud instance’s data. Where appropriate, Einstein uses the model derived from global data.
When this model is used, a banner appears on the Einstein Send Time Optimization dashboard to let you know. Most customers’ instances
don’t immediately start using this modeling approach due to the gradual rollout of this feature. To use the model derived from global
data across multiple Marketing Cloud customers, your Enterprise Account must contribute data to the global data pool. Find your opt-in
status in Einstein Settings in Marketing Cloud Setup. To opt your Enterprise account out of contributing data to Einstein’s pool, submit
a support case.
SEE ALSO:
Use Global Modeling Data
Segment by Send Frequency in Single Send Journeys

Capture the power of Einstein when you set up a single send journey. And setting up the activity is now simpler. Use the Frequency Split
activity to message contacts according to engagement frequency in Journey Builder. Suppress saturated contacts or increase your
sending to undermessaged contacts. Try out the Frequency split in a single send journey so you’re in the know when you build multi-step
journeys.
How: This feature is available to all email users who have activated Einstein Engagement Frequency version 2. In Journey Builder, create
a Single Send journey, and add an email. Click Explore to find out how Einstein can help in your journey. Then select Einstein Engagement
Frequency, and add the Frequency Split.
Explore the Einstein Engagement Scoring Model for Mobile

The Einstein Engagement Scoring for Mobile model card provides insight into how the artificial intelligence (AI) model analyzes messages
and the factors that it uses. Factors include the types of inputs the model uses, its best applications, and ethical considerations in its use.
SEE ALSO:
Einstein Engagement Scoring for Mobile Model Card
Tag Images in More Languages

Update Einstein Content Tagging to automatically tag new Content Builder images in non-English languages. Einstein still tags images
in English by default.
How: In Setup, navigate to Einstein Content Tagging. Einstein customers can now select from multiple languages to use for new Einstein
content tags. After they’re enabled, new tags are applied in the selected language. Update this setting at any time to apply new tags in
a different language. Your current tags aren’t modified until you update the corresponding image. Tags that you created aren’t affected.
Look Inside Einstein's Asset Selection

Understand why a particular asset was selected for a particular subscriber. Find out why Einstein Content Selection didn’t select other
assets. Use asset selection results to fine-tune your selection rules.
How: Click View Selections in Performance Analytics. Add a subscriber key. A list of email sends to the subscriber that use Einstein
Content Selection appears. Select a send to view the assets evaluated for that subscriber for that send. Click an asset for details, including
which assets were ineligible for selection and why.
SEE ALSO:
Find Out Why an Asset Was Selected
72
Give Asset Attributes Multiple Values

Einstein Content Selection now supports multiple values in asset attributes. Plus, you can make an asset attribute required or restrict it
to a fixed list of values.
Why: Some Einstein Content Selection assets need more than one value for an attribute, such as when an asset is appropriate for both
runners and hikers. In other cases, business rules make it important that every asset has a value for a given attribute, so you can now
make an asset attribute required. Sometimes you want Einstein to use a fixed list of valid values such as a list of product categories, or a
set of languages. Now you can specify a list of values to select from, reducing data entry errors and ensuring that the content has
maximum impact.
How: In Einstein Content Selection, select Settings and edit an asset attribute. Specify if the asset can have multiple values, if it’s required,
and if there’s a fixed set of valid values.
Get Redesigned Asset Selection Analytics

Einstein Content Selection performance analytics get a new look that includes more informative graphs. Get a better sense of scale. See
not just the percentage of selections for each asset in an asset class, but also the number of selections for each time frame. Plus, you get
finer detail and a better user experience when there were no selections.
How: In Einstein Content Selection, navigate to Performance Analytics. Select an asset class to analyze and a time frame. For the greatest
amount of detail, select a single date or Today as your date range.
Analyze Emails and Journeys with Datorama Reports

Datorama Reports for Marketing Cloud is a new way to generate, view, and share a detailed analysis of your Email and Journey campaign
level data. You can optimize performance and increase engagement with your customers.
Datorama Reports offers these tools:
• Dashboards: Easily analyze your data and make informed, data-driven decisions with prebuilt dashboards that visualize email and
journey campaign level data up to the business unit level.
• Scheduled Reports: Retrieve, view, and share a detailed analysis of your data. You can easily schedule and share reports via Excel,
CSV, and Text or through visual formats like PowerPoint, PDF, and PNG.
• Pivot Tables: Explore your data and create custom reports that organize, summarize, and slice your data so that you can view
comparisons, trends, and patterns.
When: This feature will be provisioned based on renewal date, starting on February 16. For more information about access, contact your
Marketing Cloud account representative.
Where: All Corporate and Enterprise customers and PRO customers that have Discover enabled in their accounts can access Datorama
reports.
How: From the Analytics Builder, select Datorama Reports.
73
Marketing Cloud Release Notes Marketing Cloud Journeys and Messages January 2021
Release Notes
SEE ALSO:
Marketing Cloud Journeys and Messages January 2021 Release Notes

Start chatting with your customers with the new WhatsApp chat messaging activity. Classic Content edit email and template is retiring
with this release. Check out the new MobileConnect conversation window and data view values. Use the SMS transactional API to get
data about message delivery.
Chat with Your Customers via Marketing Cloud WhatsApp Messages

A new chat messaging feature lets you send transactional and session messages to your customers with WhatsApp. For the onboarding
process and their established conversational API, we’re partnering with Sinch, an official WhatsApp business solution provider.
View Enhanced Contact Error Details in Journey Builder
Now when you view the path and location of a specific contact in a journey, you can also see details of any error that caused the
contact to exit prematurely.
Get Increased Limits for Triggered Send Subscriber Errors
The default Triggered Sends subscriber error threshold increased from 1 to 10. The triggered send goes into an error state if the
triggered send definition attempts to process 10 subscribers in a row with data that can’t be processed. Up to 10 consecutive
subscribers can error before failing, which occurs on the 11th.
Get One-Click Header Unsubscribe Support in Email Studio
New and modified email headers are included in all commercial classification email sends to support the one-click unsubscribe
method. Some ISP email clients require this header to support the unsubscribe link that they provide to their subscribers for easier
unsubscribe access.
Changed Email Tracking Pixel to Improve Accessibility
We added an empty alt attribute to the email tracking pixel in the <img> element so screen readers don't read the src attribute.
74
Release Notes
Classic Content Retirement: Email Modifications and Templates Disabled in Email Studio
After the January 2021 release, Email Studio Classic Content users can’t save modifications to email and email templates.
Live Image Retires in April 2021 Release
Content Builder Live Image is being retired with the April 2021 Marketing Cloud release. Live Image retirement was previously
scheduled for January 2021.
Create and Send AMP-Powered Emails in Marketing Cloud
AMP for Email is a new open-source email standard that allows customers to interact with messages directly in their inbox. You can
use AMP for various promotional and transactional use cases such as responding to events, leaving feedback, completing surveys,
and getting order status updates, all within the inbox. Common AMP email use cases include: carousels, confirmations and opt-ins,
real-time data, browsing and research, and appointment booking.
New MobileConnect Data View Values
JBActivtyID and JBDefinitionID have been added to the Automation Studio _SMSmessagetracking data view.
Set a Conversation Window in MobileConnect
With the January 2021 release, you can set conversation windows at the keyword level in the MobileConnect Setup app.
Use Transactional API to Get Data About Your SMS Delivery Events
Transient, bounce, and delivery events for SMS are available via the event notification service when sending via transactional API.
Chat with Your Customers via Marketing Cloud WhatsApp Messages

A new chat messaging feature lets you send transactional and session messages to your customers with WhatsApp. For the onboarding
process and their established conversational API, we’re partnering with Sinch, an official WhatsApp business solution provider.
Where: After the chat messaging feature is provisioned, you can use Content Builder and Journey Builder to personalize and send
messages to your audience. Enterprise and Corporate edition customers can purchase this feature after February 16, 2021. Contact your
Marketing Cloud account executive for details.
Why: We received feedback from brands who wanted to use WhatsApp to engage customers in international markets, including Latin
America, Europe, and Asia.
How: To onboard, contact your Marketing Cloud account executive or click Download in Journey Builder WhatsApp activity. You must
have app installation permissions to complete this step. There are a few steps to complete before you can start sending WhatsApp
messages.
1. Create a WhatsApp Account: Create a WhatsApp account to link with Facebook Business Manager. WhatsApp must approve your
account, which takes approximately 2–3 business days.
2. Create Your Channels: After your account is approved, you can create brand channels to chat with your customers. Channels also
require WhatsApp approval, which takes approximately 2–3 business days.
3. Create Message Templates: To send transactional messages, create template messages in the Chat Messaging Setup App. Template
messages require WhatsApp approval to ensure that promotional content isn’t sent.
4. Create a WhatsApp Audience: WhatsApp requires explicit consent from your contacts for template messages.
5. Create Your Messages: Create and personalize your message in Content Builder. Choose from your approved template messages or
create session messages, which don’t require approval. Session messages are free-form responses to user-initiated conversation.
6. Send Your Messages: Use Journey Builder to send your WhatsApp messages. Drag the WhatsApp activity onto the canvas and
configure the rest of the customer journey. To send session messages, add the new Inbound Chat entry source to the beginning of
the journey.
7. Analyze Your Data: You can view your message delivery rate in Journey Builder and get bounced message reports in Automation
Studio.
75
Release Notes
View Enhanced Contact Error Details in Journey Builder

Now when you view the path and location of a specific contact in a journey, you can also see details of any error that caused the contact
to exit prematurely.
Why: Easily troubleshoot issues that cause a contact to exit early by understanding which error occurred.
Note: Details for every error type and activity aren’t yet supported. Common errors in email, update contact, Sales & Service Cloud
activities, and custom activities are available. Errors that occur before the January 2021 release aren’t viewable.
How: In Journey Builder, open the Health panel of a stopped or running journey and search for a contact. If the contact encountered
an error that caused them to exit at a particular activity, click to view the details of that error.
For details, see Troubleshoot Contact Journey Error Message.
Get Increased Limits for Triggered Send Subscriber Errors

The default Triggered Sends subscriber error threshold increased from 1 to 10. The triggered send goes into an error state if the triggered
send definition attempts to process 10 subscribers in a row with data that can’t be processed. Up to 10 consecutive subscribers can error
before failing, which occurs on the 11th.
Why: This enhancement reduces the frequency of errors for triggered send definitions that go into an errored state due to bad subscriber
data or AMPscript that can’t be evaluated.
How: No action is needed. However, if you've called Marketing Cloud support to request a customer threshold limit, that custom setting
doesn’t change.
Important: With this change, notifications related to canceled triggered sends via Salesforce Support are being retired. To receive
notifications when triggered sends exceed 10 subscriber failures in a row, opt in to Alert Manager in Marketing Cloud Setup.
Get One-Click Header Unsubscribe Support in Email Studio

New and modified email headers are included in all commercial classification email sends to support the one-click unsubscribe method.
Some ISP email clients require this header to support the unsubscribe link that they provide to their subscribers for easier unsubscribe
access.
Why: Tracking subscriber engagement is a key component of good email deliverability, including unsubscribes. Many ISP email clients
provide an unsubscribe option that allows subscribers to easily unsubscribe from the brand’s emails. Letting the subscriber unsubscribe
easily removes unwanted emails from inboxes, and results in more engaged subscriber lists, which improve ISP deliverability.
For details, see List-Unsubscribe Header Unsubscribe.
Changed Email Tracking Pixel to Improve Accessibility

We added an empty alt attribute to the email tracking pixel in the <img> element so screen readers don't read the src attribute.
Classic Content Retirement: Email Modifications and Templates Disabled in Email

Studio
After the January 2021 release, Email Studio Classic Content users can’t save modifications to email and email templates.
Why: As part of the ongoing Email Studio Classic Content retirement, we disabled the Save action for any modifications to classic emails.
With this change, users can still access and view content in the Classic Editor. Customers must migrate their content to Content Builder.
Check out this article for more information and instructions on Classic Content retirement.
76
Release Notes
How: The banner is updated to reflect the changes in the application. The Save button is disabled.
Live Image Retires in April 2021 Release

Content Builder Live Image is being retired with the April 2021 Marketing Cloud release. Live Image retirement was previously scheduled
for January 2021.
Create and Send AMP-Powered Emails in Marketing Cloud

AMP for Email is a new open-source email standard that allows customers to interact with messages directly in their inbox. You can use
AMP for various promotional and transactional use cases such as responding to events, leaving feedback, completing surveys, and getting
order status updates, all within the inbox. Common AMP email use cases include: carousels, confirmations and opt-ins, real-time data,
browsing and research, and appointment booking.
Where: This change applies to all Marketing Cloud Pro, Corporate, and Enterprise editions.
When: This feature is made available to your account by March 1 2021.
Why: AMP offers interactive, real-time content and data at open time enabling marketers to create highly personalized email experiences.
The AMP version of the message is embedded into the email as a new MIME part, in addition to the HTML and plaintext to ensure that
email works across all clients.
How: You can use content builder to create, preview, and save AMP emails before you send them. You can send AMP emails using any
existing send options in Marketing Cloud. AMP emails are supported in Gmail, Yahoo, and Mail.Ru mail clients. Because AMP emails
expire in 30 days and some clients don’t support them, AMP emails require an HTML fallback. Access to AMP can be disabled via Content
Builder Admin.
Learn more about the AMP framework here. View our AMP for Email help topics.
New MobileConnect Data View Values

JBActivtyID and JBDefinitionID have been added to the Automation Studio _SMSmessagetracking data view.
Why: Before this release, it wasn’t possible to know which sends were related to a given activity. Now you can join _SMSmessagetracking
to other views using the new fields.
How: Add the JBDefinitionID and JBActivtyID fields to the data extension you want to query and run it against the _SMSmessagetracking
data view.
Set a Conversation Window in MobileConnect

With the January 2021 release, you can set conversation windows at the keyword level in the MobileConnect Setup app.
Why:Historically, conversation windows had a default value of 60 minutes. You had to open support cases to adjust conversation
windows at the keyword level. You can now adjust how long a double opt-in or Next Keyword-based conversation listens for a response
at the keyword level.
How: Select the Conversation Window from the keyword grid after drilling down into a code within MobileConnect Setup. Adjust by
either inputting the length in minutes or by using the day, hour, minute selectors in the window. Click Save.
Important: Conversation Windows have a minimum value of 5 minutes and a maximum value of 7 days.
Use Transactional API to Get Data About Your SMS Delivery Events
Transient, bounce, and delivery events for SMS are available via the event notification service when sending via transactional API.
77
Marketing Cloud Release Notes Marketing Cloud Social January 2021 Release Notes
Why:Historically, you were unable to access delivery receipts for SMS messages when sending via transactional API. In the current release,
developers can ingest SMS delivery information via the event notification webhook service that’s native to the transactional API. You
can get the delivery status and delivery receipt for every SMS message sent via transactional API when the Marketing Cloud receives this
information.
How: After you create a send definition and trigger a send via the SMS transactional API, subscribe to the SMSTransient, SMSBounce,
SMSDelivered, or a combination of these events.
Marketing Cloud Social January 2021 Release Notes

As a super user or admin, you can enforce that users log in to Social Studio via Single Sign-On (SSO). You can protect user Social Studio
accounts by requiring them to use multi-factor authentication (MFA) when logging into Social Studio.
Enhanced Single Sign-On Compliance in Social Studio

In Social Studio, administrators can choose to enforce the usage of Single Sign On (SSO) login for their users. With SSO, any user
attempting to log in to social studio with social studio credentials is denied access. They’re required to log in through their Single
Sign on Identity Provider first.
Protect Your Social Studio Accounts with Multi-Factor Authentication
Administrators can now enable multi-factor authentication (MFA) for Social Studio. With MFA, users can be more confident in the
security of their accounts and are required to have a password plus a secondary authentication method, such as their phone. Only
super users and admin-only users are able to enable multi-factor authentication for their tenants.
Enhanced Single Sign-On Compliance in Social Studio

In Social Studio, administrators can choose to enforce the usage of Single Sign On (SSO) login for their users. With SSO, any user attempting
to log in to social studio with social studio credentials is denied access. They’re required to log in through their Single Sign on Identity
Provider first.
Why: When configuring SSO, super users or admins don't want to interrupt their users’ workflow and ability to log in to Social Studio.
After SSO is set up and tested, businesses can enforce it as their login method. SSO increases trust and security and improves the user
experience for employees.
How: Within Social Studio Admin, only super users and admins can visit the authentication settings page. They now see a new toggle
under the Single Sign on Section. The setting allows them to enforce use of SSO for all users who have SSO configured.
SEE ALSO:
Enable SSO for a Social Studio User
Improve Security and User Experience with Single Sign On for Social Studio
Protect Your Social Studio Accounts with Multi-Factor Authentication

Administrators can now enable multi-factor authentication (MFA) for Social Studio. With MFA, users can be more confident in the security
of their accounts and are required to have a password plus a secondary authentication method, such as their phone. Only super users
and admin-only users are able to enable multi-factor authentication for their tenants.
Where: This feature applies to Social Studio and the Social Studio mobile application.
Why: Security and Trust are a top priority for Salesforce. MFA gives administrators and business users another layer of protection. They
can be confident that the user logging into the application is authorized to do so.
78
How: Administrators can enable the feature by navigating to Social Studio Admin, authentication settings, and then changing multi-factor
authentication to enabled.
Upon login, end users are prompted to set up an authentication method on their next login.
SEE ALSO:
Understand Multi-Factor Authentication in Social Studio

The October 2020 Marketing Cloud release occurs on October 17, 2020 through October 24, 2020. Some features are made available to
Get an exclusive, in-depth look at our new features by tuning into the October 2020 Marketing Cloud Release New Feature Overview.
Join this webinar on October 29, 2020 12:00 PM EDT!
Release Highlights
• Salesforce CDP Audiences
• New Pardot Email Experience
• Sandbox for Datorama
• Datorama Media Planning Center
• Einstein for Marketing Cloud Enhancements on page 88
• Advertising Studio: LinkedIn Company Matching on page 86
• October 2020 Release FAQ
Release Edits
October 1, 2020 Original publish date
October 8, 2020 Added an Advertising Studio release note for LinkedIn Company
Matching
October 12, 2020 Added Update the Private Domain of Published Pages topic
October 13, 2020 Added that alt text can be added to Facebook images in Increase
Accessibility in Facebook and LinkedIn Post Images with Alt Text
79

October 15, 2020 Added Interaction Studio topics of new features
October 19, 2020 Added release highlights and demo information, links to Pardot
release documentation
November 4, 2020 Added links to Datorama release documentation in Release

Highlights on this page
November 11, 2020 Removed Trigger a Journey When a Customer Meets Certain Criteria
in Interaction Studio release note topic
November 11, 2020 Added a topic about the retirement of Microsoft Dynamics CRM
on December 1, 2020
November 18, 2020 Revised date for SSL certificate availability for SSO customers
November 19, 2020 Edited availability dates for Self-Serve SSL Certificates for Custom
Domains.

Learn about enhancements to SSL certificates, Audit Trail, and Alert Manager.
We’re retiring the Microsoft Dynamics CRM online integration with Marketing Cloud on December 1, 2020. We’re retiring the A/B
test feature in Marketing Cloud Connect in January 2021. V2 of Marketing Cloud Connect is scheduled to retire in March 2021.
Distributed Marketing updates include image block enhancements, campaign send enhancements, and the ability to send bulk
quick send messages from a list view.
For Interaction Studio, you can create granular account roles, transfer file safely and securely with SMTP, and import data using feeds.
Also in Interaction Studio, you can use Web Templates for Web Personalization, get insight into activity and campaign visibility, and
trigger a journey when certain customer criteria is met. Synchronized Data Extensions are 250 fields. LinkedIn company matching
capabilities are available in Advertising Studio.
Marketing Cloud Developers October 2020 Release Notes
Review the following topics to learn about changes or updates that relate to Marketing Cloud APIs or developer topics.
Your journeys can send messages in a smarter way with Einstein. Easily segment journey contacts by optimal send frequency or
predicted engagement level, and let Einstein send to each contact at the best time in Single Send journeys. Get greater insight about
your Enterprise’s engagement data as it relates to send time optimization. And there’s now a safeguard to help you create profile
attributes that include everyone.
If you’re a MobilePush customer who uses beacons and geofences, check out the latest iOS 14 updates. MobilePush is retiring the
user interface for .p12 certificates. Campaigns functionality is removed from Email Studio. Standard Content Builder blocks now
output accessible HTML and the Email Form block is enhanced. Goole Chrome blocks mixed content.
You can target LinkedIn posts by region in Social Studio. And you can improve accessibility for your Facebook or LinkedIn posts by
adding image alt text.
80

Learn about enhancements to SSL certificates, Audit Trail, and Alert Manager.

URL or configured your identity provider to send encrypted assertions, update your identity provider with our new certificate. To
ensure that Marketing Cloud’s SSO functionality continues to work for your users, update your certificate by February 18, 2021.
Google Chrome Blocks Mixed Content
Because content over HTTPS is becoming a stronger browser requirement, Google Chrome is introducing a series of warnings and
begins blocking mixed content rendering starting September 2020 and mixed content downloads in January 2021.
Track Automation Studio Changes with Advanced Audit Trail
Now your Advanced Audit Trail users can view logged events for automations and activities in Automation Studio for the last 60
days. And they can identify who made those changes.
View More Details Via Alert Manager Email Job Error Summary
Now you can see the subscriber errors and number of errors in Email Studio and Automation Studio data extension and list sends.
The Email Job Error alert in Alert Manager has a new subscriber summary lists these errors. You receive a summary if over 100
subscribers in your list or data extension fail to process after the send is complete.

URL or configured your identity provider to send encrypted assertions, update your identity provider with our new certificate. To ensure
that Marketing Cloud’s SSO functionality continues to work for your users, update your certificate by February 18, 2021.
When: Starting January 12, 2021, all Marketing Cloud SSO customers can go into Marketing Cloud and acquire a new 2021 certificate
and SP-initiated URL. Your identity provider can use the old certificate to access Marketing Cloud until February 18, 2021.
Where: This change applies to all Marketing Cloud users who implemented our SAML 2.0 SSO functionality and use our SP-initiated
URL or configured their identity provider to send encrypted assertions.
How: Under Setup, in Security Settings, click Single Sign-On Settings and opt in to acquire the new 2021 certificate.

Because content over HTTPS is becoming a stronger browser requirement, Google Chrome is introducing a series of warnings and begins
blocking mixed content rendering starting September 2020 and mixed content downloads in January 2021.
Who: Customers who use private image domains (SAP) without SSL certificates will see images not load in the Marketing Cloud. Customers
who use external content from unsecured (HTTP) domains will also be impacted.
How: See our knowledge article for scenario details and workarounds.
Track Automation Studio Changes with Advanced Audit Trail

Now your Advanced Audit Trail users can view logged events for automations and activities in Automation Studio for the last 60 days.
And they can identify who made those changes.
Where: Audit Trail events can be exported to SFTP using an Audit Trail Data Extract activity in Automation Studio or SOAP API.
Who: These events are available to users who purchase Advanced Audit Trail.
81
How: The following events and messages are logged.
View More Details Via Alert Manager Email Job Error Summary
Now you can see the subscriber errors and number of errors in Email Studio and Automation Studio data extension and list sends. The
Email Job Error alert in Alert Manager has a new subscriber summary lists these errors. You receive a summary if over 100 subscribers in
your list or data extension fail to process after the send is complete.
Where: The summary applies to email addresses subscribed to Alert Manager's Email Job Error Alert.
Why: This summary provides greater visibility into the subscriber processing for your email sends.
How: From Alert Manager in Setup, select an existing user from your business unit to receive email job failures and email subscriber
error summaries.
82
Release Notes

We’re retiring the Microsoft Dynamics CRM online integration with Marketing Cloud on December 1, 2020. We’re retiring the A/B test
feature in Marketing Cloud Connect in January 2021. V2 of Marketing Cloud Connect is scheduled to retire in March 2021. Distributed
Marketing updates include image block enhancements, campaign send enhancements, and the ability to send bulk quick send messages
from a list view.
83
Release Notes
Marketing Cloud Microsoft Dynamics CRM Online Integration Is Being Retired

The Microsoft Dynamics CRM online integration with Marketing Cloud is being retired on December 1, 2020. This retirement is due
to the enforcement of the Unified Interface by MS Dynamics. The MS Dynamics Connector by Marketing Cloud isn’t compatible with
the Unified Interface.
Classic) within the Salesforce system. We have scheduled the retirement of the Marketing Cloud Connector V2 on March 31, 2021.
Marketing Cloud Connect A/B Test Feature Retires in January 2021
Marketing Cloud Connect A/B Test Email Sends relies on the features and functionality of Email Studio Classic Content. With the
Create Classic Email retirement in January 2021, A/B Test Email Sends in Sales and Service Cloud will no longer be available.
Distributed Marketing Image Block Enhancements
Users that provide a custom image via a URL can now also define a custom redirect (link) URL. The recipient is redirected to the
redirect (link) URL when they click the image.
Distributed Marketing Campaign Send Enhancements
You can send custom SMS messages when performing a bulk Campaign Send.
Distributed Marketing Bulk Quick Send to List Views
Business users can now start a bulk quick send directly from a contact, lead, or account list view. List views can contain up to 25,000
recipients, and support audience-level user personalization.
Marketing Cloud Microsoft Dynamics CRM Online Integration Is Being Retired

The Microsoft Dynamics CRM online integration with Marketing Cloud is being retired on December 1, 2020. This retirement is due to
the enforcement of the Unified Interface by MS Dynamics. The MS Dynamics Connector by Marketing Cloud isn’t compatible with the
Unified Interface.
When: Either December 1, 2020 or when the customer is required to move to the Unified Interface for their online version of Microsoft
Dynamics CRM.
How: With this retirement, customers must use Marketing Cloud Email Studio functionality to add new subscribers, send emails, and
access email tracking data. More information on the MS Dynamics transition to a Unified Interface is available here.

Classic) within the Salesforce system. We have scheduled the retirement of the Marketing Cloud Connector V2 on March 31, 2021.
Why: At Salesforce Trust is our #1 value when serving our customers. To provide security patching on potential vulnerabilities, we can
no longer support unmanaged packages where security patches cannot be pushed to customer environments.
Who: Customers who are using V2 of Marketing Cloud Connect. Determine what version is installed in your Salesforce org by navigating
to Setup > Installed Packages. Look for a package named Exact Target for App Exchange - 2007, which is the V2 of Marketing Cloud
Connect. V5 of the Marketing Cloud Connector is named Marketing Cloud.
How: We recommend customers currently using V2 pursue one of these options:
• Customers using Sales or Service Cloud Enterprise or Unlimited Edition must upgrade to the latest version of Marketing Cloud Connect
and turn on the Subscriber Key option in Marketing Cloud. Customer support enables the Subscriber Key option.
• Customers who currently have a Salesforce Professional Edition must upgrade their Salesforce Sales or Service Cloud edition to either
84
Notes
their sending.
Marketing Cloud Connect A/B Test Feature Retires in January 2021

Marketing Cloud Connect A/B Test Email Sends relies on the features and functionality of Email Studio Classic Content. With the Create
Classic Email retirement in January 2021, A/B Test Email Sends in Sales and Service Cloud will no longer be available.
Who: This change affects customers who are using the latest version of Marketing Cloud Connect (V5) with A/B Testing within Sales
and Service Cloud.
How: We recommend that you use Synchronized Data Sources to bring data into Marketing Cloud and use A/B testing in Email Studio
with Content Builder or Journey Builder Path Optimizer.
Distributed Marketing Image Block Enhancements

Users that provide a custom image via a URL can now also define a custom redirect (link) URL. The recipient is redirected to the redirect
(link) URL when they click the image.
Considerations:
• Allowed domains apply to link URLs and image URLs
• Users can’t modify link URLs for images provided via the image library
Distributed Marketing Campaign Send Enhancements

You can send custom SMS messages when performing a bulk Campaign Send.
Considerations:
• Campaigns can’t contain more than 1 custom SMS message
• Campaigns can contain multiple read-only SMS activities, any number of email activities, and any number of other activities
Distributed Marketing Bulk Quick Send to List Views

Business users can now start a bulk quick send directly from a contact, lead, or account list view. List views can contain up to 25,000
recipients, and support audience-level user personalization.
Bulk Send a Message from a List View Considerations:
• SMS, manual approvals, and CPIs aren’t supported
• The audience is considered the entire list view result. If a user selects specific individuals from the list view, the selection is ignored
• The first 100 individuals can be previewed

For Interaction Studio, you can create granular account roles, transfer file safely and securely with SMTP, and import data using feeds.
Also in Interaction Studio, you can use Web Templates for Web Personalization, get insight into activity and campaign visibility, and
trigger a journey when certain customer criteria is met. Synchronized Data Extensions are 250 fields. LinkedIn company matching
capabilities are available in Advertising Studio.
85
Notes
Advertising Studio LinkedIn Company Matching

The ad campaigns you create on LinkedIn now can combine company, job title, and location information to reach buyers within
target accounts. LinkedIn account targeting now allows the use of company matching information to create audiences in LinkedIn.
For example, account-based marketers can use company names to create audiences who work in target accounts.
Create Granular Account Roles with Advanced Permissions
You can create custom roles to grant Marketing Cloud Interaction Studio users granular, task-specific permissions to different aspects
of the application. These roles work with single sign-on through Marketing Cloud so you can combine permissions in a way that
meets the needs of your users, security team, and business.
Get Insight into Interaction Studio Activity and Campaign Visibility with the Campaign Debugger
You can use Interaction Studio Tools' Campaign Debugger for insight into page performance. The Campaign Debugger provides a
detailed snapshot of a page, including activity and item data, and enabled and disabled web campaigns. The Campaign Debugger
also provides valuable insight into why campaigns don't display as expected.
Import Data into Interaction Studio Using Feeds
Manage data feeds to help create activation campaigns that meet your customers' needs. With Interaction Studio Feeds Dashboard
and a predefined structure for data ingestion, feeds can include catalog updates, segment data import and export, and historical
data loads.
Make Web Personalization a Snap with Web Templates
Web templates make it easy to build web campaigns. Interaction Studio comes stocked with prebuilt global web templates that
your developers can customize for your site. And your developers can create custom templates that translate your marketing initiatives
into a repeatable structure so your business users can quickly deploy fully tested web campaigns.
Synchronized Data Extensions: Limit of 250 Fields
A synchronized entity is limited to synchronizing data for up to 250 fields. Any entity currently synchronizing more than 250 fields
can continue to synchronize all fields but no new fields can be added to the entity until the field count is below the 250 field limit.
Transfer Files Safely and Securely with SFTP Management
With SFTP Management, you can create and manage credentials to secure file transfer systems that work with the Feeds Dashboard.
Each credential is scoped to a single data set, providing isolated access between test and production or multiple brands.
Advertising Studio LinkedIn Company Matching

The ad campaigns you create on LinkedIn now can combine company, job title, and location information to reach buyers within target
accounts. LinkedIn account targeting now allows the use of company matching information to create audiences in LinkedIn. For example,
account-based marketers can use company names to create audiences who work in target accounts.
Where: LinkedIn account targeting is available in Advertising Audiences.
How: To use this feature, authorize your LinkedIn account in Advertising Audiences.
Create Granular Account Roles with Advanced Permissions

You can create custom roles to grant Marketing Cloud Interaction Studio users granular, task-specific permissions to different aspects
of the application. These roles work with single sign-on through Marketing Cloud so you can combine permissions in a way that meets
the needs of your users, security team, and business.
How: Log into Interaction Studio as an administrator, then click Security then Manage Role Definitions.
SEE ALSO:
External Link: Evergage Knowledge Base - Add, Edit, and Delete Users and Roles
86
Notes
Get Insight into Interaction Studio Activity and Campaign Visibility with the Campaign
Debugger
You can use Interaction Studio Tools' Campaign Debugger for insight into page performance. The Campaign Debugger provides a
detailed snapshot of a page, including activity and item data, and enabled and disabled web campaigns. The Campaign Debugger also
provides valuable insight into why campaigns don't display as expected.
How: Navigate to the page to debugtest, and open the Launcher Chrome Extension. From the menu, click Campaign Debugger.
SEE ALSO:
External Link: Evergage Knowledge Base - Campaign Debugger
Import Data into Interaction Studio Using Feeds

Manage data feeds to help create activation campaigns that meet your customers' needs. With Interaction Studio Feeds Dashboard and
a predefined structure for data ingestion, feeds can include catalog updates, segment data import and export, and historical data loads.
SEE ALSO:
External Link: Evergage Knowledge Base - ETL Overview
Make Web Personalization a Snap with Web Templates

Web templates make it easy to build web campaigns. Interaction Studio comes stocked with prebuilt global web templates that your
developers can customize for your site. And your developers can create custom templates that translate your marketing initiatives into
a repeatable structure so your business users can quickly deploy fully tested web campaigns.
SEE ALSO:
External Link: Evergage Developer Doc - Templates
Synchronized Data Extensions: Limit of 250 Fields

A synchronized entity is limited to synchronizing data for up to 250 fields. Any entity currently synchronizing more than 250 fields can
continue to synchronize all fields but no new fields can be added to the entity until the field count is below the 250 field limit.
When: The 228 Marketing Cloud Release
Who: Affects all accounts
Why: Assures performance synchronization for all entities
Transfer Files Safely and Securely with SFTP Management

With SFTP Management, you can create and manage credentials to secure file transfer systems that work with the Feeds Dashboard.
Each credential is scoped to a single data set, providing isolated access between test and production or multiple brands.
How: Log into Interaction Studio as an administrator, then click Security and Manage Role SFTP Users.
SEE ALSO:
External Link: Evergage Knowledge Base - Manage SFTP Users
87
Marketing Cloud Release Notes Marketing Cloud Developers October 2020 Release Notes
Marketing Cloud Developers October 2020 Release Notes

Review the following topics to learn about changes or updates that relate to Marketing Cloud APIs or developer topics.
New Data Points for Email Not Sent and Email Bounce Events
The Email Not Sent and Email Bounce events sent to your callback end-point have new data points that aid in the normalization
of all email events on the Event Notification Service.
New Data Points for Email Not Sent and Email Bounce Events
The Email Not Sent and Email Bounce events sent to your callback end-point have new data points that aid in the normalization of
all email events on the Event Notification Service.
Where: If you are currently subscribed to Transactional Email Sent, Not Sent and Bounce Events through a verified callback, you will
notice a new object type on the JSON payload called, `composite:{}` that includes the list ID, job batch ID, job ID, email ID, and subscriber
ID.
Why: When you want to track the end-to-end user experience for a given message, from Send to Click, you need a way to identify the
relationship between these events. These new attributes aid in the normalization of these data events.
How: You do not have to take any action in the application to get the changes. The events changes will apply to any existing subscriptions.

Your journeys can send messages in a smarter way with Einstein. Easily segment journey contacts by optimal send frequency or predicted
engagement level, and let Einstein send to each contact at the best time in Single Send journeys. Get greater insight about your Enterprise’s
engagement data as it relates to send time optimization. And there’s now a safeguard to help you create profile attributes that include
everyone.
7
Maximize Engagement with Optimal Send Frequency

Einstein Engagement Frequency for email segments customers based on their individual engagement frequency preferences and
determines the optimal number of messages to send to each customer. Send the right number of messages to every individual
contact while increasing open rates and reducing unsubscribes.
Segment Journey Contacts by Predicted Engagement
The Einstein Engagement Split activity in Journey Builder lets you automatically segment contacts in a journey based on predicted
engagement. The Einstein Engagement Split now supports MobilePush.
Predict Engagement for MobilePush Messages
When looking to target consumers, understanding engagement across channels is important. Einstein Engagement Scoring for
MobilePush predicts consumer engagement with mobile push notifications and mobile push applications to help you segment and
personalize based on how likely someone is to engage.
Use Asset Attributes Ethically
Einstein Content Selection looks at the attributes you create for a subscriber profile and evaluates them for the possibility of bias in
their use. Attributes that potentially introduce bias are flagged. Users can then use help documentation to help them spot and
rethink data attributes that potentially facilitate unethical use.
7
88
Understand Your Data Quality

Get insight into Einstein's understanding of the quality of the data in your Enterprise account and how well Send Time Optimization
can work for your business. Learn more about your send time coverage and data richness. Improving the data that Einstein uses can
enhance your send time predictions.
Get Send Time Insight in Single Send Journeys
Use Journey Builder’s Einstein STO (Send Time Optimization) activity to get the power of Einstein in single send journeys. For maximum
engagement, send your messages when they're mostly likely to be opened.
Tag Einstein Content Selection Assets Automatically
Automatically generate feature tags for assets that Einstein Content Selection uses with Einstein Content Tagging. Using AI, Einstein
Content Tagging analyzes your marketing images and generates tags to assign to each asset. Use tags that Einstein generates to
guide Einstein’s content selections. Tags can also help you understand the common features of content that is performing well or
poorly.
Maximize Engagement with Optimal Send Frequency

Einstein Engagement Frequency for email segments customers based on their individual engagement frequency preferences and
determines the optimal number of messages to send to each customer. Send the right number of messages to every individual contact
while increasing open rates and reducing unsubscribes.
Who: Marketing Cloud customers with Corporate and Enterprise editions automatically get this upgrade. This upgrade is also available
to Pro edition customers who purchased the Einstein Engagement SKU. Journey Builder is required before Pro edition customers can
activate the new version of Einstein Engagement Frequency for email. Salesforce continues to support the current version of the app
for Pro customers who don’t have Journey Builder.
Why: Send Frequency is unique to every individual contact. Now Einstein can recommend optimal frequency thresholds for every
individual contact. Einstein integrates with Journey Builder to use real-time send metrics to automatically segment contacts based on
how often they prefer to receive emails from your brand.
How: A new Einstein model recommends personalized frequency thresholds and the optimal number of emails to send to every contact
in your business unit. An Einstein Engagement Frequency split activity in Journey Builder segments contacts based on their desire to
receive emails, using real-time send metrics to decide.
Segment Journey Contacts by Predicted Engagement

The Einstein Engagement Split activity in Journey Builder lets you automatically segment contacts in a journey based on predicted
engagement. The Einstein Engagement Split now supports MobilePush.
How: In a new journey, select the Einstein Scoring Split activity, and build paths based on email or mobile predictions. Einstein Splits in
running journeys run as before and don't require any modification.
Predict Engagement for MobilePush Messages

When looking to target consumers, understanding engagement across channels is important. Einstein Engagement Scoring for MobilePush
predicts consumer engagement with mobile push notifications and mobile push applications to help you segment and personalize
based on how likely someone is to engage.
Who: This feature is available for Einstein Engagement Scoring users who install the Mobile SDK in their iOS or Android app and send
push notifications from Marketing Cloud.
How: Activate Einstein Engagement Scoring for mobile and email in the Marketing Cloud Setup app. To optimize calls-to-action and
content or offers based on how likely someone is to engage with a push notification, create re-engagement campaigns. Identify users
89
who aren’t likely to engage on mobile via other channels. Find aggregated scores on the Einstein Engagement Scoring App mobile
dashboard. Individual contact level scores are available via a new data extension.
Use Asset Attributes Ethically

Einstein Content Selection looks at the attributes you create for a subscriber profile and evaluates them for the possibility of bias in their
use. Attributes that potentially introduce bias are flagged. Users can then use help documentation to help them spot and rethink data
attributes that potentially facilitate unethical use.
Why: It’s crucial to use the power of AI in an ethical way. To give our customers the power to avoid introducing bias in their content
selection, Salesforce builds tools like Einstein Content Selection that enable our customers to market ethically.
How: Attributes with the potential to permit bias are flagged automatically. When the app flags attributes, you can evaluate all the ways
that they can be used and then make a responsible decision about whether to include, edit, or exclude them. Consult Identify Attributes
that Can Introduce Bias for hints on detecting bias.
Understand Your Data Quality

Get insight into Einstein's understanding of the quality of the data in your Enterprise account and how well Send Time Optimization can
work for your business. Learn more about your send time coverage and data richness. Improving the data that Einstein uses can enhance
your send time predictions.
Where: Find your data quality score on the Einstein STO email and mobile dashboards in the Enterprise Account.
Why: Understanding the data factors most essential to Einstein helps you understand your sending performance and calibrate future
sending.
How: Einstein analyzes your engagement data to present a data quality indicator. For details about data factors and recommendations
in your Enterprise, click Data Quality Score. Einstein doesn't analyze some types of email sends such as transactional sends, test sends,
and bounces. Einstein now gives richer detail into the emails sends used for analysis with Commercial and Transactional emails separated
by whether they're used for modeling. The number of emails used for evaluation over the last 90 days also appears.
Get Send Time Insight in Single Send Journeys

Use Journey Builder’s Einstein STO (Send Time Optimization) activity to get the power of Einstein in single send journeys. For maximum
engagement, send your messages when they're mostly likely to be opened.
Why: Send when your messages are most likely to be opened. Now you can optimize your send times to get maximum engagement
for both single send journeys and multi-step journeys.
How: Make sure you’ve activated STO in Setup. Then use the Einstein STO activity to send messages at the best time for each contact
in a single send journey. Just click Add to place the Einstein STO activity before your sending activity.
Tag Einstein Content Selection Assets Automatically

Automatically generate feature tags for assets that Einstein Content Selection uses with Einstein Content Tagging. Using AI, Einstein
Content Tagging analyzes your marketing images and generates tags to assign to each asset. Use tags that Einstein generates to guide
Einstein’s content selections. Tags can also help you understand the common features of content that is performing well or poorly.
Why:
How: Turn on Einstein Content Tagging in Setup. You can configure your tags’ minimum level of confidence for inclusion and the
maximum number of tags to include. Assets are then tagged as they’re added. Tags appear as an attribute on the asset.
90
Release Notes

If you’re a MobilePush customer who uses beacons and geofences, check out the latest iOS 14 updates. MobilePush is retiring the user
interface for .p12 certificates. Campaigns functionality is removed from Email Studio. Standard Content Builder blocks now output
accessible HTML and the Email Form block is enhanced. Goole Chrome blocks mixed content.
iOS 14 Impact on MobilePush Customers Who Use Geofences and Beacons

MobilePush customers who use geolocations and beacons must be aware of behavior implications with iOS 14. With this update,
users can grant approximate location permission instead of precise location. Users who choose to use this new approximate location
permission can’t expect the SDK to trigger geofences or beacons. MobilePush SDK doesn't have enough precision to determine
whether the user is in a geofenced area.
MobilePush Interface Updated to Support Auth Keys
As part of the migration to .p8 Auth Keys, MobilePush is removing user interface support for managing .p12 certificates. You can
continue to use the MobilePush Administration user interface to manage .p8 Auth Keys.
Campaigns Removed from Email Studio
Marketing Cloud has removed the ability to create, view, and associate campaigns from Classic Email, triggered sends, subscriber
list, and subscriber groups in Email Studio. Use the Campaigns app to create, view, and associate campaigns. This change does not
affect SOAP API integrations.
Because content over HTTPS is becoming a stronger browser requirement, Google Chrome is introducing a series of warnings and
begins blocking mixed content rendering starting September 2020 and mixed content downloads in January 2021.
Enjoy General Email Form Block Enhancements
Marketing Cloud has made accessibility improvements to the rating and select input, and enhanced the code generated by elements
on the Design tab, including the button choice inputs that allow more consistent control of the border width.
Standard Content Builder Blocks Now Output Accessible HTML
To allow screen readers and assistive software to read block HTML, Marketing Cloud Content Builder added HTML attributes to the
HTML, FreeForm, Image, Text, and Button blocks. The new attribute role=presentation designates the HTML table as a presentation
table rather than a data table.
Update the Private Domain of Published Pages
You can now change the private domain associated to previously published pages in the new CloudPages Preview.
iOS 14 Impact on MobilePush Customers Who Use Geofences and Beacons

MobilePush customers who use geolocations and beacons must be aware of behavior implications with iOS 14. With this update, users
can grant approximate location permission instead of precise location. Users who choose to use this new approximate location permission
can’t expect the SDK to trigger geofences or beacons. MobilePush SDK doesn't have enough precision to determine whether the user
is in a geofenced area.
What: With iOS 14, we haven't found any hard-breaking changes to our SDK. However, we recommend updating to the latest version.
• Identifiers for Advertisers (IDFA): No impact to MobilePush customers. Apple's changes focus on advertising attribution and the use
of IDFA. MobilePush doesn't use IDFA. These changes have no impact to our customers, and no SDK change is required to adjust to
Apple's new policies.
• Geolocation updates: Apple is introducing the ability for users to give their approximate location to apps. Current and future versions
of the MobilePush SDK don't display geolocation messages for users who give their approximate location to apps. Current and future
versions of the SDK continue to display geolocation messages to users who allow for precise location on older iOS versions and iOS
91
Release Notes
14. The precise location is the default setting in iOS 14. We're aligning with other mobile vendors, as there are otherwise irregular
user experiences for messaging use cases.
MobilePush Interface Updated to Support Auth Keys

As part of the migration to .p8 Auth Keys, MobilePush is removing user interface support for managing .p12 certificates. You can continue
to use the MobilePush Administration user interface to manage .p8 Auth Keys.
Why: MobilePush customers were migrated to Auth Keys for iOS sending. For more information on MobilePush Auth Keys, check out
this release note.
Campaigns Removed from Email Studio

Marketing Cloud has removed the ability to create, view, and associate campaigns from Classic Email, triggered sends, subscriber list,
and subscriber groups in Email Studio. Use the Campaigns app to create, view, and associate campaigns. This change does not affect
SOAP API integrations.
Where:We removed Campaigns functionality from these classic Email Studio screens.
• Content > Email >Classic Content
• Content > Microsites
• Content > Landing Pages
• Subscribers > Data Extensions
• Subscribers > Lists
• Interactions > Triggered Sends
• Interactions > User-Initiated Sends
Why: To consolidate user experiences and to further our end-of-life plans for Email Studio Classic Content experience, we are directing
users to create and manage their campaigns in the Campaigns application.
How: To create and associate campaigns with emails and other messages, see Create a Marketing Cloud Campaign and Add or Remove
Campaign Associations in Marketing Cloud.

Because content over HTTPS is becoming a stronger browser requirement, Google Chrome is introducing a series of warnings and begins
blocking mixed content rendering starting September 2020 and mixed content downloads in January 2021.
Who: Customers who use private image domains (SAP) without SSL certificates will see images not load in the Marketing Cloud. Customers
who use external content from unsecured (HTTP) domains will also be impacted.
How: See our knowledge article for scenario details and workarounds.
Enjoy General Email Form Block Enhancements

Marketing Cloud has made accessibility improvements to the rating and select input, and enhanced the code generated by elements
on the Design tab, including the button choice inputs that allow more consistent control of the border width.
Where: These enhancements apply to all newly created or updated Email Form blocks in Content Builder.
Why:These updates help maintain the best form experience across email clients.
How: Create or edit a Email Form block.
92
Marketing Cloud Release Notes Marketing Cloud Social October 2020 Release Notes
Standard Content Builder Blocks Now Output Accessible HTML

To allow screen readers and assistive software to read block HTML, Marketing Cloud Content Builder added HTML attributes to the HTML,
FreeForm, Image, Text, and Button blocks. The new attribute role=presentation designates the HTML table as a presentation table rather
than a data table.
Update the Private Domain of Published Pages

You can now change the private domain associated to previously published pages in the new CloudPages Preview.
Where:The URL field is on the page properties of a landing page.
Why: Previously, to change the domain, customers had to either contact Salesforce for rebranding or copy content from one page to
another. This update allows customers to change private domain in CloudPages.
How: Click the gear on a landing page to access the page properties, then use the URL dropdown to select the new private domain to
associate with the page.

You can target LinkedIn posts by region in Social Studio. And you can improve accessibility for your Facebook or LinkedIn posts by adding
image alt text.
Increase Accessibility in Facebook LinkedIn Post Images with Alt Text

You can improve accessibility for images in Social Studio Facebook and LinkedIn posts by adding alt text. Users who publish new
LinkedIn content can include alt text to provide increased accessibility for customers. Accessibility extends to customers who use
screen readers.
Target LinkedIn Posts with More Social Studio Region Options
You can target your LinkedIn posts more precisely with expanded regional options. LinkedIn now supports more regions for better
audience targeting. The new options are available to all Social Studio users when publishing a LinkedIn post.
Increase Accessibility in Facebook LinkedIn Post Images with Alt Text

You can improve accessibility for images in Social Studio Facebook and LinkedIn posts by adding alt text. Users who publish new LinkedIn
content can include alt text to provide increased accessibility for customers. Accessibility extends to customers who use screen readers.
How: In Social Studio Publish, create a Facebook or LinkedIn Update post. Select the Facebook or LinkedIn account, add your text, and
upload a photo. When adding a photo, you can describe the photo screen reader users.
SEE ALSO:
Add an Image to a Social Studio Post
Add Images to a Facebook Post in Social Studio
Create a Facebook Post in Social Studio
Create a LinkedIn Update in Social Studio
Target LinkedIn Posts with More Social Studio Region Options

You can target your LinkedIn posts more precisely with expanded regional options. LinkedIn now supports more regions for better
audience targeting. The new options are available to all Social Studio users when publishing a LinkedIn post.
93
Marketing Cloud Release Notes July 2020 Release
How: In Social Studio Publish, create a LinkedIn post. Select the LinkedIn account, and then to see the new targeting options, click Add
Target. Select the regions that you want to include.
SEE ALSO:
Reply to a Social Post in Social Studio
Social Account Summary Dashboard in Social Studio Analyze
July 2020 Release

The July 2020 Marketing Cloud release occurs on July 25, 2020 through August 1, 2020. Some features are made available to your instance
Get an exclusive, in-depth look at our new features by tuning into the July 2020 Marketing Cloud Release New Feature Overview. Join
this webinar on August 06, 2020 12:00 PM EDT!
Release Highlights
• Interaction Studio: Einstein Personalization Recipes
• Interaction Studio: Einstein Personalization Decisions
• Pardot: B2B Marketing Analytics Plus
• Pardot: Einstein Attribution
• Datorama: Ecommerce Optimizer App
• Journey Builder: Transactional Sending
• Journey Builder: Behavioral Triggers
• July 2020 Top Feature Demos
• July 2020 Release FAQ
Release Edits
July 9, 2020 Original publish date
July 10, 2020 Edits to July 2020 Release help topic to clarify release dates,
resources, and highlights
July 10, 2020 Removed Modify Permissions for Marketing Cloud SFTP Folders
topic
94
Marketing Cloud Release Notes Marketing Cloud App and Setup July 2020 Release Notes

July 16, 2020 Added release note for Live Image Block Retired for January 2021
July 27, 2020 Added release highlights and demo information, links to release
documentation
August 12, 2020 Added Copy Template Based Email Code with Code Snippet topic.
January 31, 2020 Changed Live Image retirement date
Marketing Cloud App and Setup July 2020 Release Notes

Secure your Marketing Cloud account with multi-factor authentication and use new permissions for Interaction Studio.
Marketing Cloud Cross-Cloud Integrations July 2020 Release Notes
Update your authentication methods and data sources as part of the July 2020 release. Deep links in Marketing Cloud Connect will
be removed later this year. A/B test feature in Marketing Cloud Connect is retiring January 2021. Distributed marketing updates
include large format mobile experience enhancements, updates to send scheduling and workflow enhancements. You can connect
Interaction Studio to Sales and Service Cloud show next best actions or offers on a Lead or Contact record.
Marketing Cloud Data Management July 2020 Release Notes
New relationships between Synchronized Entities retain original relationships, assuring a consistent data model, and synchronized
data type mismatch is detected to prevent errors.
Marketing Cloud Developers
Retrieve standard SMS status codes via REST API and link transactional send journeys to transactional messaging REST API send
definitions.
Marketing Cloud Einstein July 2020 Release Notes
Get the predictive power of Einstein Send Time Optimization (STO) for your MobilePush messages. Use Einstein in Interaction Studio
to predict and recommend the right campaign content or offers based on a customer's likes and preferences. Plus, vary the content
Einstein selects in content blocks, and explore the messaging insights model.
Marketing Cloud Journeys and Messages July 2020 Release Notes
Enjoy landing pages and microsites enhancements, pre-populate Interactive Email form text fields, and jQuery Library is removed
from CloudPages.
Marketing Cloud App and Setup July 2020 Release Notes

Secure your Marketing Cloud account with multi-factor authentication and use new permissions for Interaction Studio.
Secure Your Marketing Cloud Account with Multi-Factor Authentication

At Salesforce, we understand that the confidentiality, integrity, and availability of your data is vital to your business, and we take the
protection of your data seriously. To give our customers more control over protecting their Salesforce data from security threats,
Marketing Cloud is rolling out support for Multi-Factor Authentication (MFA) in August 2020 as part of the July Marketing Cloud
release. We strongly encourage all Marketing Cloud customers to implement MFA for their tenants as soon as possible. If you use
Single Sign-On (SSO) to handle your Marketing Cloud logins, we still recommend enabling MFA for your identity provider (IdP) as
an extra safeguard.
95
Receive Send Error Notifications with Alert Manager

Alert Manager lets Marketing Cloud administrators enter email recipients to receive critical system alerts. This first release provides
notifications for email send and triggered send errors. When sends from Email Studio, Automation Studio, or Journey Builder stop
due to a system error or subscriber limit, we email the recipient a notification and the reason for the error. Administrators are not
automatically added to receive alerts. To receive alerts, enter an administrator email address.
Discover New Permissions for Interaction Studio
The new version of Interaction Studio, formerly Evergage, is our leading AI-driven, real-time personalization and interaction
management solution. Interaction Studio enables businesses to gain a comprehensive view of each one of their customers and
prospects. You can also activate that data to deliver relevant and individualized experiences during key moments of interaction
across the customer journey. The new capabilities provide more capabilities for real-time personalization and can help tailor customer
experiences no matter how the customer chooses to interact with your brand.
Secure Your Marketing Cloud Account with Multi-Factor Authentication

At Salesforce, we understand that the confidentiality, integrity, and availability of your data is vital to your business, and we take the
protection of your data seriously. To give our customers more control over protecting their Salesforce data from security threats, Marketing
Cloud is rolling out support for Multi-Factor Authentication (MFA) in August 2020 as part of the July Marketing Cloud release. We strongly
encourage all Marketing Cloud customers to implement MFA for their tenants as soon as possible. If you use Single Sign-On (SSO) to
handle your Marketing Cloud logins, we still recommend enabling MFA for your identity provider (IdP) as an extra safeguard.
MFA for Marketing Cloud enhances your login process by adding another layer of protection against common security threats, including
phishing attacks, credential stuffing, and account takeovers. With MFA, a user must provide a separate authentication factor in addition
to their username and password before they can log in to their Marketing Cloud account. So even if a user’s credentials are compromised,
the additional factor helps prevent unauthorized access.
Your Marketing Cloud users can choose between these strong authentication factors.
• The Salesforce Authenticator mobile app
• Security keys that support U2F or WebAuthn, such as Yubico’s YubiKey or Google’s Titan Security Key
• Time-based one-time passcode (TOTP) authentication apps, like Google Authenticator, Microsoft Authenticator, or Authy
Marketing Cloud admins can also send a temporary code to any users who forget or lose their authentication factor.

We plan to end support and access to Marketing Cloud for Internet Explorer 11 on December 31, 2020.
Use one of the other supported browsers for Marketing Cloud access.
Receive Send Error Notifications with Alert Manager

Alert Manager lets Marketing Cloud administrators enter email recipients to receive critical system alerts. This first release provides
notifications for email send and triggered send errors. When sends from Email Studio, Automation Studio, or Journey Builder stop due
to a system error or subscriber limit, we email the recipient a notification and the reason for the error. Administrators are not automatically
added to receive alerts. To receive alerts, enter an administrator email address.
Where: Access Alert Manager in Marketing Cloud Setup > Settings > Company Settings.
Why: As part of our commitment to Trust, Marketing Cloud now monitors email sends for errors and automatically alerts the email
recipients that the administrator designates in Alert Manager. Previously, for send errors, we attempted to resume the send up to three
times. If the last attempt was ineffective, the send was canceled and Support contacted the account administrator.
How: On the Alert Manager Setup page, click Edit, select a user from your business unit, and click Save.
96
See Alert Manager.
Discover New Permissions for Interaction Studio

The new version of Interaction Studio, formerly Evergage, is our leading AI-driven, real-time personalization and interaction management
solution. Interaction Studio enables businesses to gain a comprehensive view of each one of their customers and prospects. You can
also activate that data to deliver relevant and individualized experiences during key moments of interaction across the customer journey.
The new capabilities provide more capabilities for real-time personalization and can help tailor customer experiences no matter how
the customer chooses to interact with your brand.
How: In Marketing Cloud permissions, you see Interaction Studio - Legacy for all existing Interaction Studio customers to control what
is available for their users. We added Interaction Studio permissions, giving administrators the ability to grant access and administrator
rights to users of the new version of Interaction Studio.
97
Marketing Cloud Release Notes Marketing Cloud Cross-Cloud Integrations July 2020 Release
Notes
Marketing Cloud Cross-Cloud Integrations July 2020 Release Notes

Update your authentication methods and data sources as part of the July 2020 release. Deep links in Marketing Cloud Connect will be
removed later this year. A/B test feature in Marketing Cloud Connect is retiring January 2021. Distributed marketing updates include
large format mobile experience enhancements, updates to send scheduling and workflow enhancements. You can connect Interaction
Studio to Sales and Service Cloud show next best actions or offers on a Lead or Contact record.
Marketing Cloud Connect A/B Test Feature Retires January 2021

Marketing Cloud Connect A/B Test Email Sends relies on the features and functionality of Email Studio Classic Content. With the
Create Classic Email retirement in January 2021, A/B Test Email Sends in Sales and Service Cloud will no longer be available.
Stay Informed with Marketing Cloud Connect Banner Notifications
The Marketing Cloud Connect pages visible in CRM will display banner messages to notify users and administrators of upcoming
changes. These banner messages provide details that are specific to an Enterprise or Business Unit integrated to CRM. Messages are
displayed at the top of the page and visible on these pages: Email Send, Triggered Send, Triggered Send List, A/B Test Send page,
A/B Test Send List, and Send Analytics.
Deep Links Removed from Marketing Cloud Connect Pages in Sales and Service Cloud in October
To improve security, we are removing the “Go To Marketing Cloud” links on various pages of the Marketing Cloud Connect app in
the October release.
Individual Link Details Changing to SOAP API Usage
We shifted email tracking information for individual link-level details to the SOAP API. This action prevents customers from hitting
daily bulk API limits due to tracking information sent by Marketing Cloud Connect.
Action Required: Maintain Security and Connectivity with the Connected App by September 30, 2020
legacy authentication to Connected App authentication. If you are not authenticated with the Connected App, you will no longer
be able to connect to Sales and Service Cloud after September 30, 2020.
Connect Interaction Studio with Sales and Service Cloud
With Interaction Studio, you can combine in-depth behavioral analytics and advanced machine learning with data from existing
sources to gain insight about customers. You can activate that data to deliver relevant, individualized experiences during key moments
of the customer journey. You can also show product and promotional recommendations. You can even show next best actions or
offers on a Lead or Contact record.
Distributed Marketing Send Scheduling Enhancements
Updates to send scheduling include quick send scheduling with manual approvals, and segmented and bulk campaign scheduling
if manual approval is not enabled.
Distributed Marketing Workflow Enhancements
This release provides you with three key enhancements to the Distributed Marketing Workflow functionality. First, you can now
preview content for the first 100 recipients when performing a bulk quick send (previously 10), sorted in ascending order by created
date. Second, data used when enhancing Distributed Marketing through either extending the entry source data or creating a custom
personalization interaction (CPI) is now included when previewing content. For example, if you create a CPI to change the visual
theme of an email, the changes show in preview in Distributed Marketing. Third, quick send workflows now only show users message
types that they can access.
Get Distributed Marketing on the Go
Most Distributed Marketing workflows are now available in large-format mobile experiences, like tablets. Experiences now fully
support small regions in desktop experiences such as console views and are available in Salesforce mobile. Small-format mobile, like
mobile phones isn’t supported.
98
Notes

Marketing Cloud Connect A/B Test Email Sends relies on the features and functionality of Email Studio Classic Content. With the Create
Classic Email retirement in January 2021, A/B Test Email Sends in Sales and Service Cloud will no longer be available.
with Content Builder.
Stay Informed with Marketing Cloud Connect Banner Notifications

The Marketing Cloud Connect pages visible in CRM will display banner messages to notify users and administrators of upcoming changes.
These banner messages provide details that are specific to an Enterprise or Business Unit integrated to CRM. Messages are displayed at
the top of the page and visible on these pages: Email Send, Triggered Send, Triggered Send List, A/B Test Send page, A/B Test Send List,
and Send Analytics.
in October
To improve security, we are removing the “Go To Marketing Cloud” links on various pages of the Marketing Cloud Connect app in the
October release.
How: To access the Marketing Cloud Connect features, log into Marketing Cloud, and navigate to a specific page. You can still access
the links, but they redirect you to the main Marketing Cloud login page.
Individual Link Details Changing to SOAP API Usage

We shifted email tracking information for individual link-level details to the SOAP API. This action prevents customers from hitting daily
bulk API limits due to tracking information sent by Marketing Cloud Connect.
Action Required: Maintain Security and Connectivity with the Connected App by
September 30, 2020
authentication to Connected App authentication. If you are not authenticated with the Connected App, you will no longer be able to
connect to Sales and Service Cloud after September 30, 2020.
Tracking User Name and Tracking User Password fields under Configuration Settings, you are using legacy authentication.
99
Notes
If you are authenticated with the Connected App, you see a section called Connection at the bottom of the Configuration Settings screen.
100
Notes
This process can require up to a 2-hour outage. Check out how to Upgrade to the Connected App.
Connect Interaction Studio with Sales and Service Cloud

With Interaction Studio, you can combine in-depth behavioral analytics and advanced machine learning with data from existing sources
to gain insight about customers. You can activate that data to deliver relevant, individualized experiences during key moments of the
customer journey. You can also show product and promotional recommendations. You can even show next best actions or offers on a
Lead or Contact record.
Where: Customers with Interaction Studio Premium editions can use the connector. Contact your sales team for details.
Why: Sales and Service Cloud users benefit from seeing the real-time, Einstein-powered recommendations or next best actions or offers.
The recommendations can help Sales and Service Cloud representatives have relevant conversations “in the moment” with customers.
Interaction Studio bases the recommendations on all recent and historical data Interaction Studio captures and processes about each
customer.
How: Install the managed package in your CRM org, and configure a trusted connection. Select the Einstein Personalization Recipe or
Einstein Personalization Decision that the connector uses. Finally, configure the Lead or Contact Layout to show the results.
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce CRM Connector for Interaction Studio (Legacy)
101
Marketing Cloud Release Notes Marketing Cloud Data Management July 2020 Release Notes
Distributed Marketing Send Scheduling Enhancements

Updates to send scheduling include quick send scheduling with manual approvals, and segmented and bulk campaign scheduling if
manual approval is not enabled.
With this release, all sends can be scheduled, but not in every scenario. If manual approvals are not being used, business users can now
schedule segmented and bulk campaign sends for a future time and date Users can also schedule quick sends with manual approval
enabled. If the quick send message is not approved before the scheduled time and date, the send is canceled. Review the comparison
charts in Quick Send Messages or Campaign Messages Setup sections of the Distributed Marketing Salesforce Help before enabling send
scheduling.
Distributed Marketing Workflow Enhancements

This release provides you with three key enhancements to the Distributed Marketing Workflow functionality. First, you can now preview
content for the first 100 recipients when performing a bulk quick send (previously 10), sorted in ascending order by created date. Second,
data used when enhancing Distributed Marketing through either extending the entry source data or creating a custom personalization
interaction (CPI) is now included when previewing content. For example, if you create a CPI to change the visual theme of an email, the
changes show in preview in Distributed Marketing. Third, quick send workflows now only show users message types that they can access.
Bulk quick send preview is updated to show 100 recipients instead of 10. When previewing content, data used in Distributed Marketing
from either entry source data or CIP is included in the preview.
Get Distributed Marketing on the Go

Most Distributed Marketing workflows are now available in large-format mobile experiences, like tablets. Experiences now fully support
small regions in desktop experiences such as console views and are available in Salesforce mobile. Small-format mobile, like mobile
phones isn’t supported.
Marketing Cloud Data Management July 2020 Release Notes

New relationships between Synchronized Entities retain original relationships, assuring a consistent data model, and synchronized data
type mismatch is detected to prevent errors.
Detect Synchronized Entity Data Type Mismatch

Now when modifying a field datatype of a synchronized data extension the synchronized entity detects a change of datatype has
occurred, stops the field from syncing, and allows syncing of the entity to continue for all valid fields. Detection of the mismatched
datatype is recorded in the Synchronized Entity Activity Log.
Maintain Known Relationships Between Synchronized Entities
Keep your data models consistent. Now new relationships between Synchronized Entities retain original relationships, assuring a
consistent data model.
Schedule Your Google Analytics Audience Refresh
Set an hourly, daily, weekly, or monthly cadence to refresh your Google Analytics audiences for Marketing Cloud use.
Daily Automation Performance Enhancement for Audience Builder
Audience Builder now detects the standard data loaders that you’re not using and excludes them from the daily automation to
increase performance for all customers. Audience Builder will notify you when you’re using an out-dated or inactive dimension.
Saving or publishing an audience will turn the data loader back on. The only difference from the previous behavior is that new
dimension data won’t be calculated immediately. You will receive data for the new dimension the next day (after the daily automation
runs again).
102
Marketing Cloud Release Notes Marketing Cloud Developers
Detect Synchronized Entity Data Type Mismatch

Now when modifying a field datatype of a synchronized data extension the synchronized entity detects a change of datatype has
occurred, stops the field from syncing, and allows syncing of the entity to continue for all valid fields. Detection of the mismatched
datatype is recorded in the Synchronized Entity Activity Log.
Previously, the synchronized entity failed to sync without first removing the field from the synchronized data extension before modifying
the source field, as emphasized in the Implement Synchronized Data Sources Best Practices document.
Maintain Known Relationships Between Synchronized Entities

Keep your data models consistent. Now new relationships between Synchronized Entities retain original relationships, assuring a consistent
data model.
Schedule Your Google Analytics Audience Refresh

Set an hourly, daily, weekly, or monthly cadence to refresh your Google Analytics audiences for Marketing Cloud use.
Why: Control how often your audiences refresh and on what cadence using the Refresh Schedule column.
How: To set a schedule for synchronizing Google Analytics 360 audiences, go to Data Sources in Contact Builder. Click Edit in the Refresh
Schedule column. When you select the hourly option, the refresh happens automatically each hour. When you set a daily, choose the
hour that the sync happens. When you set a weekly schedule, choose the day and hour that the sync happens. When you set a monthly
schedule, choose the day of the month that the sync happens.
Daily Automation Performance Enhancement for Audience Builder

Audience Builder now detects the standard data loaders that you’re not using and excludes them from the daily automation to increase
performance for all customers. Audience Builder will notify you when you’re using an out-dated or inactive dimension. Saving or publishing
an audience will turn the data loader back on. The only difference from the previous behavior is that new dimension data won’t be
calculated immediately. You will receive data for the new dimension the next day (after the daily automation runs again).
Who: This enhancement applies to all Audience Builder users.
Why: To reduce the daily automation times for all users, so everyone can get their data sooner.
How: To re-activate a dimension, include it in an Audience Filter Segment or Exclusion and save the audience. Your updated data
will be available the next day.
Marketing Cloud Developers

Retrieve standard SMS status codes via REST API and link transactional send journeys to transactional messaging REST API send definitions.
Find Content Assets Easier with New API Search Parameter

Improved search in the Content Builder Asset API now lets you specify an exact or partial phrase to match against Name, Customer
Key, Content, and Subject Line fields in an asset. You can also use the new mustcontain parameter to ensure that search results
contain all words included in the search terms.
Link Journeys to Transactional Messaging REST API Send Definitions
You can now create and manage transactional send definitions via API as Transactional Send Journeys. Transactional Send Journeys
are the Marketing Cloud Journey Builder experience for the transactional messaging REST API.
103
Marketing Cloud Release Notes Marketing Cloud Developers
Retrieve Standard SMS Status Codes Via REST API

You can now retrieve standard SMS status codes and descriptions via the GET
/sms/v1/messageContact/{messageId}/deliveries/{tokenId} REST API route. These codes and descriptions are available per send in
the response body. Previously this route returned a raw status code and description that was unique to the aggregator. As a result,
customers had to build logic to interpret the status codes that Marketing Cloud ingested. Now, standard status codes are available
for all SMS deployments via the Get Message Contact Status REST API route and are universal regardless of where messages are sent.
Removing Support for Unsecured HTTP Callbacks for SOAP Async API
New customers can no longer send callbacks from the SOAP Async API to unsecured HTTP endpoints. If you attempt to send Async
API requests containing unsecured endpoints, you receive a server fault with error code 227. To avoid this error, change the callback
endpoint to HTTPS. This change doesn’t affect existing Marketing Cloud Async API customers.
Find Content Assets Easier with New API Search Parameter

Improved search in the Content Builder Asset API now lets you specify an exact or partial phrase to match against Name, Customer Key,
Content, and Subject Line fields in an asset. You can also use the new mustcontain parameter to ensure that search results contain
all words included in the search terms.
Where: This feature applies to API users who use the /asset/v1/content/assets/query route to search for assets in Content
Builder.
Why: Customers indicated it is difficult to find assets that they created in Content Builder without its folder location. This change makes
it easier for an API user to target searches based on a few key fields in the asset.
We also removed from our search system unnecessary mapping for these fields:
• all
• portfolioLegacyId
• portfolioLegacyCategoryId
• portfolioLegacyType
You can still search these fields, so there is no expected impact to API users who use them.
See GET /asset/v1/content/assets.
Link Journeys to Transactional Messaging REST API Send Definitions

You can now create and manage transactional send definitions via API as Transactional Send Journeys. Transactional Send Journeys are
the Marketing Cloud Journey Builder experience for the transactional messaging REST API.
How: If you currently use the transactional messaging API, your existing transactional send definitions won’t change and won’t display
in Journey Builder automatically.
If you want to display an existing definition in Journey Builder, upgrade the journey by using the new options.createJourney JSON
parameter using PATCH /messaging/v1/email/definitions/{definitionKey}. You can’t unlink a journey from a definition without recreating
the transactional send definition.
To create a journey when you create a transactional send definition, use the options.createJourney JSON parameter.
To identify the journey that is associated with a transactional send definition, use the new journey.interactionKey JSON parameter.
To filter by transactional send journeys, use the new definitionType URL parameter with the GET /interaction/v1/interactions/ route. You
can’t use the interactions API to create and manage Transactional Send Journeys.
104
Marketing Cloud Release Notes Marketing Cloud Einstein July 2020 Release Notes
Retrieve Standard SMS Status Codes Via REST API

You can now retrieve standard SMS status codes and descriptions via the GET /sms/v1/messageContact/{messageId}/deliveries/{tokenId}
REST API route. These codes and descriptions are available per send in the response body. Previously this route returned a raw status
code and description that was unique to the aggregator. As a result, customers had to build logic to interpret the status codes that
Marketing Cloud ingested. Now, standard status codes are available for all SMS deployments via the Get Message Contact Status REST
API route and are universal regardless of where messages are sent.
This API returns status codes in the order received from carriers, so Marketing Cloud can receive codes after the delivered or undelivered
status has been returned. Infer the final message status from the status code with the highest numerical value.
Removing Support for Unsecured HTTP Callbacks for SOAP Async API
New customers can no longer send callbacks from the SOAP Async API to unsecured HTTP endpoints. If you attempt to send Async API
requests containing unsecured endpoints, you receive a server fault with error code 227. To avoid this error, change the callback endpoint
to HTTPS. This change doesn’t affect existing Marketing Cloud Async API customers.
Marketing Cloud Einstein July 2020 Release Notes

Get the predictive power of Einstein Send Time Optimization (STO) for your MobilePush messages. Use Einstein in Interaction Studio to
predict and recommend the right campaign content or offers based on a customer's likes and preferences. Plus, vary the content Einstein
selects in content blocks, and explore the messaging insights model.
8
Increase Push Message Engagement with Einstein Send Time Optimization

Send push notifications at the best time for each Marketing Cloud contact and app in your business based on your users’ past
engagement patterns with MobilePush. Determine the likelihood a push notification will be opened when it’s sent on a particular
day or time using the Einstein Send Time Optimization (STO) dashboard.
Get Send Time Insight in Your Journeys
Journey Builder’s Einstein STO (Send Time Optimization) activity now provides detail about contacts’ progression through the journey.
See the counts of Marketing Cloud contacts who progressed through the activity by hour, contacts who are currently waiting, and
contacts expected to exit the activity.
Explore the Einstein Messaging Insights Model
The Einstein Messaging Insights model card provides insight into how our artificial intelligence (AI) model analyzes messages.
Vary the Content That Einstein Selects
When your emails use more than one Einstein Content Selection block, set up the app so that it varies the content it selects. Select
a corresponding asset attribute to tell Einstein which aspect of the content varies.
Use Einstein in Interaction Studio
We included artificial intelligence (AI) and machine learning is now baked into the new version of Interaction Studio. As a result,
Interaction Studio is now a real-time personalization platform where you can tailor experiences down to the 1-to-1 level across
channels. Interaction Studio also uses real-time decision-making capabilities to determine the most relevant recommendations or
the next best action or offer. To generate recommendations, use Einstein Personalization Recipes to comb through large catalogs
of all types. For next best actions or offers, use Einstein Personalization Decisions.
8
105
Marketing Cloud Release Notes Marketing Cloud Einstein July 2020 Release Notes
Increase Push Message Engagement with Einstein Send Time Optimization

Send push notifications at the best time for each Marketing Cloud contact and app in your business based on your users’ past engagement
patterns with MobilePush. Determine the likelihood a push notification will be opened when it’s sent on a particular day or time using
the Einstein Send Time Optimization (STO) dashboard.
Where: Find the Einstein STO activity in Journey Builder.
Why: Marketers can now create journeys that send push notifications at the time that’s customized for each of their users on each of
their apps.
How: Add an Einstein STO activity before a Push Notification activity in Journey Builder. You can activate either Einstein STO for Email
or Einstein STO for MobilePush, or both of them, in the Einstein section of Setup.
Get Send Time Insight in Your Journeys

Journey Builder’s Einstein STO (Send Time Optimization) activity now provides detail about contacts’ progression through the journey.
See the counts of Marketing Cloud contacts who progressed through the activity by hour, contacts who are currently waiting, and
contacts expected to exit the activity.
Why: Understanding the status of contacts in your journeys has been difficult. Now, the Einstein STO activity shows you what is happening
to contacts in detail, in close to real time. Get total counts for up to the last 30 days. And you can see the totals for contacts in the activity
that do and don’t have personalized send time models.
How: Click the activity in an active journey to see analytics about your contacts. No configuration is necessary.
Explore the Einstein Messaging Insights Model

The Einstein Messaging Insights model card provides insight into how our artificial intelligence (AI) model analyzes messages.
Why: The Einstein Messaging Insights model card provides insight into factors the model uses. Factors include the types of inputs the
model uses, its best applications, and ethical considerations in its use.
Vary the Content That Einstein Selects

When your emails use more than one Einstein Content Selection block, set up the app so that it varies the content it selects. Select a
corresponding asset attribute to tell Einstein which aspect of the content varies.
Why: Marketers want their emails to include content that hits different notes. Marketers don’t want their subscribers to see email content
that’s about the same product category or features the same activity repeatedly.
How: Edit the Configure Content Selection Rules in Einstein Content Selection’s settings. On the Variety tab, select the additional asset
attribute that you want the content to vary across. To turn off the feature, deselect the additional asset attribute.
Use Einstein in Interaction Studio

We included artificial intelligence (AI) and machine learning is now baked into the new version of Interaction Studio. As a result, Interaction
Studio is now a real-time personalization platform where you can tailor experiences down to the 1-to-1 level across channels. Interaction
Studio also uses real-time decision-making capabilities to determine the most relevant recommendations or the next best action or
offer. To generate recommendations, use Einstein Personalization Recipes to comb through large catalogs of all types. For next best
actions or offers, use Einstein Personalization Decisions.
Why: Many companies are on a mission to reinvent how they interact with customers. In the past, companies worked to deliver a
universal experience for everyone or a few different experiences for certain groups. Now, companies want to provide each customer
with a digital experience that is unique and maximally relevant. Given the amount of data and complexity required to execute a unique
106
Marketing Cloud Release Notes Marketing Cloud Journeys and Messages July 2020 Release
Notes
experience at scale, AI is essential. Relevant 1-to-1 recommendations and next best actions and offers are key to delivering effective
personalized experiences.
How: To explore recommendations and next best action or offer options in Interaction Studio, navigate to Einstein Personalization
Recommendations or Einstein Personalization Decisions.
Marketing Cloud Journeys and Messages July 2020 Release Notes

Enjoy landing pages and microsites enhancements, pre-populate Interactive Email form text fields, and jQuery Library is removed from
CloudPages.
Granular User Permissions in Journey Builder

Now you can assign separate permissions to allow users to activate and delete journeys in Journey Builder. These permissions are
available to all Journey Builder customers. Marketing Cloud administrators can view and edit these permissions in the Setup app.
Create, Send, and Monitor Transactional Send Email Journeys from Journey Builder
Use Transactional Send journeys to create, manage, and monitor transactional email sends in Journey Builder. Configure the
Transactional Sending API, and view near-real-time operational metrics all from Journey Builder’s streamlined user experience. This
feature is generally available to all Journey Builder customers.
Create, Send, and Monitor Single Send SMS Journeys from Journey Builder
Use Single Send journeys to send single SMS messages, such as promotions or service updates, to a batch audience through a
streamlined user experience in Journey Builder. Schedule a journey for a future date and time or send it immediately. This feature is
available to all customers with Journey Builder and MobileConnect enabled in their Marketing Cloud account.
Find and Remove a Journey Contact in Journey Builder
Now you can locate an individual contact in a running or stopped journey and view the path they took within the last 30 days. You
can also remove the contact from any point in the journey. This feature is available to all Journey Builder customers.
Re-Engage Online Shoppers with Behavioral Triggers
Re-engage shoppers who abandoned an online shopping session with Abandoned Browse, Abandoned Browse, and Abandoned
Wishlist triggers. Send highly personalized, effective emails to encourage subscribers to come back to your site.
Action Required: Upload MobilePush Auth Key for iOS Sends by September
To improve security and reliability, Apple requires all mobile vendors to migrate their processes to support their new updated push
notification service later this year. As part of this migration, Marketing Cloud MobilePush will remove support for current .p12 APNs
certificates and require all iOS customers to use .p8 Auth Keys to send push notifications. In preparation, MobilePush customers can
upload a .p8 Auth Key for each of their apps in MobilePush Administration or in Setup. You can update your Auth Key after the June
Marketing Cloud release.
MobilePush SDK July 2020 Release Notes
The latest version of the Marketing Cloud MobilePush SDK includes minor fixes for inbox messaging.
SMS Inbound Loop Prevention
Marketing Cloud now detects and prevents loops from occurring for SMS customers. Previously, it was possible to deploy an SMS
message to a handset with auto-response enabled or to another A2P number that would auto-respond. This action created an
infinite loop of SMS messages between the Marketing Cloud and an external source.
Enjoy Landing Pages and Microsites Enhancements
The new CloudPages Experience is a customer preview of the upcoming new CloudPages app. For the July release, you can now
update your SSL selection after a page has been published, create Page States using the Content Builder editor, and view the page
URL in the editor. The preview is available for all CloudPages customers alongside the current CloudPages app in Marketing Cloud.
107
Notes
Pre-populate Values in Interactive Email Form Block Text Inputs

Pre-populate known data in the text input of an Interactive Email form so subscribers can review and update existing information.
Removed jQuery Library from CloudPages
In the October 2020 release, we are updating jQuery libraries used for Smart Capture forms in CloudPages. Functions that are not
supported in newer jQuery versions no longer function as expected with the October release. To help customers prepare for this
change and test their code, the new version of the library remains available within the July 2020 release.
Live Image Block Retired in April 2021 Release
Content Builder Live Image is being retired in the April 2021 release. Customers can no longer access the block in Content Builder,
but can use Einstein Content Selection or the Content Block SDK.
Copy Template Based Email Code with Code Snippet
Code in the Code View editor of a template based Content Builder email is locked, and you can’t copy the code.
Granular User Permissions in Journey Builder

Now you can assign separate permissions to allow users to activate and delete journeys in Journey Builder. These permissions are available
to all Journey Builder customers. Marketing Cloud administrators can view and edit these permissions in the Setup app.
Why: The flexibility to break down roles into more distinct capabilities is a highly requested feature in Journey Builder. For instance,
some marketers want to allow a user to activate a journey but not allow them to change the journey configuration. This change allows
marketers to align with the separation of duties to meet their department’s needs.
How: When you configure permissions for roles or users, under Journey Builder > Automation, you can explicitly allow or deny three
permissions. As with other permissions in Marketing Cloud, if the user is not explicitly allowed or denied access, the features are unavailable
to that user.
• Create/Edit: Enables the user to create and edit a journey, configure activities, set goals, and exit criteria, and so on. Access for this
permission remains the same, except for the two new permissions.
• Activate/Stop/Pause/Resume/Send/Schedule: This new permission enables the user to change the state of the journey. Users with
permission see a button with the available status change.
• Delete: This new permission enables users to delete a journey or journey version. Users with permission see links to delete a journey
or journey version in the Journey Settings menu of the Journey Canvas and in the header of the Version Dashboard.
Users with read-only access to Journey Builder are not granted access to these new permissions.
Note: The two new permissions are set to Allowed by default for any user who currently has Create/Edit permission via their user
or role definition. For users with this role who you don't want to have access to specific permissions, update the permission to
Deny.
For more details, see Journey Builder Roles and Permissions for Journey Builder.
Create, Send, and Monitor Transactional Send Email Journeys from Journey Builder
Use Transactional Send journeys to create, manage, and monitor transactional email sends in Journey Builder. Configure the Transactional
Sending API, and view near-real-time operational metrics all from Journey Builder’s streamlined user experience. This feature is generally
available to all Journey Builder customers.
Now you can configure the Transactional API, released in early 2019, through Journey Builder’s user interface. Transactional Send journeys
offer many of the same out-of-the-box features as Multi-Step and Simple Send journeys, including operational and engagement analytics,
activity hub-and-spoke configuration, and complete campaign overview via the dashboard.
To create a Transactional Send journey:
1. In the Journeys Dashboard, click Create New Journey.
108
Notes
2. Navigate to Transactional Send Journey, and click Email.

3. Configure the API entry event.
4. Configure the email activity.
5. Activate the journey.
To view Transactional Send journey metrics:
1. Navigate to the Journeys Dashboard.
2. Click Transactional.
For more details, see Transactional Send Journeys.
Create, Send, and Monitor Single Send SMS Journeys from Journey Builder
Use Single Send journeys to send single SMS messages, such as promotions or service updates, to a batch audience through a streamlined
user experience in Journey Builder. Schedule a journey for a future date and time or send it immediately. This feature is available to all
customers with Journey Builder and MobileConnect enabled in their Marketing Cloud account.
Learn Journey Builder through a streamlined experience for simpler sends to increase sophistication through Multi-Step journeys. Manage
Single Send and Multi-Step journeys from a unified workspace to increase visibility across campaigns and streamline navigation. Simplify
new team member onboarding with a unified user experience for three types of sends across multiple channels. For updated API
information related to Single Sends, review the developer documentation at Single Send Journeys.
Note: Journey Builder throughput guidelines apply to Single Send and Multi-Step journeys.
To create a new Single Send SMS journey, click Create New Journey, and then select SMS.
For more information, see Create a Single Send Journey.
Find and Remove a Journey Contact in Journey Builder

Now you can locate an individual contact in a running or stopped journey and view the path they took within the last 30 days. You can
also remove the contact from any point in the journey. This feature is available to all Journey Builder customers.
Why: This feature enables self-service troubleshooting to locate where a contact is in a journey, determine if a contact exited a journey
early or finished a journey, and remove a contact from a journey.
How: To find a contact, open a running or stopped journey, and click to open the Journey Health panel. To show a contact
path, enter the contact key in the search box. If the contact entered the journey multiple times within the last 30 days, select the instance
to view. The contact’s path is highlighted on the journey canvas. To remove the contact, click Remove from journey.
For more details, see View a Contact Path.
Re-Engage Online Shoppers with Behavioral Triggers

Re-engage shoppers who abandoned an online shopping session with Abandoned Browse, Abandoned Browse, and Abandoned Wishlist
triggers. Send highly personalized, effective emails to encourage subscribers to come back to your site.
Where: To configure the flow of behavioral trigger data, use Journey Builder’s navigation. Manage behavioral content, such as the
abandoned items, in Content Builder.
109
Notes
Why: An estimated $4.6 trillion of merchandise is left unpurchased in shopping carts online. Highly personalized behavioral campaigns
are often effective in recovering purchases. Behavioral triggers let marketers deploy these campaigns without purchasing Protected
Services from Salesforce.
How: Navigate to Behavioral Triggers in Journey Builder’s menu to configure your behavioral trigger data extensions. If you haven’t
already done so (for use with Einstein Recommendations), configure a product catalog and install Collect Tracking Code on your commerce
site. Create your abandoned cart messages in Content Builder. Use the Behavioral Triggers content block to dynamically add a subscriber’s
abandoned items to the body of the email. Use the Behavioral Trigger data extensions in Journey Builder as a Data Extension entry source.
To see basic metrics for each trigger, return to Behavioral Triggers.
Action Required: Upload MobilePush Auth Key for iOS Sends by September
To improve security and reliability, Apple requires all mobile vendors to migrate their processes to support their new updated push
notification service later this year. As part of this migration, Marketing Cloud MobilePush will remove support for current .p12 APNs
certificates and require all iOS customers to use .p8 Auth Keys to send push notifications. In preparation, MobilePush customers can
upload a .p8 Auth Key for each of their apps in MobilePush Administration or in Setup. You can update your Auth Key after the June
When:
• The original date identified for all MobilePush customers to update the application to use the new .p8 Auth Keys was July 2020. To
allow you more time to make this transition, this deadline is extended to September 14, 2020.
• Regardless of whether you uploaded your .p8 Auth Keys, we recommend that all customers keep their legacy .p12 certificates up to
date until the enforcement date.
• Marketing Cloud uses your legacy .p12 Certificate even if you upload your .p8 Auth Key before September 14. In August 2020,
Salesforce account representatives will be informed of accounts that are scheduled for early migration. Early migrations to Auth Keys
can occur between September 1 and September 13 for customers who uploaded Auth Keys.
Who: This action applies to MobilePush customers who send messages to iOS devices. No code changes are required to your app or to
the MobilePush SDK. No action is required for Android.
How: In Setup or in MobilePush Administration, navigate to your application, and upload your app’s .p8 Auth Key. Check out this article
for more details.
MobilePush SDK July 2020 Release Notes

The latest version of the Marketing Cloud MobilePush SDK includes minor fixes for inbox messaging.
After the release, get the latest version for iOS and Android.
When: We plan to release this functionality on July 6, 2020. This date is subject to change.
• We fixed minor inbox messaging issues for the iOS SDK.
SMS Inbound Loop Prevention

Marketing Cloud now detects and prevents loops from occurring for SMS customers. Previously, it was possible to deploy an SMS message
to a handset with auto-response enabled or to another A2P number that would auto-respond. This action created an infinite loop of
SMS messages between the Marketing Cloud and an external source.
How: Loop prevention prevents outbound message deployment to a mobile number when more than 35 messages are received from
a single number within a 5-minute period. The frequency and duration are configurable upon request via support.
When: This feature will be automatically provisioned to all customers starting approximately August 12, 2020, and to all customers by
August 26, 2020. All release dates are subject to change.
110
Notes
Enjoy Landing Pages and Microsites Enhancements

The new CloudPages Experience is a customer preview of the upcoming new CloudPages app. For the July release, you can now update
your SSL selection after a page has been published, create Page States using the Content Builder editor, and view the page URL in the
editor. The preview is available for all CloudPages customers alongside the current CloudPages app in Marketing Cloud.
Where: The preview is available for all CloudPages customers alongside the current CloudPages app in Marketing Cloud. Select New
CloudPages Experience PREVIEW from the Web Studio app switcher dropdown.
Why: We want CloudPages customers to try the new CloudPages experience and features, and to provide us feedback before it replaces
the current CloudPages in January 2021. Marketing Cloud normally offers limited pilot and beta programs, but due to unusual customer
work conditions from COVID-19, this preview lets us gain great feedback with the least customer risk.
The current CloudPages app is still available to customers, so users who experience issues with the preview can switch to the current
version and continue their work. Both CloudPages versions access and manage the same content, so changes made in one version are
made in the other.
Pre-populate Values in Interactive Email Form Block Text Inputs

Pre-populate known data in the text input of an Interactive Email form so subscribers can review and update existing information.
Why: Interactive Email forms allow marketers to reduce friction around gathering more customer information. Marketers with existing
subscriber data can now allow the subscribers to confirm this data rather than typing the same information again.
How: In Content Builder, drag the Email Form block to your email template or open an existing block, then edit a text input. In the new
Value field, enter the value that you want pre-populated. Values can be hard-coded, a personalization string, or AMPscript.
111
Notes

In the October 2020 release, we are updating jQuery libraries used for Smart Capture forms in CloudPages. Functions that are not
supported in newer jQuery versions no longer function as expected with the October release. To help customers prepare for this change
and test their code, the new version of the library remains available within the July 2020 release.
Why: This change lets customers test and prepare before the October 2020 release. We recommend for customers who use jQuery in
the HTML code of their pages to always explicitly call the library version they intend to use. This action ensures that functionality is not
dependent on versions used for internal Marketing Cloud features.
Where: This change affects CloudPages-created microsites and landing pages that use Smart Capture and reference jQuery functions
that don’t explicitly call the intended jQuery version. To replicate the October release functionality, add a query parameter to a page
request to use jQuery 3.5.1.
Sample URLs with parameters:
http://mail.ntoretail.com?use_jquery_3.5.1
http://mail.ntoretail.com?campaign_code=onboarding&use_jquery_3.5.1
See our knowledge article.
112
Marketing Cloud Release Notes May 2020 Release
Live Image Block Retired in April 2021 Release

Content Builder Live Image is being retired in the April 2021 release. Customers can no longer access the block in Content Builder, but
can use Einstein Content Selection or the Content Block SDK.
Copy Template Based Email Code with Code Snippet

Code in the Code View editor of a template based Content Builder email is locked, and you can’t copy the code.
How: To alternatively copy code, select the code, right-click, then select Create Code
Snippet.
You can also select Save as Template from the Save button menu which allows you to copy the code or edit the code directly in the
Code View editor.
May 2020 Release

The May 2020 Marketing Cloud occurs on May 30, 2020. Some features are made available to your instance within a week of the release.
Get an exclusive, in-depth look at our new features by tuning into the May 2020 Marketing Cloud Release New Feature Overview. Join
this webinar on June 11 at 11:00 AM CDT!
113
Marketing Cloud Release Notes May 2020 Release
Release Highlights
• Path Optimizer
• Datorama Connector for Pardot
• Datorama Integration with Tableau
• Einstein Overview Dashboard
• Single Send Journey Enhancements
• Distributed Marketing Enhancements
Release Edits
May 14, 2020 Original publish date
May 21, 2020 Added release timeframe for Journey Pause
May 30, 2020 Add links, remove TLS link
June 5, 2020 Update the date of the MobilePush SDK release
June 18, 2020 Added jQuery Library Removed from CloudPages topic
June 23, 2020 Add a developer release note for deleting contact records via API
with only a ContactKey.
July 9, 2020 Revise Journey Pause release date
Marketing Cloud App and Setup May 2020 Release Notes

Set a fallback address for your sender profile, and include CC recipients on forwards.
Marketing Cloud Cross-Cloud Integrations May 2020 Release Notes
Update your authentication methods and data sources as part of the May 2020 release.
Marketing Cloud Data Management May 2020 Release Notes
Upload SSH keys to authenticate your SFTP account and create a data extract of contacts not associated with any messaging channel.
Marketing Cloud Developers May 2020 Release Notes
Pause and resume journeys in Journey Builder via the API.
Marketing Cloud Einstein May 2020 Release Notes
Review new live overview cards in Einstein Overview and learn about the send time optimization model.
Marketing Cloud Journeys and Messages May 2020 Release Notes
Preview the new CloudPages experience, update your iOS provisioning certificates, test the effectiveness of your paths in Journey
Builder, and customize your LINE messages with preview text.
Marketing Cloud Trailhead May 2020 Release Notes
Get familiar with Salesforce or discover a new feature with Trailhead, a fun, guided interactive tool. You can follow learning paths
for admins or developers, or choose your own adventure with self-paced modules.
114
Marketing Cloud Release Notes Marketing Cloud App and Setup May 2020 Release Notes
Marketing Cloud App and Setup May 2020 Release Notes

Set a fallback address for your sender profile, and include CC recipients on forwards.
Use a Fallback Address in Sender Profiles

If you use AMPscript in sender profiles to dynamically populate the from address at send time, you can provide a fallback address
to use if an unverified address is found during the validation check. Fallback addresses must be verified in From Address Management.
You can’t use an unverified or non-sendable From address as a fallback address.
Include CC Recipients on Forwards
To make sure that all CC recipients on incoming replies receive a forwarded email, use Reply Address Translation in Marketing Cloud
Reply Mail Management. All To and CC recipients with addresses in Reply Address Translation are forwarded a copy of the email.
Internet service providers process replies differently, so multiple forwards are possible depending on the provider. BCC recipients
don’t receive forwarded emails.
Use Strong Cipher Keys with SFTP Clients
We are enforcing the use of strong cipher keys with SFTP clients and plan to begin rejecting weak cipher key connections to Marketing
Cloud starting June 19, 2020.
Configure Public SSH Keys for Marketing Cloud SFTP Users
Manage your public SSH keys with your Marketing Cloud SFTP accounts. Configure each SFTP user to authenticate using a password,
SSH key only, SSH key or password, or a combination of SSH key and password.
Use a Fallback Address in Sender Profiles

If you use AMPscript in sender profiles to dynamically populate the from address at send time, you can provide a fallback address to use
if an unverified address is found during the validation check. Fallback addresses must be verified in From Address Management. You
can’t use an unverified or non-sendable From address as a fallback address.
Where: This feature is available to all Marketing Cloud users with access to Enhanced Sender Profiles. The Fallback Address field displays
when a user adds AMPscript in the sender information section of a sender profile to populate the from address at send time.
Include CC Recipients on Forwards

To make sure that all CC recipients on incoming replies receive a forwarded email, use Reply Address Translation in Marketing Cloud
Reply Mail Management. All To and CC recipients with addresses in Reply Address Translation are forwarded a copy of the email. Internet
service providers process replies differently, so multiple forwards are possible depending on the provider. BCC recipients don’t receive
forwarded emails.
Use Strong Cipher Keys with SFTP Clients

We are enforcing the use of strong cipher keys with SFTP clients and plan to begin rejecting weak cipher key connections to Marketing
Cloud starting June 19, 2020.
Ensure that your SFTP client uses strong cipher keys, and stay current on which ciphers are supported. To configure your SFTP client with
strong ciphers, review our help documentation. If you already use the SFTP file transfer protocol with strong cipher keys, no action is
required.
At Salesforce, we understand that the confidentiality, integrity, and availability of your data is vital to your business. We take your data
protection seriously. Therefore, we require that these changes be implemented for file imports and exports to enhance and extend the
security of your data.
115
Marketing Cloud Release Notes Marketing Cloud Cross-Cloud Integrations May 2020 Release
Notes
Note: This change does NOT impact the use of External FTP, SFTP, and FTPS Sites for file transfers.
Configure Public SSH Keys for Marketing Cloud SFTP Users

Manage your public SSH keys with your Marketing Cloud SFTP accounts. Configure each SFTP user to authenticate using a password,
SSH key only, SSH key or password, or a combination of SSH key and password.
To configure your public SSH key, use Key Management in Setup. Use the authentication options for these SSH keys on the FTP Accounts
page.
Marketing Cloud Cross-Cloud Integrations May 2020 Release Notes

Update your authentication methods and data sources as part of the May 2020 release.

Marketing Cloud Connect A/B Test Email Sends relies on the features and functionality of Email Studio Classic Content. After Create
Classic Email retirement in January 2021, A/B Test Email Sends in Sales and Service Cloud are no longer available.
Action Required: Maintain Security and Connectivity with the Connected App by July 31, 2020
legacy authentication to Connected App authentication. If you are not authenticated, with the Connected App, you will no longer
be able to connect to Sales and Service Cloud after July 31, 2020.
Deep Links Removed from Marketing Cloud Connect Pages in Sales and Service Cloud in October
To improve security in the Marketing Cloud Platform, we are removing the “Go To Marketing Cloud” links on various pages of the
Marketing Cloud Connect app with the October release.
Distributed Marketing Schedule Quick Send Messages
Distributed Marketing business users can now schedule single and bulk send Quick Send messages for a future time and date.
Messages are scheduled and sent in the user’s time zone. Messages must be scheduled at least 5 minutes in the future, and can be
canceled up to 5 minutes prior to send. The send limit for a given date and time is 25,000.
Distributed Marketing Content Marketplace
Content Marketplaces provide the structure and guidance necessary to help Distributed Marketing business users quickly navigate
the assets available for them to use. Create multiple marketplaces to showcase collections of assets grouped in the way your business
users think, such as Recommended, High ROI, and more. Marketplaces are powered by list views of Campaign or Quick Send Message
records.
Distributed Marketing Bulk Campaign Send
Distributed Marketing business users can message up to 25,000 campaign members at once in the Campaign Send workflow. Simply
add the target audience to the campaign, modify the content, and send. Emails can be modified for all recipients at once. So with
this tool users can quickly target large groups of their book of business with the right content modifications. For clients who need
a bit more personalization, users can still employ the standard campaign workflow.

Marketing Cloud Connect A/B Test Email Sends relies on the features and functionality of Email Studio Classic Content. After Create
Classic Email retirement in January 2021, A/B Test Email Sends in Sales and Service Cloud are no longer available.
with Content Builder.
116
Notes
Action Required: Maintain Security and Connectivity with the Connected App by July
31, 2020
authentication to Connected App authentication. If you are not authenticated, with the Connected App, you will no longer be able to
connect to Sales and Service Cloud after July 31, 2020.
Tracking User Name and Tracking User Password fields under Configuration Settings, you are using legacy authentication.
If you are authenticated with the Connected App, you see a section called Connection at the bottom of the Configuration Settings screen.
117
Notes
This process can require up to a two-hour outage. Check out how to Upgrade to the Connected App.
in October
To improve security in the Marketing Cloud Platform, we are removing the “Go To Marketing Cloud” links on various pages of the
Marketing Cloud Connect app with the October release.
How: To access the Marketing Cloud Connect features, log into Marketing Cloud and navigate to specific pages. You can still access the
links, but they will redirect you to the main Marketing Cloud login page.
Distributed Marketing Schedule Quick Send Messages

Distributed Marketing business users can now schedule single and bulk send Quick Send messages for a future time and date. Messages
are scheduled and sent in the user’s time zone. Messages must be scheduled at least 5 minutes in the future, and can be canceled up
to 5 minutes prior to send. The send limit for a given date and time is 25,000.
See the Schedule a Quick Send Message article for more information.
118
Marketing Cloud Release Notes Marketing Cloud Data Management May 2020 Release Notes
Distributed Marketing Content Marketplace

Content Marketplaces provide the structure and guidance necessary to help Distributed Marketing business users quickly navigate the
assets available for them to use. Create multiple marketplaces to showcase collections of assets grouped in the way your business users
think, such as Recommended, High ROI, and more. Marketplaces are powered by list views of Campaign or Quick Send Message records.
See these features for more information:
• Set Up Content Marketplaces
• Set Up Images for Content Marketplaces
• Use Business Units with Content Marketplace
Distributed Marketing Bulk Campaign Send

Distributed Marketing business users can message up to 25,000 campaign members at once in the Campaign Send workflow. Simply
add the target audience to the campaign, modify the content, and send. Emails can be modified for all recipients at once. So with this
tool users can quickly target large groups of their book of business with the right content modifications. For clients who need a bit more
personalization, users can still employ the standard campaign workflow.
When enabled, this option is available by selecting the Bulk Send button the Campaign Messages component. Bulk sending is a two-step
process:
• Add the target audience, make your send-level content modifications, and prepare the send.
• When Distributed Marketing finishes preparing the send, simply start the send.
Marketing Cloud Data Management May 2020 Release Notes

Upload SSH keys to authenticate your SFTP account and create a data extract of contacts not associated with any messaging channel.
Create Mobile Audiences in Contact Builder

Now marketers can create mobile channel lists in Contact Builder in Marketing Cloud. Previously, marketers navigated to the respective
Mobile Studio to create lists for use in a given channel. For multi-channel customers of mobile, this meant navigating to multiple
Mobile Studios to perform the same audience creation work. Creating the mobile lists in Contact Builder once streamlines this
process.
Extract Contacts Without a Channel Address
A new self-service capability is now available that allows you to create a data extract of all contacts that are not associated with any
channel. This enables you to manage contacts that can’t receive a message via any channel. This feature is available for customers
who have Marketing Cloud editions where Contact Builder is provisioned with Core or Enterprise 2.0 accounts.
Create Mobile Audiences in Contact Builder

Now marketers can create mobile channel lists in Contact Builder in Marketing Cloud. Previously, marketers navigated to the respective
Mobile Studio to create lists for use in a given channel. For multi-channel customers of mobile, this meant navigating to multiple Mobile
Studios to perform the same audience creation work. Creating the mobile lists in Contact Builder once streamlines this process.
Considerations
• This feature applies to customers who have one or more mobile channels provisioned.
• Creating lists in Contact Builder alleviates the need to create lists in multiple Mobile Studios. All tasks associated with contact
management including audience creation are performed in Contact Builder.
119
Marketing Cloud Release Notes Marketing Cloud Developers May 2020 Release Notes
• In Contact Builder, navigate to All Contacts. If you have any mobile channel provisioned for your account, you see the new Mobile
Lists tab. Email-only customers don’t see this tab.
Extract Contacts Without a Channel Address

A new self-service capability is now available that allows you to create a data extract of all contacts that are not associated with any
channel. This enables you to manage contacts that can’t receive a message via any channel. This feature is available for customers who
have Marketing Cloud editions where Contact Builder is provisioned with Core or Enterprise 2.0 accounts.
Considerations
• Contacts that are not associated with any channel are not useful but are counted toward the Contacts allowance. This feature gives
you insight into where the contacts are coming from and the ability to delete them if needed.
• Use Automation Studio to create a simple automation with a Data Extract activity. In the Extract Type, choose Contacts Without
Channel Addresses.
• The output from the data extract activity is captured in the data extension named Contacts without Channel Addresses in the Data
Extensions folder.
• If you plan to delete these contacts, examine the contents of the Data Extension. If you have set up Data Sync, the synchronized
users, leads, contacts, and person accounts are registered as Contacts in Marketing Cloud at the time of sync, but are assigned a
channel address only when Marketing Cloud sends a message to them. Also account for contacts that don’t have any channel
addresses yet, but may receive a transactional message through Journey Builder, for example. This is based on an endpoint address
such as email address or SMS number coming from the transaction that’s visible to the journey through a data extension, for example.
If they have not yet been sent any messages, you find those contacts reported in the Data Extension.
• This process takes several hours to run. You can’t run the process more than once in a 24-hour period. You can submit the request
and report success if you had a productive run in the last 24 hours, but no processing occurs and the contents of the data extension
where the contacts are extracted remain unchanged.
Marketing Cloud Developers May 2020 Release Notes

Pause and resume journeys in Journey Builder via the API.
Pause and Resume Journeys in Journey Builder Via API

Pause your running journeys in Marketing Cloud Journey Builder for up to 14 days using the new Journey Pause API, and when ready,
use the API to resume the paused journey. Previously, there was no option to temporarily pause running journeys. Instead, marketers
had to stop the journey and then recreate it later. Stopping a journey removed contacts from the journey. As a result, marketers had
to decide whether the removed contacts should complete a new version of the journey later or not complete the journey at all.
Now, with the Journey Pause API, you can temporarily pause processing contacts through the journey and then resume the paused
journey later. We plan to release this feature by July 16, 2020.
Set API Parameter to Delete Content Builder Asset from CDN
The new isCDN Delete Asset route parameter lets API users determine if a file and its URL are permanently removed from the CDN
vendor when the associated file is deleted in Marketing Cloud Content Builder.
Use a Fallback Address with Domain Verification REST and SOAP APIs
The Marketing Cloud domain verification REST API endpoints and the SOAP API handlers for retrieve, create, update, and delete now
support the sender profiles fallback address parameters for emails. A fallback address is useful if there’s a send-time restriction when
you send emails with dynamic From addresses via AMPscript. The fallback address displays if the dynamic From address can’t be
displayed. Set a fallback address in Sender Profiles in Setup.
120
Marketing Cloud Release Notes Marketing Cloud Developers May 2020 Release Notes
Attach Files with AMPscript

Change files that are inline attachments (such as images) to standard attachments using the new force attachment parameter for
the AMPscript AttachFile() function. Anyone who has attachments enabled can use this new parameter. AttachFile() also supports
four new mime-parts.
Delete Contact Records via API with Only a ContactKey
Now ContactKey alone uniquely identifies the contact to delete. So it’s no longer necessary to add a ContactTypeId parameter for
the Delete Contacts by Key REST API resource. Previously, to delete each record associated with a ContactKey, you deleted each
record separately by ContactKey and ContactTypeId. All records that match a ContactKey are deleted in Marketing Cloud, regardless
of their ContactTypeId.

Pause your running journeys in Marketing Cloud Journey Builder for up to 14 days using the new Journey Pause API, and when ready,
use the API to resume the paused journey. Previously, there was no option to temporarily pause running journeys. Instead, marketers
had to stop the journey and then recreate it later. Stopping a journey removed contacts from the journey. As a result, marketers had to
decide whether the removed contacts should complete a new version of the journey later or not complete the journey at all. Now, with
the Journey Pause API, you can temporarily pause processing contacts through the journey and then resume the paused journey later.
We plan to release this feature by July 16, 2020.
SEE ALSO:
Pause and Resume Journeys in Journey Builder
Set API Parameter to Delete Content Builder Asset from CDN

The new isCDN Delete Asset route parameter lets API users determine if a file and its URL are permanently removed from the CDN vendor
when the associated file is deleted in Marketing Cloud Content Builder.
Where: This route applies to Content Builder API users.
Why: Some cases require customers to determine if they want a deleted file to be permanently removed and inaccessible to subscribers.
A common use case is for an image that references outdated content, such as a special deal sent during a sale. The previous workaround
was to replace the image with a blank or default image.
How: To minimize customer impact, the file is not deleted from CDN unless the route parameter is specified. If the parameter is unspecified,
or set to 0 or false, the existing behavior persists and the file remains published at the URL. If the parameter value is set to 1 or true, the
file and URL are deleted from the CDN.
Value Behavior
Unspecified or no value Does not delete from CDN
Value = false (case insensitive) Does not delete from CDN
Value = true (case insensitive) Does not delete from CDN
Value = 0 Does not delete from CDN
Value = 1 Deletes from CDN
121
Marketing Cloud Release Notes Marketing Cloud Einstein May 2020 Release Notes
Use a Fallback Address with Domain Verification REST and SOAP APIs
The Marketing Cloud domain verification REST API endpoints and the SOAP API handlers for retrieve, create, update, and delete now
support the sender profiles fallback address parameters for emails. A fallback address is useful if there’s a send-time restriction when you
send emails with dynamic From addresses via AMPscript. The fallback address displays if the dynamic From address can’t be displayed.
Set a fallback address in Sender Profiles in Setup.
This functionality is available to all Marketing Cloud API users.
Attach Files with AMPscript

Change files that are inline attachments (such as images) to standard attachments using the new force attachment parameter for the
AMPscript AttachFile() function. Anyone who has attachments enabled can use this new parameter. AttachFile() also supports four new
mime-parts.
Why: Customers want to attach images and other documents, instead of including them inline.
How: An optional 8th parameter, AttachFile(1,2,3,4,5,6,7,force_attachment), will force the content-disposition to change from inline to
attachment, when the default is inline. The parameter is a boolean.
Note: The following mime-types already default to attachment and cannot be changed: text/csv, application/xml, text/xml,
text/vcard, and text/x-vcard.
mime type file extension default content-disposition

image/x-png png inline
image/jpg jpg inline
application/ics ics inline
text/x-vcard vcf attachment
SEE ALSO:
Programmatic Marketing Content - AttachFile
Delete Contact Records via API with Only a ContactKey

Now ContactKey alone uniquely identifies the contact to delete. So it’s no longer necessary to add a ContactTypeId parameter for the
Delete Contacts by Key REST API resource. Previously, to delete each record associated with a ContactKey, you deleted each record
separately by ContactKey and ContactTypeId. All records that match a ContactKey are deleted in Marketing Cloud, regardless of their
ContactTypeId.
Where: This functionality applies to all customers who use this API resource to delete contacts from Marketing Cloud.
How: The system finds all contact records for the ContactKey that you supply via API and deletes those contacts. For example, if a
ContactKey has two records, one with a ContactTypeId value of 0 (Marketing Cloud) and one with a value of 3 (Triggered Send List),
both of these contacts are deleted.
Marketing Cloud Einstein May 2020 Release Notes

Review new live overview cards in Einstein Overview and learn about the send time optimization model.
122
Get Live Performance Metrics for Your Einstein Products

Get a comprehensive view of the state of your AI for Marketing capabilities. Now there’s an interactive card with live performance
metrics in the Einstein Overview app for each active Einstein product in your Marketing Cloud org.
Get Better Send Time Optimization Recommendations
Get greater clarity on Marketing Cloud send recommendations and outcomes in all kinds of scenarios. See message open likelihood
scores for all hours and days in the week, and Einstein’s recommended distribution per week or on a given day.
Gain Insight on the Send Time Optimization Model
Marketing Cloud’s Einstein Send Time Optimization model card provides insight into how our artificial intelligence (AI) model works.
Test Send Time Optimization with Random Sending
Test the performance of Marketing Cloud Einstein’s send time recommendations quantitatively by adding a random sending path.
Watch Your Content Selections Assets Perform
See how content is performing by grouping content by a single asset attribute.
Automate Daily Profile Syncing
Einstein Content Selection can respond to changes in your customers’ profile data. Keep Einstein informed with automated daily
profile syncing.
Create Asset and Profile Attributes
Gain greater control over the content image selections that your customers see. You can create and manage attributes of the assets
and profiles that Einstein Content Selection uses in Marketing Cloud. Plus, specify if attributes require values or can be null, and if an
attribute’s value must come from a specific set of values.
Archive Asset Images
Tidy up your dashboard so you can easily focus on content assets that are currently in use. Set up archiving for images used by
Einstein Content Selection in Marketing Cloud.
Export Assets to CSV
Use the export option to quickly and easily update your asset pool. Export your Einstein Content Selection assets to a CSV file that’s
already formatted for import.
Modify Asset Classes
Get the power to update your asset class with clicks, not a file upload. Now you can view, add, and modify asset classes directly in
Einstein Content Selection’s Marketing Cloud user interface.
Get Live Performance Metrics for Your Einstein Products

Get a comprehensive view of the state of your AI for Marketing capabilities. Now there’s an interactive card with live performance metrics
in the Einstein Overview app for each active Einstein product in your Marketing Cloud org.
Why: Live performance metrics cards let you know exactly which Einstein products are working for you. Previously, the app displayed
static cards to indicate which Einstein products you didn’t yet activate. These interactive, live-state cards give you a complete view of
your Marketing Cloud Einstein product adoption.
How: After you activate an Einstein product, its interactive card displays live performance metrics. The way you activate Einstein products
hasn’t changed.
9
123
Get Better Send Time Optimization Recommendations

Get greater clarity on Marketing Cloud send recommendations and outcomes in all kinds of scenarios. See message open likelihood
scores for all hours and days in the week, and Einstein’s recommended distribution per week or on a given day.
Why: The Einstein Send Time Optimization dashboard now shows the results of Einstein’s modeling more clearly. The app includes
message open likelihood scores for all hours and days in the week. Einstein can also recommend the best hour to send. Finally, the app
provides additional information about how the model works.
Gain Insight on the Send Time Optimization Model

Marketing Cloud’s Einstein Send Time Optimization model card provides insight into how our artificial intelligence (AI) model works.
Why: The Einstein Send Time Optimization model card provides insight into factors the model uses. Factors include the types of inputs
the model uses, its best applications, and ethical considerations in its use.
Test Send Time Optimization with Random Sending

Test the performance of Marketing Cloud Einstein’s send time recommendations quantitatively by adding a random sending path.
Where: Find the Random Send Time option in Journey Builder’s Einstein STO activity. Use this option with the new Path Optimizer.
Why: Marketers can easily set up a testing path in a journey. With this option, test sending emails to contacts at random times, against
sending at a single time, or against sending at Einstein’s recommended times.
Watch Your Content Selections Assets Perform

See how content is performing by grouping content by a single asset attribute.
Where: In Einstein Content Selection’s performance analytics, select Asset Attribute as your filter setting.
Why: Easily understand which assets with the selected asset attribute perform well, and which assets are not performing so you can
replace or modify them.
How: For example, Northern Trail Outfitters has an asset attribute called Activity that tells Einstein what’s going on in the asset image.
Some of the Activity asset attribute’s values include Hiking, Running, Camping, and Fitness. By viewing performance by asset attribute,
NTO can compare how assets are performing for all the Activity asset’s values.
Automate Daily Profile Syncing

Einstein Content Selection can respond to changes in your customers’ profile data. Keep Einstein informed with automated daily profile
syncing.
Where: When you pick a data extension to import profile attributes about your customers, select Recurring sync. Then set a schedule,
including the time of day your profile data extension sync runs.
124
Marketing Cloud Release Notes Marketing Cloud Journeys and Messages May 2020 Release
Notes
Create Asset and Profile Attributes

Gain greater control over the content image selections that your customers see. You can create and manage attributes of the assets and
profiles that Einstein Content Selection uses in Marketing Cloud. Plus, specify if attributes require values or can be null, and if an attribute’s
value must come from a specific set of values.
SEE ALSO:
Add an Asset Attribute
Manage Profile Attributes
Archive Asset Images

Tidy up your dashboard so you can easily focus on content assets that are currently in use. Set up archiving for images used by Einstein
Content Selection in Marketing Cloud.
Why: Archiving images prevents them from appearing in the asset pool.
How: Add an archive date that occurs after the image asset’s end date, or click Archive in an asset’s menu.
Export Assets to CSV

Use the export option to quickly and easily update your asset pool. Export your Einstein Content Selection assets to a CSV file that’s
already formatted for import.
Why: Export your assets, make changes and additions, and reimport the file.
Modify Asset Classes

Get the power to update your asset class with clicks, not a file upload. Now you can view, add, and modify asset classes directly in Einstein
Content Selection’s Marketing Cloud user interface.
SEE ALSO:
Manage Asset Classes
Marketing Cloud Journeys and Messages May 2020 Release Notes

Preview the new CloudPages experience, update your iOS provisioning certificates, test the effectiveness of your paths in Journey Builder,
and customize your LINE messages with preview text.
Action Required: Upload MobilePush Auth Key for iOS Sends

Apple is requiring all mobile vendors to migrate their processes to support their new updated push notification service later this
year. As part of this migration, Marketing Cloud MobilePush will remove support for current .p12 APNs certificates and will require
all iOS customers to use .p8 Auth Keys to send push notifications. In preparation for this change, MobilePush is allowing customers
to upload a .p8 Auth Key for each of their apps in MobilePush Administration or in Setup. You will be able to update your Auth Key
after the June Marketing Cloud release.
Create Push Notifications in Journey Builder
In the January 2019 release, Marketing Cloud MobilePush allowed you to create push notifications within Journey Builder instead
of Mobile Studio. We are now completing that rollout for the remaining customers.
125
Notes

Pause running journeys for up to 14 days to temporarily halt processing contacts through the journey and halt sending messages
from Journey Builder. You can use this feature in Marketing Cloud or via REST API requests. Temporarily halt sending messages for
various business reasons, such as a natural disaster, when updating the email content, or when your website is experiencing downtime.
Create, Send, and Monitor Single Send Push Journeys from Journey Builder
Single send journeys now support push notifications. Send single push messages, such as promotions or app alerts, to a batch
audience from a simple, streamlined user experience in Journey Builder. Schedule your journeys for a future date and time or send
immediately.
Experiment in Journey Builder with Path Optimizer
Start experimenting in Journey Builder with tests based on email engagement metrics or other outcomes using Path Optimizer.
Keep the journey running with new entrants receiving the winning path. The Path Optimizer activity is available for all Journey
Builder customers in the Flow Controls section.
Customize LINE Messages with Preview Text
You can now edit the preview text for your LINE messages in Marketing Cloud GroupConnect and Journey Builder. Previously, all
messages were sent with default text. Now, you can customize your preview text for better customer engagement.
MobilePush SDK May 2020 Release Notes
The latest version of the Marketing Cloud MobilePush SDK includes improvements to performance, analytics processing, and
privacy-mode handling.
Create Classic Emails, Templates, and Simple Automated Emails are Being Retired
We delivered the highest requested parity features you asked for in Marketing Cloud Content Builder, and now it is time to retire
creating classic emails, templates, and Simple Automated Emails in Marketing Cloud Email Studio. Classic creation is retired in all
Marketing Cloud Email Studio accounts on June 30, 2020. The ability to edit classic emails is scheduled for retirement in all Marketing
Cloud Email Studio accounts in January 2021.
Free up Triggered Sends External Keys and Names in Email Studio
Triggered Sends external keys and names are now freed up when clicking delete from Email Studio Interactions. Previously, triggered
sends were only archived, not deleted. Now when you delete a triggered send, the external keys and name is changed and you can
reuse the values for new triggered sends.
Access All Shared Folders in Preview and Test
Marketing Cloud Content Builder Users with more than 31 folders can now access the Shared Audiences folder in Preview and Test.
Previously, if there were more than 31 folders in the root Shared Data Extensions folder, the Shared Audiences folder did not display.
Copy Image URLs Faster
Marketing Cloud Content Builder users can now copy the published image URL from the Content Builder library actions dropdown
instead of from the properties view.
Grant User Access to New Blocks in Setup
Marketing Cloud Content Builder Administrators can now control user access to two new blocks in Setup > Content Builder Settings:
Smart Capture and Einstein Content. Smart Capture is available in the new CloudPages Preview app.
Preview the New CloudPages Experience
The new CloudPages experience is a customer preview of the upcoming CloudPages app in Marketing Cloud, which is scheduled
for release for January 2021. The preview has a cleaner, faster user interface. New features include improved content and collection
sorting, and the ability to copy existing content.
Preview Interactive Email Form Content
Marketing Cloud Content Builder users can preview Email Form block content in the block's properties view.
126
Notes

We emoved JavaScript library jQuery version 1.8.3 from CloudPages. jQuery used in CloudPages-created microsites or landing pages
that do not explicitly call a jQuery library with a script tag no longer function as expected after this release. This change does not
impact microsites or landing pages created with classic content tools, as they did not use this library.
Action Required: Upload MobilePush Auth Key for iOS Sends

Apple is requiring all mobile vendors to migrate their processes to support their new updated push notification service later this year.
As part of this migration, Marketing Cloud MobilePush will remove support for current .p12 APNs certificates and will require all iOS
customers to use .p8 Auth Keys to send push notifications. In preparation for this change, MobilePush is allowing customers to upload
a .p8 Auth Key for each of their apps in MobilePush Administration or in Setup. You will be able to update your Auth Key after the June
When:
• Once the June release has pushed and your instance is provisioned, you can upload and save your .p8 Auth Keys within MobilePush
Administration. All iOS sends continues to use the legacy .p12 certificates.
• In a later Marketing Cloud release, which is estimated late July or early August, you are required to upload and save your .p8 Auth
Keys to send iOS push notifications. MobilePush will remove support for .p12 Certificates and require that all iOS sends use .p8 Auth
Keys.
Who: This action applies to MobilePush customers who are sending messages to iOS devices. No code changes are required to your
app or to the MobilePush SDK. No action is required for Android.
How: In Setup or in MobilePush Administration, navigate to your application and upload your app’s .p8 Auth Key.
Create Push Notifications in Journey Builder

In the January 2019 release, Marketing Cloud MobilePush allowed you to create push notifications within Journey Builder instead of
Mobile Studio. We are now completing that rollout for the remaining customers.
Where:The push notification template is included in Content Builder and the new Push Notification activity in Journey Builder for
Corporate and Enterprise editions.
How: To create a push notification in Content Builder without leaving Journey Builder, drag the Push Notification activity onto your
canvas, and click New Message. To access your existing MobilePush messages, select Select Message, and then select MobilePush
Messages.

Pause running journeys for up to 14 days to temporarily halt processing contacts through the journey and halt sending messages from
Journey Builder. You can use this feature in Marketing Cloud or via REST API requests. Temporarily halt sending messages for various
business reasons, such as a natural disaster, when updating the email content, or when your website is experiencing downtime.
Previously, these reasons required you to stop running journeys even to stop sending messages for just a few hours or days. Afterwards,
you created a version of the journey or a new journey to start sending messages again. This step resulted in sending some contacts
through a journey again or dropping them before completing the journey. We plan to release this feature by the end of June 2020.
SEE ALSO:
127
Notes
Create, Send, and Monitor Single Send Push Journeys from Journey Builder
Single send journeys now support push notifications. Send single push messages, such as promotions or app alerts, to a batch audience
from a simple, streamlined user experience in Journey Builder. Schedule your journeys for a future date and time or send immediately.
Learn Journey Builder through a streamlined experience for simpler sends to quickly increase sophistication through multi-step journeys.
Manage single send and multi-step journeys from a unified workspace to increase visibility across campaigns and streamline navigation.
Simplify new team member onboarding with a unified user experience for both types of sends across multiple channels.
In Journey Builder, click Create New Journey, and select Single Send - Push.
Experiment in Journey Builder with Path Optimizer

Start experimenting in Journey Builder with tests based on email engagement metrics or other outcomes using Path Optimizer. Keep
the journey running with new entrants receiving the winning path. The Path Optimizer activity is available for all Journey Builder customers
in the Flow Controls section.
Continually adjust your marketing strategies to better meet your business goals. Try your ideas and make improvements based on
previous iterations. Test the flow of your activities and messages within the context of a customer journey. Experiment and vary the
cadence, frequency, and channel, in addition to the content. Determine the best way your customer journeys integrate with Salesforce
CRM.
Experiment and choose a winning path either automatically or manually while the journey is running. Ensure that all future contacts
entering the journey only proceed down the winning path. Also, to optimize different population segments or milestones, you can place
many Path Optimizer activities within the same journey.
• Configure an automatic or manual winner with up to 10 paths with user-defined distributions.
• The system automatically picks a winner on email engagement metrics, or you can manually select a winner.
• Testing goes beyond email parameters to include most Journey Builder activities.
– Wait
– All messaging activities
– Sales and Service Cloud activities
– Update Contact
– Custom activities
• Losing paths shut off flow of contacts and only the winning path receives new contacts.
• Test summary information provides historical test context for decision making.
Customize LINE Messages with Preview Text

You can now edit the preview text for your LINE messages in Marketing Cloud GroupConnect and Journey Builder. Previously, all messages
were sent with default text. Now, you can customize your preview text for better customer engagement.
Where: This feature is available in Content Builder and Journey Builder for Carousel and Imagemap message types.
How: In Journey Builder or Content Builder, enter your text in the preview text field under the image upload section in the Imagemap
message. For Carousel messages, enter your preview text in the configuration tab.
MobilePush SDK May 2020 Release Notes

The latest version of the Marketing Cloud MobilePush SDK includes improvements to performance, analytics processing, and privacy-mode
handling.
128
Notes
Get the latest version for iOS and Android.

When: Version 7.2.0 of the MobilePush SDK is available as of June 1, 2020.
• We improved analytics processing and fixed minor bugs for the iOS SDK.
• We improved performance and privacy-mode handling for the Android SDK.
Create Classic Emails, Templates, and Simple Automated Emails are Being Retired
We delivered the highest requested parity features you asked for in Marketing Cloud Content Builder, and now it is time to retire creating
classic emails, templates, and Simple Automated Emails in Marketing Cloud Email Studio. Classic creation is retired in all Marketing Cloud
Email Studio accounts on June 30, 2020. The ability to edit classic emails is scheduled for retirement in all Marketing Cloud Email Studio
accounts in January 2021.
Email Studio features not included in the retirement:
• View classic emails, templates, and content areas
• Access to Portfolio
• Sending classic email
• Landing Pages
• Email classic SOAP APIs
• Distributed Sending
See Content Builder Adoption Resources.
Watch the Marketing Cloud Classic Email Retirement & Transition to Content Builder video.
Free up Triggered Sends External Keys and Names in Email Studio

Triggered Sends external keys and names are now freed up when clicking delete from Email Studio Interactions. Previously, triggered
sends were only archived, not deleted. Now when you delete a triggered send, the external keys and name is changed and you can
reuse the values for new triggered sends.
See Delete a Message Interaction and Delete a Triggered Send Definition developer documentation.
Access All Shared Folders in Preview and Test

Marketing Cloud Content Builder Users with more than 31 folders can now access the Shared Audiences folder in Preview and Test.
Previously, if there were more than 31 folders in the root Shared Data Extensions folder, the Shared Audiences folder did not display.
Copy Image URLs Faster

Marketing Cloud Content Builder users can now copy the published image URL from the Content Builder library actions dropdown
instead of from the properties view.
See Copy File URL.
Grant User Access to New Blocks in Setup

Marketing Cloud Content Builder Administrators can now control user access to two new blocks in Setup > Content Builder Settings:
Smart Capture and Einstein Content. Smart Capture is available in the new CloudPages Preview app.
129
Marketing Cloud Release Notes Marketing Cloud Trailhead May 2020 Release Notes
Preview the New CloudPages Experience

The new CloudPages experience is a customer preview of the upcoming CloudPages app in Marketing Cloud, which is scheduled for
release for January 2021. The preview has a cleaner, faster user interface. New features include improved content and collection sorting,
and the ability to copy existing content.
Where: The preview is available for all CloudPages customers alongside the current CloudPages app in Marketing Cloud. Select New
CloudPages Experience PREVIEW from the Web Studio app switcher dropdown.
Why: We want CloudPages customers to try the new CloudPages experience and features, and to provide us feedback before it replaces
the current CloudPages later this year. Marketing Cloud normally offers limited pilot and beta programs, but due to unusual customer
work conditions from COVID-19, this preview lets us gain great feedback with the least customer risk.
The current CloudPages app is still available to customers, so users who experience issues with the preview can switch to the current
version and continue their work. Both CloudPages versions access and manage the same content, so changes made in one version are
made in the other.
Preview Interactive Email Form Content

Marketing Cloud Content Builder users can preview Email Form block content in the block's properties view.

We emoved JavaScript library jQuery version 1.8.3 from CloudPages. jQuery used in CloudPages-created microsites or landing pages
that do not explicitly call a jQuery library with a script tag no longer function as expected after this release. This change does not impact
microsites or landing pages created with classic content tools, as they did not use this library.
Why: CloudPages previously used jQuery library version 1.8.3 for internal Salesforce processes. We removed the code that loaded this
library when we replaced these processes for the May 2020 release.
jQuery 1.8.3 is officially unsupported as it is two major versions behind and has known security vulnerabilities. It is permanently removed
from our platform.
How: After this change, users see an "Uncaught ReferenceError: $ is not defined" error if the page uses jQuery without explicitly adding
the script for that library. To use a jQuery library, call the library directly in your code with this script tag:
<script type="text/javascript" src="//ajax.googleapis.com/ajax/libs/jquery/[VERSION
NUMBER]/jquery.min.js"></script>
Replace the version number with the desired library version. As version 1.8.3 has known security vulnerabilities, we strongly recommend
using a more recent library. The latest version as of June 2020. Always test page functionality if you upgrade to higher versions. See these
external resources for list of vulnerable versions:
Marketing Cloud Trailhead May 2020 Release Notes

Get familiar with Salesforce or discover a new feature with Trailhead, a fun, guided interactive tool. You can follow learning paths for
admins or developers, or choose your own adventure with self-paced modules.
Check out Trailhead at https://trailhead.salesforce.com, and find the right trails for you. Here are the latest Marketing Cloud trails and
modules.
130
Marketing Cloud Release Notes March 2020 Release
Modules and Trailmixes

Artificial Intelligence for Advertisers
Use AI to target ads, identify new audiences, and track performance.
Marketing Cloud Account Optimization
Review your account setup, risk factors, and data hygiene for peak sending performance.
Interactive Email Forms
Gather customer data directly from your email using Interactive Email Forms.
Get Started with Marketing Cloud
A beginner's guide for all roles to learn Marketing Cloud.
March 2020 Release

The March 2020 Marketing Cloud occurs on March 21 through March 28, 2020. The Social Studio release occurs on March 28, 2020. Some
features are made available to your instance within a week of the release.
Get an exclusive, in-depth look at our new features by tuning into the March 2020 Marketing Cloud Release New Feature Overview. Join
this webinar on April 2 at 11:00 AM CDT!
Release Highlights
• Interactive Email
• Data Mapping Visualizer
• Distributed Marketing Quick Send for SMS
• Einstein Marketing Insights Enhancements
• SMS Delivery Receipts
Release Edits
March 5, 2020 Original publish date
March 6, 2020 Added release notes for multiple FTP users
March 11, 2020 Added Marketing Cloud Trailhead release notes
March 12, 2020 Add anticipated release date to MobilePush SDK release note
131
Marketing Cloud Release Notes March 2020 Release

March 26, 2020 Update actual release date of the MobilePush SDK. Add information
about renaming Personalization Builder-related MobilePush SDK
documentation. Update the first criterion in the Transactional
Messaging API release note to “one or more primary key columns.”
Analytics Builder March 2020 Release Notes

Einstein products in Analytics Builder are relocated to their own category.
Contact Builder March 2020 Release Notes
The Object Refresh Activity Log in Synchronized Data Sources now shows the Marketing Cloud User, time, and date stamp for who
initiated an object refresh.
Content Builder March 2020 Release Notes
Learn about the new Email Form block, user experience improvements, and view enhanced features for the Content Builder Block
SDK and custom domains.
Distributed Marketing March 2020 Release Notes
Send a Quick Send Message from an opportunity record, preview, and send SMS Quick Send messages, and cap the number of sends
per user. Content block enhancements make formatting easier, and enhancements to quick sends gives users the ability to define
default values for quick sends. If users can access multiple business units with shared content, they can now change business units
when selecting a Quick Send message to send. These features are scheduled to be released to non-production environments
on March 29, 2020. Learn More.
Email Studio March 2020 Release Notes
Review Marketing Cloud Email Studio classic content features retirement plan. And there are improvements to the Domain Verification
notification email.
Journey Builder March 2020 Release Notes
A new journey template helps you target contacts based on behavior and added validation for the Data Extension entry source.
Marketing Cloud Einstein March 2020 Release Notes
Find all Marketing Cloud Einstein apps in one place. Get a comprehensive look at email anomalies now that Einstein Messaging
Insights includes journeys and automations.
Marketing Cloud Mobile Studio March 2020 Release Notes
Drive in-app push message engagement with the image fill template. Use the updated Push and In-App Journey Builder Activity
Name to easily find your messages in reports and data extracts. Get delivery receipts for individual SMS sends using the
_SMSMessageTracking data view.
Marketing Cloud Trailhead March 2020 Release Notes
Get familiar with Salesforce or discover a new feature with Trailhead, a fun, guided interactive tool. You can follow learning paths
for admins or developers, or choose your own adventure with self-paced modules.
Marketing Cloud Platform March 2020 Release Notes
Add a brand to your Marketing Cloud account and improve your interaction with our REST API with the March 2020 Marketing Cloud
Platform release.
Personalization Builder March 2020 Release Notes
Enable Einstein Email Recommendations and Einstein Web Recommendations to use specific data characteristics with one-character
or two-character values.
Web Studio March 2020 Release Notes
Create a landing page to use with the Content Builder Email Form block.
132
Marketing Cloud Release Notes Analytics Builder March 2020 Release Notes
Analytics Builder March 2020 Release Notes

Einstein products in Analytics Builder are relocated to their own category.
Einstein Products Relocation in Analytics Builder

Check out the new navigation category Einstein products. All Einstein products that were in Analytics Builder are now in this new
location.
Einstein Products Relocation in Analytics Builder

Check out the new navigation category Einstein products. All Einstein products that were in Analytics Builder are now in this new location.
SEE ALSO:
Use Einstein to Improve Your Marketing Efforts
Contact Builder March 2020 Release Notes

The Object Refresh Activity Log in Synchronized Data Sources now shows the Marketing Cloud User, time, and date stamp for who
initiated an object refresh.
Object Refresh Activity Log Enhancements for Synchronized Data Sources

You can now view the Marketing Cloud User, time, and date stamp for who initiated an object refresh in the Activity Log for a
Synchronized Object.
Object Refresh Activity Log Enhancements for Synchronized Data Sources

You can now view the Marketing Cloud User, time, and date stamp for who initiated an object refresh in the Activity Log for a Synchronized
Object.
Customers can track user and system actions to refresh individual objects. Object refreshes are initiated for these reasons:
• The user selects an object and initiates a refresh
• The user updates sync setting filter criteria
• The system automatically initiates a refresh if there are more than 600 changes within one minute when you request record updates
from Sales Cloud and Service Cloud.
Content Builder March 2020 Release Notes

Learn about the new Email Form block, user experience improvements, and view enhanced features for the Content Builder Block SDK
and custom domains.
Authenticate with OAuth 2.0 and Enjoy Content and Editing Enhancements
Developers can use enhanced install packages with OAuth 2.0 for user authentication. Developers can also unset content or
superContent and have more control over how the block is displayed. They can also perform block cleanup after the user closes
the block.
133
Marketing Cloud Release Notes Content Builder March 2020 Release Notes
Build Interactive Email Forms with New Content Builder Block

Use the Email Form block to build forms that render directly in a recipient’s email client. The block helps marketers reduce friction
around gathering more customer information.
Custom Domain Enhancements
Now your Content Builder file URLs get synchronized when you edit your account's custom domain. Previously, after you updated
a custom domain, images and documents uploaded to Content Builder retained the domain previously assigned to the account.
When the previous domain expired, these files failed to render at the associated URL.
Enjoy Improved Content Builder Styling Across Marketing Cloud
We improved styling to unify the Content Builder experience between Email Studio, Journey Builder, and Content Builder.
Authenticate with OAuth 2.0 and Enjoy Content and Editing Enhancements
Developers can use enhanced install packages with OAuth 2.0 for user authentication. Developers can also unset content or
superContent and have more control over how the block is displayed. They can also perform block cleanup after the user closes
the block.
Example: See Salesforce Marketing Cloud Content Builder Block SDK.
Build Interactive Email Forms with New Content Builder Block

Use the Email Form block to build forms that render directly in a recipient’s email client. The block helps marketers reduce friction around
gathering more customer information.
When: This feature is made available to your instance by April 10, 2020.
Who: This block is for marketers who want to gather more information from their subscribers. Use cases can include anything from
progressive profiling to product reviews. This feature requires CloudPages.
How: Drag the Email Form block in the editor and configure your settings. Ensure that you create and publish the CloudPages Interactive
Email page before configuring the Content Builder block. Admins can control the block’s availability to other users in Content Builder
Setup administration.
See Create an Interactive Email Form Block.
Custom Domain Enhancements

Now your Content Builder file URLs get synchronized when you edit your account's custom domain. Previously, after you updated a
custom domain, images and documents uploaded to Content Builder retained the domain previously assigned to the account. When
the previous domain expired, these files failed to render at the associated URL.
Who: This change is for customers who edit the custom domain associated with their Marketing Cloud account.
How: The system automatically detects changes to the base URL value and applies the changes to existing asset URLs.
Enjoy Improved Content Builder Styling Across Marketing Cloud

We improved styling to unify the Content Builder experience between Email Studio, Journey Builder, and Content Builder.
134
Marketing Cloud Release Notes Distributed Marketing March 2020 Release Notes
Distributed Marketing March 2020 Release Notes

Send a Quick Send Message from an opportunity record, preview, and send SMS Quick Send messages, and cap the number of sends
per user. Content block enhancements make formatting easier, and enhancements to quick sends gives users the ability to define default
values for quick sends. If users can access multiple business units with shared content, they can now change business units when selecting
a Quick Send message to send. These features are scheduled to be released to non-production environments on March 29,
2020. Learn More.
Cap the Number of Distributed Marketing Sends Per User

Distributed Marketing administrators can now define the maximum number of sends a user can initiate through Distributed Marketing.
Once the cap is reached, sending is disabled until the cap is reset. The send cap can be reset daily, weekly, or monthly.
Distributed Marketing Content Block Enhancements
Distributed Marketing content blocks have been updated to remove forced formatting which may have made it more difficult to
seamlessly blend standard content with collaborative content. Additionally, the Block Settings tab is now available to make it easier
to customize padding, margins, and more. This experience aligns with the standard Marketing Cloud content block experience.
Quick Send Enhancements
Distributed Marketing business users can now define default values for quick send messages they can access. Modifications made
by a user are available in any quick send workflow, and only visible to that user, even if multiple users have access to the same quick
send message record. When selecting a quick send message to send, the content and audience selection experience now shows
the ability to change business units only if the user has access to multiple business units with shared content. The component also
allows users to select from either Email or SMS message types if users have access to both Email and SMS Quick Send messages.
Quick Send from an Opportunity Record in Distributed Marketing
Send quick send messages directly from an opportunity record to more efficiently engage with individuals in the context of active
deals. Select the message to send and one of the contacts associated with the opportunity. Then, personalize and send the message
without navigating away. If chatter is enabled, sends are logged in the opportunity’s chatter feed and include the name of the
message, the recipient, and a date/time stamp.
SMS Quick Send in Distributed Marketing
Users send pre-approved or fully custom SMS messages through Distributed Marketing. SMS messages are sent through Journey
Builder using the Mobile Connect Send SMS message activity and are available in all Quick Send workflows except bulk send.
Cap the Number of Distributed Marketing Sends Per User

Distributed Marketing administrators can now define the maximum number of sends a user can initiate through Distributed Marketing.
Once the cap is reached, sending is disabled until the cap is reset. The send cap can be reset daily, weekly, or monthly.
Considerations
• Each message sent through a Quick Send workflow counts as one send. For example, a quick send message sent to a list view of
five members counts as five sends.
• Each Campaign Send counts as one send, regardless of the number of individual messages on the associated journey. For example,
a campaign send with three Send Email activities sent to 10 campaign members counts as 10 sends.
• If a manual approval process is enabled, sends are consumed at the time the business user submits the send for approval, not at the
time the send is approved or rejected. If a send is rejected, the send is not credited back to the business user until the cap is reset.
135
Marketing Cloud Release Notes Email Studio March 2020 Release Notes
Distributed Marketing Content Block Enhancements

Distributed Marketing content blocks have been updated to remove forced formatting which may have made it more difficult to
seamlessly blend standard content with collaborative content. Additionally, the Block Settings tab is now available to make it easier to
customize padding, margins, and more. This experience aligns with the standard Marketing Cloud content block experience.

Distributed Marketing business users can now define default values for quick send messages they can access. Modifications made by a
user are available in any quick send workflow, and only visible to that user, even if multiple users have access to the same quick send
message record. When selecting a quick send message to send, the content and audience selection experience now shows the ability
to change business units only if the user has access to multiple business units with shared content. The component also allows users to
select from either Email or SMS message types if users have access to both Email and SMS Quick Send messages.
Quick Send from an Opportunity Record in Distributed Marketing

Send quick send messages directly from an opportunity record to more efficiently engage with individuals in the context of active deals.
Select the message to send and one of the contacts associated with the opportunity. Then, personalize and send the message without
navigating away. If chatter is enabled, sends are logged in the opportunity’s chatter feed and include the name of the message, the
recipient, and a date/time stamp.
SEE ALSO:
Send a Message from an Opportunity Record
Set Up Quick Send from Opportunity Records
SMS Quick Send in Distributed Marketing

Users send pre-approved or fully custom SMS messages through Distributed Marketing. SMS messages are sent through Journey Builder
using the Mobile Connect Send SMS message activity and are available in all Quick Send workflows except bulk send.
Considerations
• Users can edit SMS messages.
• Messages are sent to the standard CRM phone field by default, but this can be modified in Lightning App Builder or Experience
Builder.
• MobileConnect manages message opt-in.
• Messages can be sent to individuals with a valid mobile number. A number is valid if it is not blank, includes the country code, and
is opted in.
• SMS messages are not available in the Bulk Quick Send workflow.
• Custom Personalization Interactions are not available for SMS Quick Send messages.
• Delivery status for an SMS message is not available in CRM today, however a log of the SMS messages sent is available when sent
using the Quick Send from Opportunity and Quick Send from Case workflows.
Email Studio March 2020 Release Notes

Review Marketing Cloud Email Studio classic content features retirement plan. And there are improvements to the Domain Verification
notification email.
136
Marketing Cloud Release Notes Journey Builder March 2020 Release Notes
Create Classic Email Retirement Plan

We delivered the highest requested parity features you asked for in Marketing Cloud Content Builder, and now it is time to announce
the retirement of creating and editing emails in Marketing Cloud Email Studio. The creation of classic emails is scheduled for retirement
in all Marketing Cloud Email Studio accounts at the beginning of June 2020. The ability to edit classic emails is scheduled for retirement
in all Marketing Cloud Email Studio accounts in January 2021.
Receive Clearer Domain Verification Emails
Now the Domain Verification notification email is easier to understand and provides clearer next steps. The From Address Management
verification process in Marketing Cloud Setup generates the email.
Create Classic Email Retirement Plan

• Landing Pages
Receive Clearer Domain Verification Emails

Now the Domain Verification notification email is easier to understand and provides clearer next steps. The From Address Management
verification process in Marketing Cloud Setup generates the email.
See Domain Verification for Email Studio.
Journey Builder March 2020 Release Notes

A new journey template helps you target contacts based on behavior and added validation for the Data Extension entry source.
Increase Conversion with the Behavioral Targeting with Audience Studio Template
Use the Behavioral Targeting with Audience Studio template to create journeys that increase conversion and reinforce ad campaigns
through email messages. Use Audience Studio insights to target customers who browse your website but don’t convert. You can
use the template as-is, or modify it to suit your needs.
Validate the Email Address in a Data Extension Entry Source
When you validate a journey that uses a Data Extension as the Entry Source, Journey Builder checks for a field named EmailAddr. If
the field appears in the Data Extension, an error appears. This step prevents you from sending messages to the wrong contact email.
The feature is available to all accounts where Journey Builder is provisioned.
137
Marketing Cloud Release Notes Marketing Cloud Einstein March 2020 Release Notes
Increase Conversion with the Behavioral Targeting with Audience Studio Template
Use the Behavioral Targeting with Audience Studio template to create journeys that increase conversion and reinforce ad campaigns
through email messages. Use Audience Studio insights to target customers who browse your website but don’t convert. You can use
the template as-is, or modify it to suit your needs.
Where: This template is available to users with Journey Builder Create/Edit permissions in accounts where both Journey Builder and
Audience Studio are provisioned.
How: Find the Behavioral Targeting with Audience Studio template on the Marketing Cloud homepage or in the Templates gallery in
Journey Builder. Click the template and follow the steps to configure the entry source and journey activities. Then schedule, validate,
and activate the journey.
Validate the Email Address in a Data Extension Entry Source

When you validate a journey that uses a Data Extension as the Entry Source, Journey Builder checks for a field named EmailAddr. If the
field appears in the Data Extension, an error appears. This step prevents you from sending messages to the wrong contact email. The
feature is available to all accounts where Journey Builder is provisioned.
Why: When the EmailAddr (case insensitive) field appears in a Data Extension for email sending, its value is used as the subscriber's email
address. This system-level behavior occurs regardless of send configuration or field data type.
How: After you create the journey draft, click Validate. If the data extension you selected contains a field named EmailAddr, an error
message appears.
Marketing Cloud Einstein March 2020 Release Notes

Find all Marketing Cloud Einstein apps in one place. Get a comprehensive look at email anomalies now that Einstein Messaging Insights
includes journeys and automations.
10
Find Your Einstein Products in a Single Menu

Einstein Marketing Cloud products are consolidated under the new Einstein navigation menu. And there’s a new overview page to
give you a single view of all your Einstein products.
Get Insights for Email Activities in Journeys
Marketers can comprehensively understand which emails in their journeys perform unusually. Einstein analyzes each journey’s email
activities to identify if a particular email activity’s performance is atypically strong or weak in an active journey.
Get Einstein Messaging Insights for Email in Automations
Einstein Messaging Insights now includes an insight that aggregates and analyzes all emails sent by an automation each day. Einstein
Messaging Insights monitors open rate, click rate and unsubscribe rate for emails sent by an automation. It also analyzes the messages
sent in aggregate to find and report performance and engagement anomalies.
Find Your Einstein Products in a Single Menu

Einstein Marketing Cloud products are consolidated under the new Einstein navigation menu. And there’s a new overview page to give
you a single view of all your Einstein products.
When: This update is available in your instance within a week of the release.
10
138
Marketing Cloud Release Notes Marketing Cloud Mobile Studio March 2020 Release Notes
Why: Consolidating Einstein’s Marketing Cloud products under a single navigation menu facilitates access to Einstein products, spurring
adoption and user awareness.
Get Insights for Email Activities in Journeys

Marketers can comprehensively understand which emails in their journeys perform unusually. Einstein analyzes each journey’s email
activities to identify if a particular email activity’s performance is atypically strong or weak in an active journey.
Why: Open rate, click rate, and unsubscribe rate for individual email activities within journeys are monitored daily. The Messaging Insights
indicator flags performance that deviates from the expected values that Einstein calculates. Notifications appear for journey message
anomalies, and you can follow up on them in the Insights hub.
How: Each email activity insight displays a chart that tracks customer engagement with messages in the journey. To display more or
fewer trend lines, click the chart.
Get Einstein Messaging Insights for Email in Automations

Einstein Messaging Insights now includes an insight that aggregates and analyzes all emails sent by an automation each day. Einstein
Messaging Insights monitors open rate, click rate and unsubscribe rate for emails sent by an automation. It also analyzes the messages
sent in aggregate to find and report performance and engagement anomalies.
Why: Einstein Messaging Insights extends email analysis to emails that Marketing Cloud automations send, giving customers the same
intelligence as with other send methods. Because automation email is analyzed in aggregate, users are unlikely to see anomalies for
automations that run infrequently. For example, when an automation is used to start a send once a week or once a month, Einstein
Messaging Insights does not have data for many days and can’t find anomalies. We plan to improve the way Einstein Messaging Insights
analyzes emails in automations that send messages intermittently.
Marketing Cloud Mobile Studio March 2020 Release Notes

Drive in-app push message engagement with the image fill template. Use the updated Push and In-App Journey Builder Activity Name
to easily find your messages in reports and data extracts. Get delivery receipts for individual SMS sends using the _SMSMessageTracking
data view.
MobileConnect March 2020 Release Notes

Get delivery receipts for individual SMS sends using the _SMSMessageTracking data view.
MobilePush March 2020 Release Notes
Drive in-app push message engagement with the image fill template. Use the updated Push and In-App Journey Builder Activity
Name to easily find your messages in reports and data extracts.
MobilePush SDK March 2020 Release Notes
The latest version of the Marketing Cloud MobilePush SDK allows you to use image fill for in-app messages. It also includes a name
change for Personalization Builder-related documentation.
MobileConnect March 2020 Release Notes

Get delivery receipts for individual SMS sends using the _SMSMessageTracking data view.
Track Delivery Receipts in SMS Data Views

You can track SMS delivery receipts for individual messages with the _SMSMessageTracking Data View. Delivery statuses are now
universal for sending into all markets.
139
Marketing Cloud Release Notes Marketing Cloud Mobile Studio March 2020 Release Notes
Track Delivery Receipts in SMS Data Views

You can track SMS delivery receipts for individual messages with the _SMSMessageTracking Data View. Delivery statuses are now universal
for sending into all markets.
How: Query the SMSMessageTracking data view in Automation Studio. The delivery receipt information is returned automatically.
MobilePush March 2020 Release Notes

Drive in-app push message engagement with the image fill template. Use the updated Push and In-App Journey Builder Activity Name
to easily find your messages in reports and data extracts.
Drive In-App Engagement with Image Fill

Customers who use MobilePush and Journey Builder can now use our full-page In-App template to create engaging messages in
Content Builder and Journey Builder.
Find Your Push and In-App Analytics Faster with the Updated Message Name
When you use MobilePush with Journey Builder, you have full control of your Push and In-App message name. Push and In-App
messages sent through Journey Builder now use the Activity Name as the Message Name in all reports and data extracts. The Activity
Name gets populated with the content name, but you can edit it in the activity.
Drive In-App Engagement with Image Fill

Customers who use MobilePush and Journey Builder can now use our full-page In-App template to create engaging messages in Content
Builder and Journey Builder.
Why: With this update, images fill a larger portion of the screen to drive users to engage with your app. Previously, our full-page in-app
template cropped images to a 16:9 aspect ratio.
How: First, update to the latest MobilePush iOS and Android SDK after the March 2020 release. Then, when you create an in-app message
in Content Builder or Journey Builder, select Full-Page and then select Fill Image.
Find Your Push and In-App Analytics Faster with the Updated Message Name
When you use MobilePush with Journey Builder, you have full control of your Push and In-App message name. Push and In-App messages
sent through Journey Builder now use the Activity Name as the Message Name in all reports and data extracts. The Activity Name gets
populated with the content name, but you can edit it in the activity.
Why:Previously, customers reported that the unique identifier used for Reporting ID was too unique to identify their messages in
reporting.
How: The Reporting ID no longer appears for new activities and copies or new versions of existing activities using Content Builder
content. Existing and running journeys do not show this change. For all new Journey Builder Push and In-App activities created after
the March 2020 release, the Reporting ID is no longer populated, and your Activity Name shows in reports, data extracts, and the
MobilePush Overview screen as the Message Name. This change also applies to any copies or new versions of a journey post-release.
Table 1: What to Expect with Older Push and In-App Activities

Use Case Post-Release Behavior
Journey Activated Prior to Release • Running journeys activities continue to use Reporting ID.
• Reporting ID is present only on the read-only summary view
of the Activity.
140
Marketing Cloud Release Notes Marketing Cloud Trailhead March 2020 Release Notes
• When the Activity is copied or versioned, Reporting ID is not

present.
• Reselect the new version or copy, and the new version shows
the new naming format. Reporting ID is not present.
Draft Journey Created Before the Release and Activated After • Reselect the content, and new naming format is used.
the Release
• Reporting ID is not present.
New Journeys Created After Release • Reporting ID is not present.

• New activities use the new naming format.
MobilePush SDK March 2020 Release Notes

The latest version of the Marketing Cloud MobilePush SDK allows you to use image fill for in-app messages. It also includes a name
change for Personalization Builder-related documentation.
When: Version 7.1.0 of the MobilePush SDK is available as of March 23, 2020.
• Update MobilePush SDK to Support Image Fill for Full-Page In-App Messages—Currently, the full-page in-app message
template crops images to a 16:9 aspect ratio. With this update, images can fill a larger portion of the screen and drive engagement
with your app. Update to the March release of the MobilePush SDK to support image fill for full-page in-app messages. Image fill is
available to customers with MobilePush and Journey Builder.
• Changed Personalization Builder to Einstein Recommendations in SDK Documentation—This change affects only the
documentation. It doesn’t require any code changes.
Marketing Cloud Trailhead March 2020 Release Notes

Get familiar with Salesforce or discover a new feature with Trailhead, a fun, guided interactive tool. You can follow learning paths for
admins or developers, or choose your own adventure with self-paced modules.
Check out Trailhead at https://trailhead.salesforce.com, and find the right trails for you. Here are the latest Marketing Cloud trails and
modules.
Modules and Trails

App Messaging with MobilePush
Create and send push notifications and location-based messages in Marketing Cloud.
Artificial Intelligence in Social Media
Track and analyze social sentiment and images using AI in Social Studio.
Mobile Messaging Strategies
Maximize your mobile marketing with SMS, app, Facebook, and LINE messages.
141
Marketing Cloud Release Notes Marketing Cloud Platform March 2020 Release Notes
Marketing Cloud Platform March 2020 Release Notes

Add a brand to your Marketing Cloud account and improve your interaction with our REST API with the March 2020 Marketing Cloud
Platform release.
Create New Brands for Your Marketing Cloud Account with BrandBuilder
Update your Marketing Cloud account brand with BrandBuilder without resorting to a Salesforce Customer Support case. Update
your default profile and your subscription and unsubscribe center to align with your brand. Create a brand directly in your account.
Reduce the amount of time necessary to set up your account. You can always change your brand whenever you want.
Transactional Messaging API Handles Primary Key Constraint on Triggered Send Data Extensions
The transactional messaging API now prevents situations that caused entire batches of messages to get stuck in the sending the
queue.
Activate and Edit Parameter Strings
Now it’s easier to activate and update web analytics strings via Parameter Manager.
Personalization Builder API Documentation Name Change
The Personalization Builder API documentation is renamed to the Einstein Recommendations API. All requests within the Personalization
Builder API library are the same, and the endpoint for the request calls is the same. This change does not affect your existing code.
Add Up to Three SFTP Accounts Per MID
This release allows you to add up to three FTP accounts per MID. Create or delete these users in the Setup section of your account
on your own. Restrict account access by specifying the IP addresses a user can access the account from.
Discontinue Standard FTP Usage
We plan to remove standard FTP as an option for existing customers in March 2020. Use SFTP functionality for all Marketing
Cloud-related FTP activities.
Create New Brands for Your Marketing Cloud Account with BrandBuilder
Update your Marketing Cloud account brand with BrandBuilder without resorting to a Salesforce Customer Support case. Update your
default profile and your subscription and unsubscribe center to align with your brand. Create a brand directly in your account. Reduce
the amount of time necessary to set up your account. You can always change your brand whenever you want.
Set the brand at the top-level account in your tenant, then associate that brand with your other business units. This change applies to
all Marketing Cloud accounts with this release.
Access Marketing Cloud BrandBuilder via Setup in the Company Settings section.
Transactional Messaging API Handles Primary Key Constraint on Triggered Send Data
Extensions
The transactional messaging API now prevents situations that caused entire batches of messages to get stuck in the sending the queue.
Now, an individual subscriber is marked as NotSent and the queue continues processing other messages if both of the following conditions
are met:
• A transactional send definition contains a triggered send data extension with one or more primary key columns.
• You pass a duplicate subscriber attribute into the transactional messaging API.
142
Marketing Cloud Release Notes Personalization Builder March 2020 Release Notes
How: Here is the specific error message you receive from a GET /messaging/v1/email/messages/{key} request:
{
"requestId": "69c712d1-2baa-4cdb-9eee-19c5a8d2b9d2",
"statusCode": 21,
"statusMessage": "DuplicateDataExtensionRow",
"eventCategoryType": "TransactionalSendEvents.EmailNotSent",
"timestamp": "2020-02-10T15:56:15.333"
}
Activate and Edit Parameter Strings

Now it’s easier to activate and update web analytics strings via Parameter Manager.
How: To activate, deactivate, and edit strings, navigate to Parameter Manager in Marketing Cloud Setup. Click Edit to edit your string,
then save. Deactivate and reactivate parameter strings in the same place.
Personalization Builder API Documentation Name Change

The Personalization Builder API documentation is renamed to the Einstein Recommendations API. All requests within the Personalization
Builder API library are the same, and the endpoint for the request calls is the same. This change does not affect your existing code.
Add Up to Three SFTP Accounts Per MID

This release allows you to add up to three FTP accounts per MID. Create or delete these users in the Setup section of your account on
your own. Restrict account access by specifying the IP addresses a user can access the account from.
This new feature gives you the flexibility to assign different users to different business units as needed.
Discontinue Standard FTP Usage

We plan to remove standard FTP as an option for existing customers in March 2020. Use SFTP functionality for all Marketing Cloud-related
FTP activities.
Personalization Builder March 2020 Release Notes

Enable Einstein Email Recommendations and Einstein Web Recommendations to use specific data characteristics with one-character or
two-character values.
Configure Tag Scenarios for One- or Two-Character Values

To offer Einstein Email Recommendations and Einstein Web Recommendations that have a specific data characteristic, enter
one-character or two-character values for specific tag scenarios.
Configure Tag Scenarios for One- or Two-Character Values

To offer Einstein Email Recommendations and Einstein Web Recommendations that have a specific data characteristic, enter one-character
or two-character values for specific tag scenarios.
When: This feature is now generally available to Einstein Email Recommendations and Einstein Web Recommendations users.
143
Marketing Cloud Release Notes Web Studio March 2020 Release Notes
Why: Some customers configure catalog data without knowing that only values of three or more characters are eligible for specific tag
scenarios.
Web Studio March 2020 Release Notes

Create a landing page to use with the Content Builder Email Form block.
Create a Landing Page to Use with Content Builder Email Forms

The new CloudPages Interactive Email page is a landing page for subscribers who submit an email form built with the Content
Builder Email Form block.
Create a Landing Page to Use with Content Builder Email Forms

The new CloudPages Interactive Email page is a landing page for subscribers who submit an email form built with the Content Builder
Email Form block.
Who: The Interactive Email page is for marketers when they use the new Email Form block in Content Builder.
How: Create the Interactive Email page from the page creation menu in your content collection.
See Create an Interactive Email Page.

The January 2020 Marketing Cloud and Social Studio release occurs on January 25, 2020. Some features are made available to your
Get an exclusive, in-depth look at our new features by tuning into the January 2020 Marketing Cloud Release New Feature Overview.
Join this webinar on February 6 at 11:00 AM CST!
Release Highlights
• Datorama Data Lake
• Datorama Marketing Assistant
• Audience Studio Consent Management Enhancements
• Instagram Mobile Story Publishing
• Einstein Messaging Insights
• Einstein Copy Insights
• Distributed Marketing Quick Send Enhancements
• January 2020 Top Feature Demos
144
• January 2020 Release FAQ

.
Release Edits
January 7, 2020 Modified Interaction Studio release note topic on Granular

Permissions to add that the feature was live as January 6, 2020.
January 13, 2020 Fixed title for Logo Removal Release Note
January 13, 2020 Added new Remove Personal Accounts in Social Studio topic.
January 21, 2020 Added estimated release date for MobilePush SDK.
January 21, 2020 Removed Manage Google My Business Location Pages with
Engagement Groups in Social Studio topic. This feature won’t be
available in the January release.
January 23, 2020 Updated the available dates of Einstein Copy Insights, Einstein
Messaging Insights, and Einstein Send Time Optimization.
January 26, 2020 Added links to release documentation.
January 28, 2020 Added release highlights and demo information.
February 4, 2020 Clarified that the 500 send definition limit applies to triggered send
definitions.
February 5, 2020 Added explanation of custom role permissions
February 6, 2020 Added a Marketing Cloud Platform release note about copying
registered domains to child business units via API.
February 6, 2020 Updated estimated release date for MobilePush SDK.
February 27, 2020 Updated the actual release date for MobilePush SDK.
February 28, 2020 Updated JB permissions release note to reflect a post-release patch.
March 2, 2020 Removed note regarding multiple FTP users
March 31, 2020 Updated the estimated release date for the new Event Notification
Service email engagement events.
May 21, 2020 Removed the estimated release date for the new Event Notification
Service email engagement events because this feature is released.
Advertising Studio January 2020 Release Notes

Introducing an enhancement to the Lead Capture dashboard.
Campaigns January 2020 Release Notes
View end of life announcement for Campaigns in Marketing Cloud.
145
Contact Builder January 2020 Release Notes

A new column for Record Count is available in data extensions, channel labels are updated in the Contacts view to align with
standards, and performance is enhanced for Synchronized Data Extensions by removing the Select All option.
Content Builder January 2020 Release Notes
View enhanced features for Sitecore Connect, nested tags, and content library.
Distributed Marketing January 2020 Release Notes
You can now use multivariate content blocks, use custom personalization interactions in quick send workflows, send from the record
owner, and send batches of 500 in Campaign Sends. You’ll see enhancements to the admin experience, the editing experience, and
updated authentication for tenant specific endpoints as well. These features are scheduled to be released to non-production
environments on February 2, 2020. Learn More.
Email Studio January 2020 Release Notes
SMS Interactions in Salesforce Marketing Cloud Email Studio was retired on September 30, 2019. Review the new Marketing Cloud
Email Studio email’s features retirement plan.
Interaction Studio January 2020 Release Notes
Gain control of user management with more granular user permissions. Mobile SDK updates include the latest iOS and Android SDK
features. And there are improvements in Journey Builder Interaction Studio Splits and new ways to filter data for better decision
making.
Journey Builder January 2020 Release Notes
Manage single send messages in Journey Builder.
Inform your campaigns with deep marketing intelligence. Use Einstein Marketing Insights to discover factors that change subscriber
behavior in your batch or journey sends. Then, dig into the components and tone of your subject lines with Einstein Copy Insights.
And define a custom email send window in Journey Builder’s Einstein STO (Send Time Optimization) activity.
Marketing Cloud Mobile Studio January 2020 Release Notes
Import contacts into GroupConnect with the Contact Builder Import Wizard and via API, and delete unwanted LINE messages. Access
MobileConnect Admin pages from Marketing Cloud Setup, and associate campaigns with SMS activities in Journey Builder. Use the
updated SMS Journey Builder Activity Name to easily find your messages in reports and data extracts. Activate rich media notifications
in MobilePush Administration, and pre-compile your subscribers before your push message sends.
Marketing Cloud Platform January 2020 Release Notes
Access MobileConnect features in Setup, add SFTP user accounts, import and export automations between accounts in Deployment
Manager, and more with the January 2020 Marketing Cloud Platform release.
Microsoft Dynamics CRM Connector January 2020 Release Notes
We are ending support for Microsoft Dynamics CRM Connector 2011 as of January 30, 2020.
Web Studio January 2020 Release Notes
Manage user permissions and roles for Marketing Cloud CloudPages.
Social Intelligence Module January 2020 Release Notes
You now can access data in the Personal Social Manager right from your mobile phone. And you can interact on Twitter based on
Social Intelligence Module data. You can create Salesforce tasks, leads, and contacts from the Twitter posts. You can use category
keywords from French, Italian, and Spanish posts.
Social Studio January 2020 Release Notes
Create Instagram stories in Social Studio and publish them with a mobile phone. See the details of how the European Copyright
Directive affects Marketing Cloud social products: Social Studio, Social Studio Automate, Social Studio Mobile, and Command Center.
Use Engagement Groups to organize many Google My Business locations pages into groups to use and monitor them more easily.
And you can use Instagram hashtags as a data source in Command Center.
146
Marketing Cloud Release Notes Advertising Studio January 2020 Release Notes
Advertising Studio January 2020 Release Notes

Introducing an enhancement to the Lead Capture dashboard.
Updates to the Lead Capture Dashboard

Users can now sort, search, filter, receive notifications, and reauthenticate directly from the Lead Capture dashboard. The Lead
Capture app is available to all clients from AppExchange.
Updates to the Lead Capture Dashboard

Users can now sort, search, filter, receive notifications, and reauthenticate directly from the Lead Capture dashboard. The Lead Capture
app is available to all clients from AppExchange.
See Lead Capture in Advertising Studio.
Campaigns January 2020 Release Notes

View end of life announcement for Campaigns in Marketing Cloud.
Campaign Approvals End of Life

Marketing Cloud Campaigns Approvals is retired with the January 2020 release. Use Content Builder Approvals to approve emails.
Campaign Approvals End of Life

Marketing Cloud Campaigns Approvals is retired with the January 2020 release. Use Content Builder Approvals to approve emails.
Contact Builder January 2020 Release Notes

A new column for Record Count is available in data extensions, channel labels are updated in the Contacts view to align with standards,
and performance is enhanced for Synchronized Data Extensions by removing the Select All option.
Label Changes in All Contacts View

Channel name label changes on the filter sidebar within All Contacts page now align with the respective Marketing Cloud messaging
channel name.
Record Count Column Included in Contact Builder Data Extensions
A new column called Record Count is available in Contact Builder on the Data Extensions page.
Synchronized Data Extensions Remove Select All Checkbox
To enhance synchronized data performance, the Select All option allowing users to select all fields for an object on the select entity
screen was removed.
Label Changes in All Contacts View

Channel name label changes on the filter sidebar within All Contacts page now align with the respective Marketing Cloud messaging
channel name.
147
Marketing Cloud Release Notes Content Builder January 2020 Release Notes
To standardize message channel types with the Marketing Cloud channel product name, these items have been updated. However,
email labels remain the same. All contact builder customers see label changes on the left-hand filter section in Contact Builder > All
Contacts.
1. SMS label is now MobileConnect
2. Push label is now MobilePush
3. OTT label is now GroupConnect
Record Count Column Included in Contact Builder Data Extensions

A new column called Record Count is available in Contact Builder on the Data Extensions page.
The Record Count column is accessible in the Data Extensions grid.
Synchronized Data Extensions Remove Select All Checkbox

To enhance synchronized data performance, the Select All option allowing users to select all fields for an object on the select entity
screen was removed.
As a best practice, select the least number of fields for sending and personalization needs with a maximum of 250 fields. By removing
the Select All feature, we can keep synchronized data performing at it’s best.
Content Builder January 2020 Release Notes

View enhanced features for Sitecore Connect, nested tags, and content library.
Add Nested Tags from the Content Builder Library

The October 2019 release introduced nested tags, which you can add from the Content Builder editor. You can now add tags from
the Content Builder library by selecting an asset and clicking the tag icon.
Build Messages with Sitecore Content Hub Content
Sitecore Connect allows you to build Content Builder messages with images stored in Sitecore Content Hub (StyleLabs). The connector
installs the Sitecore Content Hub Connect custom content block, which you drag in a message and select your Sitecore images.
Display Fallback Icon for Asset Thumbnails
You now can see a fallback icon for each asset type if an asset thumbnail isn’t rendered in the Marketing Cloud Content Builder
library.
Enable Layout Tab Configuration to Edit and Create Layouts
The January 2020 release enforces the Layout Tab configuration for Marketing Cloud Content Builder. Before the release, you could
create layouts from Create menu and edit them in emails even when the permission was disabled. After the release, ensure that
the permission is enabled to continue creating and editing layouts.
Add Nested Tags from the Content Builder Library

The October 2019 release introduced nested tags, which you can add from the Content Builder editor. You can now add tags from the
Content Builder library by selecting an asset and clicking the tag icon.
See Nested Tags.
148
Marketing Cloud Release Notes Distributed Marketing January 2020 Release Notes
Build Messages with Sitecore Content Hub Content

Sitecore Connect allows you to build Content Builder messages with images stored in Sitecore Content Hub (StyleLabs). The connector
installs the Sitecore Content Hub Connect custom content block, which you drag in a message and select your Sitecore images.
Why: With Sitecore Content Hub you can fully manage your digital assets. You can manage assets across multiple versions, assets that
expire after a predetermined time, and digital rights. Now you can build Content Builder messages with those assets.
When: Sitecore Connect was available in AppExchange in November 2019.
Who: This feature is available for customer who purchased Sitecore Connect for Salesforce Marketing Cloud. See the AppExchange listing
for more details.
See Sitecore Content Hub Connect Custom Block.
Display Fallback Icon for Asset Thumbnails

You now can see a fallback icon for each asset type if an asset thumbnail isn’t rendered in the Marketing Cloud Content Builder library.
Enable Layout Tab Configuration to Edit and Create Layouts

The January 2020 release enforces the Layout Tab configuration for Marketing Cloud Content Builder. Before the release, you could create
layouts from Create menu and edit them in emails even when the permission was disabled. After the release, ensure that the permission
is enabled to continue creating and editing layouts.
See Content Builder Administration.
Distributed Marketing January 2020 Release Notes

You can now use multivariate content blocks, use custom personalization interactions in quick send workflows, send from the record
owner, and send batches of 500 in Campaign Sends. You’ll see enhancements to the admin experience, the editing experience, and
updated authentication for tenant specific endpoints as well. These features are scheduled to be released to non-production
environments on February 2, 2020. Learn More.
Editing Experience Updates

We listened to your feedback and made some changes to the enhanced Distributed Marketing editing experience introduced in the
previous release.
Multivariate Content Block
Use the new Distributed Marketing Multivariate Content block to allow business users to select from content variations in addition
to interacting with specific sections of the email.
Quick sends are now more powerful for both marketers and business users. Marketers can amp up the journeys powering quick
sends by including multiple non-message journey activities, plugging the power of Journey Builder into these simple sends.
Additionally, business users can now send a message to up to 25,000 individuals at once by using list views. Bulk send is enabled
upon customer request, and will be made generally available in a future release.
Say Hello to Your New Admin Experience
We aligned Distributed Marketing administration with the standard Salesforce setup paradigm, making Distributed Marketing easier
to maintain and configure.
149
Send Batches of 500 in Campaign Sends

Business users that send messages through the Campaign Send workflow can now personalize and send to batches of 500 at once.
Previously, the maximum was 250 messages.
Send from Record Owner
Business Users can now send from the record owner instead of themselves, the running user. Distributed Marketing admins can
enable this in the new Email Header section in Distributed Marketing Administration.
Updated Authentication for Tenant Specific Endpoints
Distributed Marketing uses the updated authentication mechanism leveraging Marketing Cloud Tenant Specific Endpoints (TSE) as
the standard for all of our customers.
Use Custom Personalization Interactions in Quick Send Workflows
Distributed Marketing offers different collaborative content areas by default. Customers can now use custom personalization
interactions (CPIs) to provide additional personalization options for users such as modifying subject lines, carbon copying, or blind
copying recipients. For this release, CPIs are also available in most Quick Send workflows.
Editing Experience Updates

We listened to your feedback and made some changes to the enhanced Distributed Marketing editing experience introduced in the
previous release.
Considerations
All functionality is still there, but now it’s easier to find:
• Send Settings is on the bottom of the left-hand side tab panel.
• Distributed Marketing content block names appear when you edit content.
Multivariate Content Block

Use the new Distributed Marketing Multivariate Content block to allow business users to select from content variations in addition to
interacting with specific sections of the email.
Considerations
• Marketers can enable 12 options per block with a maximum of 80 characters per option.
• Variable names can contain up to 50 alphanumeric characters with no spaces or special characters.
• Business users interact with this block in the same way that they interact with text and image blocks, by clicking the content area
to open the editing experience.
• Marketers can use multiple Multivariate content blocks in an email.
These examples provide some simple ways you can use the multivariate content block.
Example: For organizations with both individual agents and teams of agents, create a single email template that has two versions
of the email’s body copy: one in singular and one in plural. Then, let your agent pick which version to send based on whether
they’re acting alone or as part of a team.
Example: Use dynamic content to automatically render an email with the recipient’s preferred language, and you can also give
this option to your business users. Users select from a list of supported languages for individuals or groups of individuals.
150
Example: For organizations that favor locked down content over user-created content, give your users more flexibility without
risk by creating different versions of the email body copy. For example, create a formal, brief, and friendly version for users to choose
from.

Quick sends are now more powerful for both marketers and business users. Marketers can amp up the journeys powering quick sends
by including multiple non-message journey activities, plugging the power of Journey Builder into these simple sends. Additionally,
business users can now send a message to up to 25,000 individuals at once by using list views. Bulk send is enabled upon customer
request, and will be made generally available in a future release.
As an example of the new quick send power, you can add an Engagement Split activity and Task activity to prompt the business user
to follow up with a phone call, or resend the email based on recipient engagement.
Considerations
• Quick Send must still contain a single Send Email activity and allow contact re-entry.
• When enabled, the bulk send option is available on the Audience component when using the Quick Send from Message workflow.
Note: Bulk Send is enabled upon customer request, and will be made generally available in a future release. You can request
access here: https://forms.gle/jc3RGFaWbxdh5fTP7
• Any modification the business user makes in a bulk send applies to all individuals. The behavior is the same as when a user selects
multiple individuals in a campaign send and makes a change.
• Users can preview content for the first 10 results of the list view.
• The standard Salesforce limits of 2,000 results are shown on the screen during list view creation. However, users can view all targeted
recipients by navigating to the Bulk Send Batch object before sending.
• Manual approvals are not supported when performing a bulk send.
• Restricted words are supported.
• Custom Personalization Interactions are not supported when performing a bulk send.
• Extending entry source data is supported.
Say Hello to Your New Admin Experience

We aligned Distributed Marketing administration with the standard Salesforce setup paradigm, making Distributed Marketing easier to
maintain and configure.
Send Batches of 500 in Campaign Sends

Business users that send messages through the Campaign Send workflow can now personalize and send to batches of 500 at once.
Previously, the maximum was 250 messages.
Send from Record Owner

Business Users can now send from the record owner instead of themselves, the running user. Distributed Marketing admins can enable
this in the new Email Header section in Distributed Marketing Administration.
To set up the Send From options follow these instructions: Administer the Email Header
151
Marketing Cloud Release Notes Email Studio January 2020 Release Notes
Updated Authentication for Tenant Specific Endpoints

Distributed Marketing uses the updated authentication mechanism leveraging Marketing Cloud Tenant Specific Endpoints (TSE) as the
standard for all of our customers.
Existing customers can update any connected business units to apply the new authentication mechanism without disrupting any active
campaigns or quick send messages. All new connections use this authentication mechanism automatically.
Use Custom Personalization Interactions in Quick Send Workflows

Distributed Marketing offers different collaborative content areas by default. Customers can now use custom personalization interactions
(CPIs) to provide additional personalization options for users such as modifying subject lines, carbon copying, or blind copying recipients.
For this release, CPIs are also available in most Quick Send workflows.
Considerations
• CPIs are not available when you perform a bulk quick send.
• The same CPI experience is displayed across all editing experiences. Check to see that CPIs do not expect data that’s specific to
campaigns or campaign members to operate because the data may not be unavailable.
Email Studio January 2020 Release Notes

SMS Interactions in Salesforce Marketing Cloud Email Studio was retired on September 30, 2019. Review the new Marketing Cloud Email
Studio email’s features retirement plan.
Copy Registered Domains in From Address Management

Domain Registration in Marketing Cloud From Address Management requires a DNS entry to a customer’s DNS server. It also requires
a separate DNS entry for each business unit. To allow customers to use email domains across the entire enterprise, you can now
copy a registered domain to multiple business units in From Address Management.
Create Classic Email End of Life
SMS Interactions End of Life
SMS Interactions in Salesforce Marketing Cloud Email Studio was retired on September 30, 2019.
Approvals Classic End of Life
Approvals Classic in Marketing Cloud Email Studio is retired with the January 2020 release. Use Content Builder Approvals to approve
emails.
Classic Live Content End of Life
The creation of classic live content in Marketing Cloud Email Studio is retired with the January 2020 release. Use Content Builder
partner blocks or the Content Builder Block SDK to create live content.
152
Marketing Cloud Release Notes Interaction Studio January 2020 Release Notes

Domain Registration in Marketing Cloud From Address Management requires a DNS entry to a customer’s DNS server. It also requires a
separate DNS entry for each business unit. To allow customers to use email domains across the entire enterprise, you can now copy a
registered domain to multiple business units in From Address Management.
When: Copy Registered Domains is available after February 5, 2020.
Who: This feature is available to all Marketing Cloud Admins.
Create Classic Email End of Life

• Landing Pages
SMS Interactions End of Life

SMS Interactions in Salesforce Marketing Cloud Email Studio was retired on September 30, 2019.
Where: SMS Interactions was a way to send Mobile Originated and Mobile Terminated SMS messages from Email Studio within Salesforce
Marketing Cloud.
Why: To eliminate duplicative systems, we retired SMS Interactions. MobileConnect supports a wider set of SMS use cases, and is easier
to use.
Approvals Classic End of Life

Approvals Classic in Marketing Cloud Email Studio is retired with the January 2020 release. Use Content Builder Approvals to approve
emails.
Classic Live Content End of Life

The creation of classic live content in Marketing Cloud Email Studio is retired with the January 2020 release. Use Content Builder partner
blocks or the Content Builder Block SDK to create live content.
Interaction Studio January 2020 Release Notes

Gain control of user management with more granular user permissions. Mobile SDK updates include the latest iOS and Android SDK
features. And there are improvements in Journey Builder Interaction Studio Splits and new ways to filter data for better decision making.
153
Marketing Cloud Release Notes Interaction Studio January 2020 Release Notes
Manage User Permissions in Interaction Studio

You can now set more detailed permissions for all Interaction Studio users. You can give large corporations that use Marketing Cloud
Interaction Studio admin access and vary their permissions. Current users get permitted automatically, and you can remove their
permissions in MC Setup. You can configure new user permissions manually.
Improved to Mobile SDK for Interaction Studio
The January Mobile SDK release brings enhancements to the mobile SDK Interaction Studio for iOS and Android. Now iOS 13 supports
integrations with customer-built iOS 13 applications. SDK has improved offline insights capture, and URL redirects are removed.
Android SDK aligns with Google’s latest platform, improving UI configuration of interaction detection. These changes are available
to all Marketing Cloud Interaction Studio users.
Improved Journey Builder Interaction Studio Decision Splits
Marketing Cloud Interaction Studio improves the user experience in Journey Builder’s Interaction Studio Split. A new tabbed design
makes it easier to navigate to the correct split. You can select a touchpoint and add mapped or fixed context for better decision
making.
Make Better Decisions with Filtered Data in Interaction Studio
You now can use a fixed key value in a Datastore to set the primary key in Marketing Cloud Interaction Studio. Your users can convert
a captured data string to a date type in the expression editor. Now there is fixed key support in Datastores and a convert-to-date
function in the expression editor. You can access these changes in Marketing Cloud Interaction Studio.
Manage User Permissions in Interaction Studio

You can now set more detailed permissions for all Interaction Studio users. You can give large corporations that use Marketing Cloud
Interaction Studio admin access and vary their permissions. Current users get permitted automatically, and you can remove their
permissions in MC Setup. You can configure new user permissions manually.
This Interaction Studio feature went live on January 6, 2020.
SEE ALSO:
Granular Permissions in Interaction Studio (Legacy)
Improved to Mobile SDK for Interaction Studio

The January Mobile SDK release brings enhancements to the mobile SDK Interaction Studio for iOS and Android. Now iOS 13 supports
integrations with customer-built iOS 13 applications. SDK has improved offline insights capture, and URL redirects are removed. Android
SDK aligns with Google’s latest platform, improving UI configuration of interaction detection. These changes are available to all Marketing
Cloud Interaction Studio users.
iOS Mobile SDK Updates
Feature Description
iOS 13 support Updated iOS SDK supports integrations with customer applications built on iOS 13.
Improved Offline Insights Capture Locally store customer attributes when you can’t get a connection to Interaction Studio. Customer
attributes are passed to Interaction Studio upon connection.
Removed Use of URL Redirects To prevent Apple’s Intelligent Tracking Prevention (ITP) from classifying Interaction Studio as an ad
tracker, URL redirects aren’t used. The classification can occur when a user transitions from mobile
to mobile web on their device.
154
Marketing Cloud Release Notes Journey Builder January 2020 Release Notes
Android Mobile SDK Updates

Android SDK now aligns with Google’s latest platform updates to provide improvements that users can configure in the UI without
knowing any code.
SEE ALSO:
External Link: Integrate the Android SDK for Interaction Studio in your App
External Link: Integrate the iOS SDK for Interaction Studio in your App
Improved Journey Builder Interaction Studio Decision Splits

Marketing Cloud Interaction Studio improves the user experience in Journey Builder’s Interaction Studio Split. A new tabbed design
makes it easier to navigate to the correct split. You can select a touchpoint and add mapped or fixed context for better decision making.
SEE ALSO:
Configure an Interaction Studio (Legacy) Journey Builder Split
Make Better Decisions with Filtered Data in Interaction Studio

You now can use a fixed key value in a Datastore to set the primary key in Marketing Cloud Interaction Studio. Your users can convert a
captured data string to a date type in the expression editor. Now there is fixed key support in Datastores and a convert-to-date function
in the expression editor. You can access these changes in Marketing Cloud Interaction Studio.
SEE ALSO:
Data Transfer Considerations in Interaction Studio (Legacy)
Transfer Data to an Interaction Studio (Legacy) Datastore
Journey Builder January 2020 Release Notes

Manage single send messages in Journey Builder.
Create, Send, and Monitor Single Send Journeys from Journey Builder
Increase visibility across campaigns and efficiencies in navigation when you manage and track Single Send and Multi-Step journeys
from a unified workspace. Send single email messages to a batch audience from a streamlined user experience in Journey Builder.
Schedule Single Send journeys for a future date and time or send immediately.
Honor Marketing Cloud User Permissions in Journey Builder
With the January 2020 release, individual user permissions granted in the Marketing Cloud Setup app supersede permissions set in
the Journey Builder app. This update prevents you from unintentionally of granting users access to features that are denied in their
Marketing Cloud permissions. This enhancement is generally available in all editions where Journey Builder is supported. No additional
provisioning steps are required.
Create, Send, and Monitor Single Send Journeys from Journey Builder
Increase visibility across campaigns and efficiencies in navigation when you manage and track Single Send and Multi-Step journeys from
a unified workspace. Send single email messages to a batch audience from a streamlined user experience in Journey Builder. Schedule
Single Send journeys for a future date and time or send immediately.
155
Where: To create a new Single Send, click Create New
.yenruoJ
Why: This feature enables you to:
• Learn Journey Builder through a streamlined experience for simpler sends to more quickly increase sophistication through Multi-Step
journeys.
• Manage Single Send and Multi-Step journeys from a unified workspace to increase visibility across campaigns and streamline
navigation.
• Simplify new team member onboarding with a unified user experience for both types of sends.
When: This feature is available with the January 2020 release in all editions where Journey Builder is supported: Corporate, Enterprise,
and Pro (as add on). No additional provisioning steps required.
How: In Journey Builder, click Create New Journey, and select the Single Send - Email option.
Note: Journey Builder throughput guidelines apply to Single Send and Multi-Step journeys.
For more details, visit Single Send Journeys in Journey Builder. For updated API information related to Single Send, review the developer
documentation at Single-Send Journeys.
Honor Marketing Cloud User Permissions in Journey Builder

With the January 2020 release, individual user permissions granted in the Marketing Cloud Setup app supersede permissions set in the
Journey Builder app. This update prevents you from unintentionally of granting users access to features that are denied in their Marketing
Cloud permissions. This enhancement is generally available in all editions where Journey Builder is supported. No additional provisioning
steps are required.
What: Journey Builder user permissions no longer take precedence over Marketing Cloud user permission settings. This update can
cause some current Journey Builder users to lose sufficient permissions to complete an action they were previously able to complete. If
the user does not have sufficient permissions, they receive a contextual error message in the app.
156
How: To resolve this issue, grant the Marketing Cloud Administrator role to the user. For more details about roles and permissions, see
Journey Builder Roles. You can also grant the explicit permissions necessary to configure each activity.
Features Required Marketing Cloud Permission
• Decision Split • Email > Subscribers > Data Extension > View
• Wait by Attribute • Salesforce Marketing Cloud > Contacts > Read Contact Data
• Update Contact • Email > Subscribers > Data Extension > View
• Email > Subscribers > List > View
Engagement Split • Email > Content > Email > View

• Content Builder > Assets > View
Entry Sources • Email > Subscribers > Data Extension > View
• Data Extension • Email > Subscribers > List > View
• API Event • Salesforce Marketing Cloud > Contacts > Read Contact Data
• Transactional API Event
• Contact Event
157
Features Required Marketing Cloud Permission
• Goal • Email > Subscribers > Data Extension > View

• Exit Criteria • Salesforce Marketing Cloud > Contacts > Read Contacts Data
• Default Email
• Default Mobile Number
For more details, see Permissions for Journey Builder.

Inform your campaigns with deep marketing intelligence. Use Einstein Marketing Insights to discover factors that change subscriber
behavior in your batch or journey sends. Then, dig into the components and tone of your subject lines with Einstein Copy Insights. And
define a custom email send window in Journey Builder’s Einstein STO (Send Time Optimization) activity.
Unlock the Impact of Your Email Subject Lines

The Einstein Copy Insights dashboard collects language-related insights derived from email subject line data to help optimize
engagement in your email campaigns. It includes analytics such as high performing and most used subject lines and phrases. Einstein
Copy Insights uses machine learning and statistics to identify language features related to punctuation, tone, and other aspects, and
assesses their impact on open rate.
Understand Send Performance Anomalies with Einstein
Einstein now proactively monitors your email sends for unusual anomalies in performance. Each day, Einstein Messaging Insights
assesses your sends’ performance, focusing on Open Rate, Click Rate. and Unsubscribe Rate. It then points out when these rates fall
outside of the boundaries that Einstein predicted. A new notification system makes these insights easy to find and read from anywhere
in Marketing Cloud. The Einstein Messaging Insights app hosts all your email performance insights for the last 90 days.
Set a Custom STO Send Window
Einstein Send Time Optimization (STO) now lets you select the best window of time for your email send. Selecting a custom window
provides flexibility when you’re sending shorter promotional campaign sends or observe 2–6 day windows. You can also control
how Einstein STO handles contacts who don’t have enough data to create a personalized model by setting a default for unmodeled
contacts.
Unlock the Impact of Your Email Subject Lines

The Einstein Copy Insights dashboard collects language-related insights derived from email subject line data to help optimize engagement
in your email campaigns. It includes analytics such as high performing and most used subject lines and phrases. Einstein Copy Insights
uses machine learning and statistics to identify language features related to punctuation, tone, and other aspects, and assesses their
impact on open rate.
Why: The subject line is the gateway to an engaging, absorbing email. Einstein Copy Insights equips you with insight to help you craft
better subject lines.
When: This feature will be available to Corporate and Enterprise Edition customers by February 10, 2020. This feature will be rolled out
to Pro Edition customers by the beginning of April.
Who: This feature is available to customers who signed Marketing Cloud Einstein terms for Corporate, Enterprise, or Pro edition Enterprise
2.0 accounts, and signed Amazon Web Services (AWS) terms.
158
How: Activate Einstein Copy Insights for your business units in Marketing Cloud Setup. Then, find Einstein Copy Insights in Analytics
Builder.
Understand Send Performance Anomalies with Einstein

Einstein now proactively monitors your email sends for unusual anomalies in performance. Each day, Einstein Messaging Insights assesses
your sends’ performance, focusing on Open Rate, Click Rate. and Unsubscribe Rate. It then points out when these rates fall outside of
the boundaries that Einstein predicted. A new notification system makes these insights easy to find and read from anywhere in Marketing
Cloud. The Einstein Messaging Insights app hosts all your email performance insights for the last 90 days.
Where: A new Einstein notifications badge appears in Marketing Cloud navigation, and a dashboard is available in the new Einstein
Messaging Insights app in Analytics Builder.
Why: Einstein Messaging Insights makes Einstein proactive, pointing out anomalous performance as you work.
When: This feature will be available to Corporate and Enterprise Editions customers by February 10, 2020. This feature will be rolled out
to Pro Edition customers by the beginning of April.
Who: All customers on a full Pro, Corporate, or Enterprise Edition of the Marketing Cloud. Editions without the term for data processing
on the Predictive Intelligence/Einstein platform do not receive this feature.
SEE ALSO:
Einstein Messaging Insights
Set Up Einstein Messaging Insights
View Einstein Messaging Insights
The Einstein Messaging Insights Dashboard
Set a Custom STO Send Window

Einstein Send Time Optimization (STO) now lets you select the best window of time for your email send. Selecting a custom window
provides flexibility when you’re sending shorter promotional campaign sends or observe 2–6 day windows. You can also control how
Einstein STO handles contacts who don’t have enough data to create a personalized model by setting a default for unmodeled contacts.
Where: Set a custom send window in the Einstein Send Time Optimization activity in Journey Builder. Set the default option for unmodeled
contacts under Einstein Send Time Optimization in Setup.
Why: New custom send windows let you use Einstein STO in more journey and customer modeling scenarios. For example, where
customers have enterprises with both B2C and B2B business units, the B2C business unit can use the enterprise’s model for unmodeled
contacts, while allowing the B2B business unit to send to unmodeled contacts immediately.
When: These features are available after January 25, 2020.
Who: Customers with Einstein Send Time Optimization receive these features.
SEE ALSO:
Einstein Send Time Optimization
Activate Einstein Send Time Optimization
Use the Einstein Send Time Optimization Activity
159
Marketing Cloud Release Notes Marketing Cloud Mobile Studio January 2020 Release Notes
Marketing Cloud Mobile Studio January 2020 Release Notes

Import contacts into GroupConnect with the Contact Builder Import Wizard and via API, and delete unwanted LINE messages. Access
MobileConnect Admin pages from Marketing Cloud Setup, and associate campaigns with SMS activities in Journey Builder. Use the
updated SMS Journey Builder Activity Name to easily find your messages in reports and data extracts. Activate rich media notifications
in MobilePush Administration, and pre-compile your subscribers before your push message sends.
GroupConnect January 2020 Release Notes

Import contacts into GroupConnect with the Contact Builder import wizard, and delete unwanted LINE messages on the Overview
page.
MobileConnect January 2020 Release Notes
Access MobileConnect Admin pages from Marketing Cloud Setup, and associate campaigns with SMS activities in Journey Builder.
Use the updated SMS Journey Builder Activity Name to easily find your messages in reports and data extracts.
MobilePush January 2020 Release Notes
Activate rich media notifications in MobilePush Administration, and pre-compile your subscribers before your message sends.
MobilePush SDK January 2020 Release Notes
With the latest version of the MobilePush SDK your apps get iOS 13 improvements, geofence messaging improvements, and more.
GroupConnect January 2020 Release Notes

Import contacts into GroupConnect with the Contact Builder import wizard, and delete unwanted LINE messages on the Overview page.
Contact Import Support Via Contact Builder Wizard and API

You can now import your LINE users manually with the Contact Builder import wizard or via API.
Delete Unwanted Messages in GroupConnect
You can now delete unwanted messages in GroupConnect.
Contact Import Support Via Contact Builder Wizard and API

You can now import your LINE users manually with the Contact Builder import wizard or via API.
Why: Previously, LINE contacts were added automatically after a follow event. You set a contact key, and there was no solution to
manually import contacts. You submitted change requests for the imports, and it took a long time to import the users.
How: In the Contact Builder import section, use the Import to a List option. Select a file with the user information or upload the file to
your Marketing Cloud FTP location. You can use the same process with the contacts API.
Delete Unwanted Messages in GroupConnect

You can now delete unwanted messages in GroupConnect.
Why: Previously, you submitted a change request to delete unwanted messages from the GroupConnect platform. Now, you can delete
messages on your own.
How: On the GroupConnect Overview page, select the message, click Delete, and then confirm that you want to delete the message.
Once confirmed, the Overview page is refreshed, and the unwanted message is deleted.
160
MobileConnect January 2020 Release Notes

Access MobileConnect Admin pages from Marketing Cloud Setup, and associate campaigns with SMS activities in Journey Builder. Use
the updated SMS Journey Builder Activity Name to easily find your messages in reports and data extracts.
Access MobileConnect Admin Pages from Marketing Cloud Setup

To make Marketing Cloud easier to set up, learn, and use, you can now access MobileConnect admin pages from Setup. The page
functionality remains the same.
Find Your SMS Analytics Faster with the Updated Message Name
When you use MobileConnect with Journey Builder, you have full control of your SMS message name in Journey Builder. SMS
messages sent through Journey Builder now use the Activity Name as the Message Name in all reports and data extracts. The Activity
Name gets populated with the content name, but you can edit it in the activity.
Track Your Cross-Channel Content with SMS Campaigns in Journey Builder
You can now add campaigns to the SMS activity in Journey Builder to track your cross-channel content.
Use the Account-Level Blockout Window to Stop MobileConnect Messages
The account-level blockout window in MobileConnect now stops messages from being deployed when the blockout period begins
for list-based and data extension-based sends.

Find Your SMS Analytics Faster with the Updated Message Name
When you use MobileConnect with Journey Builder, you have full control of your SMS message name in Journey Builder. SMS messages
sent through Journey Builder now use the Activity Name as the Message Name in all reports and data extracts. The Activity Name gets
populated with the content name, but you can edit it in the activity.
Why:Previously, customers reported that the unique identifier used for Reporting ID was too unique to identify their messages in
reporting.
How: The Reporting ID no longer appears for new activities and copies or new versions of existing activities using Content Builder
content. Existing and running journeys do not show this change. For all new Journey Builder SMS Activities created after the January
2020 release, the Reporting ID is no longer populated, and your Activity Name shows in reports, data extracts, and the MobileConnect
Overview screen as the Message Name. This change also applies to any copies or new versions of a journey post-release.
Table 2: What to Expect with Older SMS Activities

Journey Activated Prior to Release • Running journeys activities continue to use Reporting ID.
• Reporting ID is present only on the read-only summary view
of the Activity.
• When the Activity is copied or versioned, Reporting ID is not
present.
• Reselect the new version or copy, and the new version shows
new naming format. Reporting ID is not present.
161

Draft Journey Created Before the Release and Activated After • Reselect the content, and new naming format is used.
the Release
• Reporting ID is not present.
New Journeys Created After Release • Reporting ID is not present.

• New activities use the new naming format.
Track Your Cross-Channel Content with SMS Campaigns in Journey Builder

You can now add campaigns to the SMS activity in Journey Builder to track your cross-channel content.
How: MobileConnect customers who use Journey Builder can add an existing campaign on the Delivery Options tab of the SMS activity
in Journey Builder.
Use the Account-Level Blockout Window to Stop MobileConnect Messages

The account-level blockout window in MobileConnect now stops messages from being deployed when the blockout period begins for
list-based and data extension-based sends.
Why: Previously, account-level blockouts prevented users from scheduling messages during a blockout period. Messages scheduled to
deploy before the window continued to send until the entire send was complete, even within the blockout period.
How: In Setup or the MobileConnect Administration tab, click Edit on the blockout window, select the checkbox, and then click Save.
MobilePush January 2020 Release Notes

Activate rich media notifications in MobilePush Administration, and pre-compile your subscribers before your message sends.
Expedite Your MobilePush Sends by Pre-Compiling Subscribers

Pre-compile your audience before your scheduled send time. With this option, you can choose to pre-process your audience in
advance to ensure that your send occurs closer to the scheduled time.
Enable Rich Notifications in MobilePush Administration
You can now Enable rich push notifications in MobilePush Administration or in Setup. Previously, you submitted a case to enable
mutable content in your push notifications.
Expedite Your MobilePush Sends by Pre-Compiling Subscribers

Pre-compile your audience before your scheduled send time. With this option, you can choose to pre-process your audience in advance
to ensure that your send occurs closer to the scheduled time.
Why: Push notifications sent through MobilePush in MobileStudio begin to process and compile your audience at the time that the
send is scheduled. For example, if your send is scheduled for 2:00 pm EST, your audience begins to compile at 2:00 pm EST, and your
send begins when the audience and personalization finishes processing. When you pre-compile subscribers, the audience starts to
process one hour before the scheduled send and sending process is expedited.
How: During message creation, select Future on the Review and Send step and choose a date and time. In the Advanced Options tab,
click the checkbox next to Pre-Compile Subscribers.
162
Marketing Cloud Release Notes Marketing Cloud Platform January 2020 Release Notes
Enable Rich Notifications in MobilePush Administration

You can now Enable rich push notifications in MobilePush Administration or in Setup. Previously, you submitted a case to enable mutable
content in your push notifications.
Why: Mutable content is a value in the payload that is required to send images with push notifications (rich push). Now, you can enable
the rich push feature on your own.
How: Navigate to MobilePush Administration or Setup and open the settings for your account. When you click Enable for Rich Push,
your push notification payloads for mutable content equal a value of one. The ability to add an image to your push notifications is enabled
in the user interface when you create an outbound push notification message. You still must add a service extension to your mobile app
to handle the images sent in the payload.
MobilePush SDK January 2020 Release Notes

With the latest version of the MobilePush SDK your apps get iOS 13 improvements, geofence messaging improvements, and more.
• Improved compatibility with file protection and fixed minor bugs related to iOS 13.
• Improved auto-sizing of in-app messages on iOS devices.
• Implemented performance improvements for geofence messaging on Android.
• Improved analytics processing for iOS.
When: This functionality is available as of February 27, 2020.
Marketing Cloud Platform January 2020 Release Notes

Access MobileConnect features in Setup, add SFTP user accounts, import and export automations between accounts in Deployment
Manager, and more with the January 2020 Marketing Cloud Platform release.
SameSite Chrome Changes

To mitigate cross-site cookie attacks, Google is changing the default cookie status on Chrome browser versions 76 and later from
SameSite=None to SameSite=Lax in February 2020. Marketing Cloud evaluated the use of cookies within our applications
and implemented fixes to ensure that our applications are unaffected by the change. However, we advise Marketing Cloud users to
assess their own implementations and practices on how cookies are used. We encourage all AppExchange partners to note the
upcoming Chrome change so that you can address any issues specific to your own application or platform.
Create New Marketing Cloud Users Directly from Setup Home
Click Create on the Marketing Cloud Setup home screen to quickly add a new Marketing Cloud user to your account. Add basic
name and contact information in the first step, then assign one or more Marketing Cloud roles in the second step. Review your
information, click Create, and your new user receives notification and a temporary password.
Marketing Cloud Provisioning Is Changing
We are aligning Marketing Cloud provisioning with other Salesforce clouds and standardizing the provisioning features based on
products or SKUs purchased. As part of a new provisioning request, you might see features added to your account. These additions
can occur at renewal or outside of your renewal time frame. If you have questions, contact your Marketing Cloud account representative.
Update Your Custom Roles with New User Permissions
This release adds five new Marketing Cloud permissions to custom roles. These permissions are already integrated into our standard
Marketing Cloud roles. Update the settings for any custom roles in your account to ensure continued functionality. If your custom
roles work with any of the features, navigate to the permissions included in this release note via Setup and enable them.
163
Discontinue ExactTarget Sandbox Accounts

We plan to disable ExactTarget sandbox accounts on February 28, 2020. After that date, you can no longer log in, execute API calls,
import and extract data via FTP, or gain access to the account data. To discuss alternative testing options, contact your Marketing
Cloud account representative.
Provide your own generated RSA2048 encryption key for encryption at rest in the dedicated database for your Marketing Cloud
account. This feature enhances the security of your encryption implementation. The key is used as the key encryption key to encrypt
the encryption keys for Data at Rest Encryption. This key takes the place of keys otherwise generated by Marketing Cloud.
Discontinue Custom File Retention Periods for FTP Directories
Marketing Cloud no longer applies custom file retention periods to FTP directories. Marketing Cloud retains your files on Marketing
Cloud FTP for at least 21 days. Any file that is older than 21 days is eligible for removal, and we can remove files anytime after 21
days. However, there is no assurance or guarantee of removal for files older than 21 days. To ensure that your files are deleted, remove
the files from your FTP location via your FTP account. We cannot recover any files deleted from your FTP location. Consider this
information as you apply any retention automation to your files.
Subscribe to Email Engagement Events
Subscribe to email engagement events as an event type in Event Notification Services. These events include clicks, opens, and
unsubscribes. Email Engagement events are agnostic of send-type, as compared to our transactional send events. Add your
subscriptions in the Subscriptions section of Setup.
Remove Salesforce Logo from Marketing Cloud Email Footers, Default Profile, and Subscription and Unsubscription Pages
In this release, we replace the Salesforce logo in Marketing Cloud email footers with pixel-perfect blank images using the correct file
type. This change does not affect the formatting of your footer and only replaces the logo with the blank image.
Audit Google Analytics Configuration Events in Advanced Audit Log
Marketing Cloud security administrators can view audit log entries each time a user updates their Google Analytics configuration.
Receive Subscriber Error Code for Recursive Condition in AMPscript
To minimize performance issues, you now receive an error if you call AMPscript functions recursively: 104 - RecursiveScriptError.
Recursive conditions count against the subscriber error limit threshold or disposition the subscriber send as Errored/NotSent. This
change prevents infinitely looping AMPscript calls. The change applies to email, SMS, and push notifications but doesn’t apply to
CloudPages.
Import and Export Automations Between Accounts with Deployment Manager
You can now copy the design and configuration of your automations into another account or business unit using Deployment
Manager. Create a snapshot of an automation. Then upload it to another business unit or account. Deployment Manager recreates
the design of the original automation and reconfigures some of the activities and underlying data extensions. Some activities, such
as filter, send, and refresh activities, require manual configuration. Deployment Manager creates new automations rather than
overwriting or updating preexisting ones.
Regenerate an ENS Callback securityKey with the Generate Signature Key API
As an event notification (ENS) callback owner, use the new generate signature key REST API to regenerate a callback securityKey.
Regenerating a signature key deactivates the existing key. This functionality is available only via API: platform/v1/ens-regenerate.
Integrate with Transactional Messaging Using the New SDK
Now you can integrate with the transactional messaging APIs even faster using the new SDK. The transactional messaging SDK is
available for C#, Java, Node, and PHP.
164
Create up to 500 Email Triggered and Transactional Send Definitions a Week

To ensure optimal performance, you can now create no more than 500 total email triggered send definitions plus email transactional
send definitions in a seven-day period for one business unit. This limit applies to triggered send definitions created in the Marketing
Cloud application and via API. It doesn’t apply to the Journey Builder email activity triggered send definition.
Retrieve up to 2500 Data Extension Records Via SOAP API
To ensure optimal performance, you can now retrieve no more than 2500 records per request using the data extension SOAP API.
Build Tracking Parameters with Ease
Parameter Manager is a link string parameter utility that lets you view and edit Google Analytics and Web Analytics Connector (WAC)
tracking parameter strings, all in Marketing Cloud Setup.
Copy Registered Domains to Child Business Units Via API
Copy registered domains to all existing child business units of your account using the new /messaging/v1/domainverification/push
REST API route. The domain registration feature requires a separate DNS entry to your DNS server for each of your business units. So,
you can use this API route to copy registered domains easily across your entire enterprise.
SameSite Chrome Changes

To mitigate cross-site cookie attacks, Google is changing the default cookie status on Chrome browser versions 76 and later from
SameSite=None to SameSite=Lax in February 2020. Marketing Cloud evaluated the use of cookies within our applications and
implemented fixes to ensure that our applications are unaffected by the change. However, we advise Marketing Cloud users to assess
their own implementations and practices on how cookies are used. We encourage all AppExchange partners to note the upcoming
Chrome change so that you can address any issues specific to your own application or platform.
How: Consult our knowledge article for more information.
Create New Marketing Cloud Users Directly from Setup Home

Click Create on the Marketing Cloud Setup home screen to quickly add a new Marketing Cloud user to your account. Add basic name
and contact information in the first step, then assign one or more Marketing Cloud roles in the second step. Review your information,
click Create, and your new user receives notification and a temporary password.
165
SEE ALSO:
Add a Marketing Cloud User from Setup Home
Marketing Cloud Provisioning Is Changing

We are aligning Marketing Cloud provisioning with other Salesforce clouds and standardizing the provisioning features based on products
or SKUs purchased. As part of a new provisioning request, you might see features added to your account. These additions can occur at
renewal or outside of your renewal time frame. If you have questions, contact your Marketing Cloud account representative.
166
Update Your Custom Roles with New User Permissions

This release adds five new Marketing Cloud permissions to custom roles. These permissions are already integrated into our standard
Marketing Cloud roles. Update the settings for any custom roles in your account to ensure continued functionality. If your custom roles
work with any of the features, navigate to the permissions included in this release note via Setup and enable them.
This change allows these roles to continue to function in parity with standard Marketing Cloud roles. This change includes access to
these items.
• Automation definitions
• Contact attribute, import, and list information
• Folders organization and content information
• Messaging and tracking statistics
• Organization and user information
• Campaign ID and asset information
• Send-related information
• Workflow ID, role, state, and process information
This change does not give additional access to custom roles. Instead, custom roles can continue to retrieve the data necessary to function
from a Marketing Cloud account.
• General Marketing Cloud access
– Salesforce Marketing Cloud > General > Access
• Sales Cloud Integration

– Email > Integrations > Salesforce CRM > Access ExactTarget from External System
• Reports
– Reports > General > Access
• A/B Testing
– Email > A/B Testing > General > Access
• Microsoft Dynamics CRM Integration

– Email > Integrations > Microsoft CRM > Access
Discontinue ExactTarget Sandbox Accounts

We plan to disable ExactTarget sandbox accounts on February 28, 2020. After that date, you can no longer log in, execute API calls,
import and extract data via FTP, or gain access to the account data. To discuss alternative testing options, contact your Marketing Cloud
account representative.
Migration from your ExactTarget Sandbox account to a separate production account can require recreating marketing content and
assets. You can export data extensions and automations, then import the configurations into the target destination using Deployment
Manager.
Install the Sandbox-specific Deployment Manager app.
167

Provide your own generated RSA2048 encryption key for encryption at rest in the dedicated database for your Marketing Cloud account.
This feature enhances the security of your encryption implementation. The key is used as the key encryption key to encrypt the encryption
keys for Data at Rest Encryption. This key takes the place of keys otherwise generated by Marketing Cloud.
You can import, rotate, and revoke your key based on your security and business needs. Revoking an active key also revokes access to
any data in the database, as the database is offline when the key is not accessible. You must provide the same encryption key after
revocation to bring the database back online. Without the key, you cannot bring the database back online.
This feature is a limited pilot program. Contact your Marketing Cloud account representative for more information about participation
in this pilot program.
Discontinue Custom File Retention Periods for FTP Directories

Marketing Cloud no longer applies custom file retention periods to FTP directories. Marketing Cloud retains your files on Marketing Cloud
FTP for at least 21 days. Any file that is older than 21 days is eligible for removal, and we can remove files anytime after 21 days. However,
there is no assurance or guarantee of removal for files older than 21 days. To ensure that your files are deleted, remove the files from
your FTP location via your FTP account. We cannot recover any files deleted from your FTP location. Consider this information as you
apply any retention automation to your files.
Subscribe to Email Engagement Events

Subscribe to email engagement events as an event type in Event Notification Services. These events include clicks, opens, and unsubscribes.
Email Engagement events are agnostic of send-type, as compared to our transactional send events. Add your subscriptions in the
Subscriptions section of Setup.
Choose these options to enable your subscriptions.
• EngagementEvent.EmailClick
• EngagementEvent.EmailOpen
• EnagementEvent.EmailUnsubscribe
Create these subscriptions to reduce latency in retrieving tracking events and improve response times to campaign performance.
Remove Salesforce Logo from Marketing Cloud Email Footers, Default Profile, and
Subscription and Unsubscription Pages
In this release, we replace the Salesforce logo in Marketing Cloud email footers with pixel-perfect blank images using the correct file
type. This change does not affect the formatting of your footer and only replaces the logo with the blank image.
You can manage your footers in the Account Settings section of Marketing Cloud Setup.
We also replaced the Salesforce logo in the default Profile and Subscription pages with a generic logo. Update this logo in Marketing
Cloud Setup in Brandbuilder.

168
Audit Google Analytics Configuration Events in Advanced Audit Log

Marketing Cloud security administrators can view audit log entries each time a user updates their Google Analytics configuration.
Where:
Security administrators with a Google Analytics integration can view these logged configuration events:
• Reporting Account - Logs instances of the Google Analytics account being linked and unlinked in Marketing Cloud
• Authorized Views - Logs updates to the Google Analytics Account, Property, and Views configuration
• Tracking Parameters - Logs updates to the Google Analytics UTM parameter configuration
• External Audience Account - Logs instances of Marketing Cloud accounts being linked and unlinked in Google Analytics
Who: Google Analytics configuration events are logged for Advanced Audit Trail users.
See Audit Trail.
Receive Subscriber Error Code for Recursive Condition in AMPscript

To minimize performance issues, you now receive an error if you call AMPscript functions recursively: 104 - RecursiveScriptError. Recursive
conditions count against the subscriber error limit threshold or disposition the subscriber send as Errored/NotSent. This change prevents
infinitely looping AMPscript calls. The change applies to email, SMS, and push notifications but doesn’t apply to CloudPages.
Review the documentation.
Import and Export Automations Between Accounts with Deployment Manager

You can now copy the design and configuration of your automations into another account or business unit using Deployment Manager.
Create a snapshot of an automation. Then upload it to another business unit or account. Deployment Manager recreates the design of
the original automation and reconfigures some of the activities and underlying data extensions. Some activities, such as filter, send, and
refresh activities, require manual configuration. Deployment Manager creates new automations rather than overwriting or updating
preexisting ones.
When: This functionality is available as of December 2019.
Who: While all customers can use Deployment Manager, only Automation Studio customers can use this functionality.
How: Ask your Marketing Cloud administrator to install the Deployment Manager app for free from AppExchange. After it’s installed,
give your users access by assigning licenses in Installed Packages.
Regenerate an ENS Callback securityKey with the Generate Signature Key API
As an event notification (ENS) callback owner, use the new generate signature key REST API to regenerate a callback securityKey.
Regenerating a signature key deactivates the existing key. This functionality is available only via API: platform/v1/ens-regenerate.
Review the documentation.
Integrate with Transactional Messaging Using the New SDK

Now you can integrate with the transactional messaging APIs even faster using the new SDK. The transactional messaging SDK is available
for C#, Java, Node, and PHP.
When: This functionality is available as of December 2019.
Who: Customers that have back-end code in C#, Java, Node, or PHP can integrate with the new SDK.
How: Review the Github repositories for how to consume the SDK.
169
Marketing Cloud Release Notes Microsoft Dynamics CRM Connector January 2020 Release
Notes
• Node SDK
• C# SDK
• Java SDK
• PHP SDK
Create up to 500 Email Triggered and Transactional Send Definitions a Week

To ensure optimal performance, you can now create no more than 500 total email triggered send definitions plus email transactional
send definitions in a seven-day period for one business unit. This limit applies to triggered send definitions created in the Marketing
Cloud application and via API. It doesn’t apply to the Journey Builder email activity triggered send definition.
Review the documentation for email triggered send definitions and the email transactional send definitions.
Retrieve up to 2500 Data Extension Records Via SOAP API

To ensure optimal performance, you can now retrieve no more than 2500 records per request using the data extension SOAP API.
Where: This change applies to all new SOAP API retrieve requests for a data extension.
Build Tracking Parameters with Ease

Parameter Manager is a link string parameter utility that lets you view and edit Google Analytics and Web Analytics Connector (WAC)
tracking parameter strings, all in Marketing Cloud Setup.
Where: Find Parameter Manager in Setup under Data Management.
Why: WAC currently requires support resources to maintain. Parameter Manager provides the flexibility and capability to resolve tracking
conflicts between Google Analytics tracking and WAC.
When: This feature is generally available after January 25, 2020.
How: In Parameter Manager, click a string to view or edit its tracking configuration.
Copy Registered Domains to Child Business Units Via API

Copy registered domains to all existing child business units of your account using the new /messaging/v1/domainverification/push
REST API route. The domain registration feature requires a separate DNS entry to your DNS server for each of your business units. So, you
can use this API route to copy registered domains easily across your entire enterprise.
When: This feature is available after February 5, 2020.
SEE ALSO:
Microsoft Dynamics CRM Connector January 2020 Release Notes

We are ending support for Microsoft Dynamics CRM Connector 2011 as of January 30, 2020.
End of Life for Salesforce Marketing Cloud Connector for Microsoft Dynamics 2011
Beginning January 30, 2020, Marketing Cloud will no longer support an integrated Marketing Cloud experience on Microsoft Dynamics
2011. This experience is supported on version 2013–2015, 2016 (Version 8.0–8.1) and Dynamics 365 version 8.2 and higher.
170
Marketing Cloud Release Notes Web Studio January 2020 Release Notes
End of Life for Salesforce Marketing Cloud Connector for Microsoft Dynamics 2011
Beginning January 30, 2020, Marketing Cloud will no longer support an integrated Marketing Cloud experience on Microsoft Dynamics
2011. This experience is supported on version 2013–2015, 2016 (Version 8.0–8.1) and Dynamics 365 version 8.2 and higher.
Why: We are improving the overall security of Marketing Cloud by phasing out obsolete packages.
How: If you are on Salesforce Marketing Cloud Connector for Microsoft Dynamics 2011, upgrade to Dynamics 2013 or above and purchase
the Salesforce Marketing Cloud Connector 2013–2015 product.
Web Studio January 2020 Release Notes

Manage user permissions and roles for Marketing Cloud CloudPages.
Manage CloudPages Permissions

Marketing Cloud administrators can use permissions to manage access to CloudPages. And they can manage app functions by user,
including view, create, edit, delete, and publish/unpublish for landing pages, microsites, MobilePush pages, Interactive Email pages,
and other types of web content. These permissions are also included in the appropriate Marketing Cloud roles.
Manage CloudPages Permissions

Marketing Cloud administrators can use permissions to manage access to CloudPages. And they can manage app functions by user,
including view, create, edit, delete, and publish/unpublish for landing pages, microsites, MobilePush pages, Interactive Email pages, and
other types of web content. These permissions are also included in the appropriate Marketing Cloud roles.
Where: Access these permissions from the Marketing Cloud toolbar by hovering over your username and selecting Setup, then searching
for Users. Select a user, clickManage Roles, and select Edit Roles or Edit Permissions.
Why: Discrete CloudPages permissions allow administrators to control which users can perform which actions in CloudPages. These
permissions also align with standard Marketing Cloud roles.
See CloudPages Permissions and CloudPages Roles.
Social Intelligence Module January 2020 Release Notes

You now can access data in the Personal Social Manager right from your mobile phone. And you can interact on Twitter based on Social
Intelligence Module data. You can create Salesforce tasks, leads, and contacts from the Twitter posts. You can use category keywords
from French, Italian, and Spanish posts.
Access Social Intelligence Module Data with Personal Social Manage with Salesforce Mobile
You now can use Twitter to keep your followers engaged and to attract new ones. Post on Twitter or reply to a post from within
Social Intelligence Module. You can also create Salesforce tasks, leads, or contacts from social and see the posts using search. To
gain account-based social insights and grow the pipeline, improve sales presentations, and anticipate customer needs, Social
Intelligence Module users can access Personal Social Manager.
Use More Languages for Social Intelligence Module Category Keywords
Marketing Cloud Social Intelligence Module supports social posts derived from Category keywords in French, Italian, and Spanish.
You can access the Social Intelligence Module from Salesforce Service Cloud and from the Personal Social Manager application on
Salesforce Mobile.
171
Marketing Cloud Release Notes Social Studio January 2020 Release Notes
Access Social Intelligence Module Data with Personal Social Manage with Salesforce
Mobile
You now can use Twitter to keep your followers engaged and to attract new ones. Post on Twitter or reply to a post from within Social
Intelligence Module. You can also create Salesforce tasks, leads, or contacts from social and see the posts using search. To gain
account-based social insights and grow the pipeline, improve sales presentations, and anticipate customer needs, Social Intelligence
Module users can access Personal Social Manager.
How: Use Personal Social Manager (PSM) in Salesforce mobile and view your personal Twitter feed. With registering your Twitter account,
you can also publish and reply to content. You can create tasks, leads, or contacts from Salesforce records by using an action available
from the action drawer. Clicking the Salesforce cloud icon in the post to access the action drawer. Use PSM to search Salesforce accounts,
leads, or contacts with a keyword or phase. You can even view associated posts with the record.
Use More Languages for Social Intelligence Module Category Keywords

Marketing Cloud Social Intelligence Module supports social posts derived from Category keywords in French, Italian, and Spanish. You
can access the Social Intelligence Module from Salesforce Service Cloud and from the Personal Social Manager application on Salesforce
Mobile.
How: On the Social Intelligence Module tab in Sales Cloud, edit your settings. Click the Languages tab to select a language and Save.
When you return to the application tab page, the posts derived from category keywords appear in the selected languages. You can
select any language listed or an individual language. You can view unclassified posts by one of the supported languages in the Unknown
language.
Social Studio January 2020 Release Notes

Create Instagram stories in Social Studio and publish them with a mobile phone. See the details of how the European Copyright Directive
affects Marketing Cloud social products: Social Studio, Social Studio Automate, Social Studio Mobile, and Command Center. Use
Engagement Groups to organize many Google My Business locations pages into groups to use and monitor them more easily. And you
can use Instagram hashtags as a data source in Command Center.
Create Instagram Stories in Social Studio and Push to Mobile to Publish on Instagram
Now you can create Instagram stories in Marketing Cloud Social Studio and then assign the post to a mobile user to publish it. The
mobile user receives a Social Studio Mobile notification and can post right from Instagram.
How the European Copyright Directive Affects Marketing Cloud Social Products
Under Article 15 of the European Union (EU) Copyright Directive, Marketing Cloud Social products must remove post content for
mainstream news, aggregator, and non-YouTube video content. The EU Copyright Directive is designed to give authors, artists, and
publishers fairer remuneration for the use of their work online. The directive also protects those works which are copyrighted. The
EU Copyright Directive affects all Marketing Cloud Social Products: Command Center, Social Studio, Social Studio Mobile, and Social
Studio Automate.
Use Instagram Hashtags as a Data Source in Command Center
You can add instagram hashtags as a data source to a Top Media, Word Cloud, and Feed Wall screen in Marketing Cloud Command
Center. The data source is available to all users and Command Center customers.
172
Marketing Cloud Release Notes Social Studio January 2020 Release Notes
Remove Connected Personal Accounts from Social Studio

If you registered Facebook, Instagram or Google My Business pages using your own personal accounts, you can now delete them
from Marketing Cloud Social Studio. The feature is useful for admins when users who have registered the account and business
pages are changing jobs within the company or leaving the company. Previously, to disconnect a personal account from Social
Studio, you could only transfer the pages to a new user. Deleting the account wasn’t an option. If an account has any associated
pages, you can’t delete it.
Create Instagram Stories in Social Studio and Push to Mobile to Publish on Instagram
Now you can create Instagram stories in Marketing Cloud Social Studio and then assign the post to a mobile user to publish it. The mobile
user receives a Social Studio Mobile notification and can post right from Instagram.
How: In Social Studio Publish, create your Instagram Story, and then assign it to a user. They receive a notification in Social Studio Mobile
on their mobile phone. The user uses the Instagram app to publish the post.
SEE ALSO:
Create an Instagram Business Post or Story in Social Studio
Review Image, Video, and Facebook Feed Options for Social Studio Posts
How the European Copyright Directive Affects Marketing Cloud Social Products
Under Article 15 of the European Union (EU) Copyright Directive, Marketing Cloud Social products must remove post content for
mainstream news, aggregator, and non-YouTube video content. The EU Copyright Directive is designed to give authors, artists, and
publishers fairer remuneration for the use of their work online. The directive also protects those works which are copyrighted. The EU
Copyright Directive affects all Marketing Cloud Social Products: Command Center, Social Studio, Social Studio Mobile, and Social Studio
Automate.
Initially, the EU Copyright Directive affects all posts for these media types. The Social API is changed to restrict the social applications
from getting the data for all posts, not just posts from EU countries. Users can still store content and search by keyword in Salesforce.
The posts that have the affected media types show as “Content Not Available” in Social Studio. Social Studio continues to show author
information, post title, and link to the native post.
How: For broad listening data, the posts are restricted to show the avatar, title, and a link out to the original content. The affected media
types are mainstream news, aggregator, or videos except videos on YouTube. The test area shows “Content not Available”.
SEE ALSO:
How Does the EU Copyright Directive Apply to Marketing Cloud Social Products?
Monitor Engagement in Social Studio Mobile
See Social Account and Topic Profile Posts in a Feed Card in a Social Studio Analyze Dashboard
Tailor Reports in Social Studio to Gather the Information You Want
173
Marketing Cloud Release Notes Marketing Cloud 2022 Release Schedule
Use Instagram Hashtags as a Data Source in Command Center

You can add instagram hashtags as a data source to a Top Media, Word Cloud, and Feed Wall screen in Marketing Cloud Command
Center. The data source is available to all users and Command Center customers.
SEE ALSO:
Customize Feed Wall Screen in Command Center
Customize Word Cloud Screen in Command Center
Remove Connected Personal Accounts from Social Studio

If you registered Facebook, Instagram or Google My Business pages using your own personal accounts, you can now delete them from
Marketing Cloud Social Studio. The feature is useful for admins when users who have registered the account and business pages are
changing jobs within the company or leaving the company. Previously, to disconnect a personal account from Social Studio, you could
only transfer the pages to a new user. Deleting the account wasn’t an option. If an account has any associated pages, you can’t delete
it.
How: In Social Studio Admin, click Social Accounts and then Manage Social Accounts. Select a Facebook, Instagram Business, or Google
My Business account. On the next screen, from the dropdown list, select the personal account you want to delete. To remove the account
from Social Studio, click the delete icon.
SEE ALSO:
Delete Your Social Account in Social Studio
Marketing Cloud 2022 Release Schedule

Review the schedule for major Marketing Cloud releases in 2022.
Starting with the Spring ‘22 release, Marketing Cloud plans a new release cycle. In 2022, you can expect new Marketing Cloud features
available in your orgs during the Spring ‘22 (Feb 5-18, 2022), Summer ‘22 (June 4-17, 2022), and Winter ‘23 (Oct 8-21, 2022) releases.
This plan gives you a more consistent Salesforce experience because it aligns Marketing Cloud releases with the release schedule of
other Salesforce products.
Aside from the timing, nothing changes for you. If you have any questions about these changes, speak to your Salesforce account
executive.
Release Marketing Cloud Release Date

Spring ‘22 Release on page 2 February 5 through February 18, 2022
Summer ‘22 Release June 4 through June 17, 2022
Winter ‘23 Release October 8 through October 21, 2022
This information remains subject to change as necessary to ensure proper functionality for updates. Some features are made available
174
Marketing Cloud Release Notes Salesforce Audience Studio Releases
Salesforce Audience Studio Releases

Review the release notes for Salesforce Audience Studio (formerly known as Salesforce DMP) in Marketing Cloud.
Salesforce Audience Studio for Marketing Cloud August 2020 Release Notes
Review new features and performance enhancements for the Audience Studio (formerly known as Salesforce DMP) in the August
Salesforce Audience Studio for Marketing Cloud May 2020 Release Notes
Review new features and performance enhancements for the Audience Studio, formerly known as Salesforce DMP, in the May 2020
Salesforce Audience Studio for Marketing Cloud March 2020 Release Notes
Review new features and performance enhancements for the Audience Studio, formerly known as Salesforce DMP, in the March
Salesforce Audience Studio for Marketing Cloud January 2020 Release Notes
Review new features and performance enhancements for the Audience Studio, formerly known as Salesforce DMP, in the January
SEE ALSO:
Salesforce Audience Studio Documentation
Salesforce Audience Studio for Marketing Cloud August 2020 Release

Notes
Review new features and performance enhancements for the Audience Studio (formerly known as Salesforce DMP) in the August 2020
Data Provider Setting Profiles

View the list of Data Providers enabled for your Organization and gain access to authorized use information, such as data that is
considered first party vs. third party, CPM usage or subscription, billed by Salesforce or direct with Data Provider, and if the third
party data can be included in your segment data feeds.
Third Party Data for Audience Studio Marketing Cloud HEM Activation
Now you can activate any data for use with Marketing Cloud. Prior to this change, you were prevented from selecting the Marketing
Cloud activation option when an audience segment contained third party data. You were limited to only using first party data and
second party data specifically provisioned use with Marketing Cloud. Data Provider monthly usage reporting and data provider fees
may apply. You can negotiate subscription-based pricing with your third party data providers to avoid monthly usage reporting.
Data Provider Setting Profiles

View the list of Data Providers enabled for your Organization and gain access to authorized use information, such as data that is considered
first party vs. third party, CPM usage or subscription, billed by Salesforce or direct with Data Provider, and if the third party data can be
included in your segment data feeds.
Where: A new section in Manage > Data Providers.
When: August 11, 2020
175
Marketing Cloud Release Notes Salesforce Audience Studio for Marketing Cloud May 2020
Release Notes
Who: Admin users

Why: Data Provider settings inform where data will be available and how monthly billing will be handled. All third party data that is
configured as CPM usage will be included in the Data Provider Billing Report each month. The new Manage > Data Providers screen will
provide more transparency for Data Provider settings that inform authorized use of data.
How: Any admin user may access the Data Providers that have been implemented for their Organization by logging in to the Console
and navigating to Manage > Data Providers.
Third Party Data for Audience Studio Marketing Cloud HEM Activation
Now you can activate any data for use with Marketing Cloud. Prior to this change, you were prevented from selecting the Marketing
Cloud activation option when an audience segment contained third party data. You were limited to only using first party data and second
party data specifically provisioned use with Marketing Cloud. Data Provider monthly usage reporting and data provider fees may apply.
You can negotiate subscription-based pricing with your third party data providers to avoid monthly usage reporting.
Where: This enhancement applies to all customers utilizing the v2 integration: Marketing Cloud HEM activation when activating segments
from Audience Studio.
Who: All users that have access to activate Audience Studio segments (Manage Segments: Full Access and Interchange permissions).
Why: Enrich data in Marketing Cloud with third party audiences and activate a single audience across multiple channels to perform
cross-channel advertising and marketing. Manage cross-channel frequency and suppression to optimize campaign performance and
costs.
How: The enhancement is available immediately and can be accessed by navigating to Segments and accessing the action items for
an existing segment to update the partners. Select Activate --> Marketing Cloud. For newly created segments, choose Activate and
then select Marketing Cloud in step two of the Segment Building process.
Salesforce Audience Studio for Marketing Cloud May 2020 Release Notes
Review new features and performance enhancements for the Audience Studio, formerly known as Salesforce DMP, in the May 2020
Identity Onboarding Utilization Report

A report generated on a monthly basis to track the utilization of identity service based on a volume of distinct Hashed Emails (HEMs)
under management for an Org.
Identity Onboarding Utilization Report

A report generated on a monthly basis to track the utilization of identity service based on a volume of distinct Hashed Emails (HEMs)
under management for an Org.
Where This new feature applies to Client users for visibility into their Org’s utilization of Identity Service.
Why So you can view your monthly utilization of the identity service and download the utilization data into a spreadsheet.
How Login to Audience Studio Console -> Activation -> Select Identity Onboarding Utilization Report in the right side of the
drop-down under Billing.
176
Marketing Cloud Release Notes Salesforce Audience Studio for Marketing Cloud March 2020
Release Notes
This report includes:

• An option for filtering the data by Year, Month and Org
• Ability to export the data into Excel
• Appropriate access control for client users to see only the data belonging to their Org, but allowing privileged Salesforce users to
see the data for all Orgs
Salesforce Audience Studio for Marketing Cloud March 2020 Release Notes
Review new features and performance enhancements for the Audience Studio, formerly known as Salesforce DMP, in the March 2020
Firefox 1st Party Cookies

Audience Studio is introducing a solution that allows you to set a persistent ID when the user is on Firefox, with their default Enhanced
Tracking Protection (ETP) policies. Now you have the option to implement client site managed 1p cookies or Audience Studio
managed 1p cookies.
Audience Studio Integration with IAB TCF
Audience Studio is a Consent Framework vendor, and this note describes actions that customers must take to use Audience Studio
as a registered vendor in compliance with the Interactive Advertising Bureau (IAB) Transparency and Consent Framework (TCF)
standard.
177
Marketing Cloud Release Notes Salesforce Audience Studio for Marketing Cloud January
2020 Release Notes
Firefox 1st Party Cookies

Audience Studio is introducing a solution that allows you to set a persistent ID when the user is on Firefox, with their default Enhanced
Tracking Protection (ETP) policies. Now you have the option to implement client site managed 1p cookies or Audience Studio managed
1p cookies.
Audience Studio Integration with IAB TCF

Audience Studio is a Consent Framework vendor, and this note describes actions that customers must take to use Audience Studio as
a registered vendor in compliance with the Interactive Advertising Bureau (IAB) Transparency and Consent Framework (TCF) standard.
Audience Studio is compliant with (TCF) v1.1.
Audience Studio is registered as a vendor In IAB TCF.
General Overview
Audience Studio provides the means to manage and communicate users' privacy choices through IAB's Transparency and Consent
Framework. Audience Studio enables customers to evaluate, honor, and forward user privacy choices to downstream partners in
accordance with IAB TCF.
Audience studio offers an integration layer for both customers and partners.
For customers: customers need to set up their own mapping between the IAB TCF purposes definitions and the Audience Studio
consent flags, with advice from their legal team. Audience studio will make the IAB consent string available through control tags, and
use our consent API.
For data partners, or activation partners: whenever Audience Studio fires a user match pixel, it will include the GDPR IAB TCF consent
string. Partners are responsible for gating, according to consumer consent choices.
For more information, see: this Audience Studio Integration with IAB TCF article.
Salesforce Audience Studio for Marketing Cloud January 2020 Release

Notes
Review new features and performance enhancements for the Audience Studio, formerly known as Salesforce DMP, in the January 2020
California Consumer Privacy Act (CCPA)

Audience Studio now includes a suite of tools for customers to manage CCPA compliance. These allow you to manage your consumer's
rights to “delete my data”, “give me a copy of my data”, and “do not sell my personal information”.
Change to Google Chrome Same Site Settings
In February 2020, cookies in the Chrome browser (version 80 onwards) will default to SameSite=Lax if not explicitly set. This may
affect some of the Salesforce applications. For Audience Studio and Data Studio, it means that when this change goes into effect,
less data will be available for targeting, since the cookies will not be available in a third-party context.
Person-based Identity Boost
Identity Boost for Audience Studio uses Marketing Cloud’s highly scaled, deterministic identity graph to alias device and pseudonymous
IDs into persistent person-level IDs for true people-based analytics, segmentation, and activation.
Data Studio Provider Profiles
Data Providers can now create a profile within Data Studio to signal when they are available for data partnerships.
178
Marketing Cloud Release Notes Salesforce Audience Studio for Marketing Cloud January
2020 Release Notes
Data Studio Sharing Option

You can now use the Data Studio sharing option to make your segment data available within the Marketing Cloud application.
California Consumer Privacy Act (CCPA)

Audience Studio now includes a suite of tools for customers to manage CCPA compliance. These allow you to manage your consumer's
rights to “delete my data”, “give me a copy of my data”, and “do not sell my personal information”.
Where: The CCPA tools are available to all Audience Studio customers. Some tools are limited to Admins.
When: All CCPA tools are available to clients on December 16, 2019.
Why: The CCPA is a new consumer data privacy law. The law is effective January 1, 2020, with enforcement by the California Attorney
General beginning six months after the Attorney General issues final regulations, or July 1, 2020, whichever is sooner.
Similar to the sweeping changes that came with the EU’s General Data Protection Regulation (GDPR), the CCPA represents the highest
standard of data protection yet in the United States and requires companies to carefully assess their data practices.
The CCPA grants California residents several new rights over their personal information. For example, the CCPA gives individuals the
right to access or delete personal information collected by a business, and the right to opt out of a business’s sale of their personal
information. The opt-out right is significant because the CCPA defines sale in broad terms that encompass many commonplace data
sharing arrangements, even where no money is exchanged.
However, transfers to service providers are not considered sales. More information about CCPA, including a fiction-vs-fact whitepaper
and FAQs, are available through Salesforce’s Regional Privacy Laws page.
How: Implementation details about all CCPA tools are available in this CCPA help article.
SEE ALSO:
California Consumer Privacy Act
Change to Google Chrome Same Site Settings

In February 2020, cookies in the Chrome browser (version 80 onwards) will default to SameSite=Lax if not explicitly set. This may affect
some of the Salesforce applications. For Audience Studio and Data Studio, it means that when this change goes into effect, less data will
be available for targeting, since the cookies will not be available in a third-party context.
Therefore, the Audience Studio developers have changed the Chrome settings within the applications to SameSite=None, Secure. This
is the optimal setup to track third-party cookies (HTTP header will set SameSite=None, cross-site cookies can only be accessed over
HTTPS protocol).
The new SameSite settings enforce an explicit declaration of intent to track cross-site and to make sure that the information is transferred
securely.
This change will be deployed automatically in early Jan 2020. Depending on your implementation, this SameSite value will be set:
• Through javascript (Control Tag) making an assignment to document.cookie
• Through HTTP header -- Set-Cookie: xxx=yyy; SameSite=None; Secure
For a complete explanation of the Chrome cookie collection changes, see:https://www.chromestatus.com/feature/5088147346030592
SEE ALSO:
Change to Google Same Site Settings
179
Marketing Cloud Release Notes Earlier Marketing Cloud Release Notes

Identity Boost for Audience Studio uses Marketing Cloud’s highly scaled, deterministic identity graph to alias device and pseudonymous
IDs into persistent person-level IDs for true people-based analytics, segmentation, and activation.
Where: Person-based Identity Boost is available to Audience Studio Marketer Pro and Multi-Channel Audience edition customers.
Currently, this feature is limited to organizations marketing to consumers within the United States.
Why: In previous releases, gathering people-based analytics and segmentation in Audience Studio required clients to source cross-device
data and ID resolution services from external third parties. Identity Boost for Audience Studio provides a native solution for clients seeking
to scale out people-based marketing programs.
SEE ALSO:

Data Providers can now create a profile within Data Studio to signal when they are available for data partnerships.
Where: Data Provider Profiles are located on the Data Studio Discovery screen. Use the Provisioning-> Settings command to edit your
profile.
Why: Creating a Data Provider profile allows customers to reach out through the application to other customers to establish partnerships.
How: Data Providers can opt in and edit their own profile under Provisioning-> Settings. Profiles are found in the 2nd Party Provider
Discovery screen.
SEE ALSO:
Data Studio Sharing Option

You can now use the Data Studio sharing option to make your segment data available within the Marketing Cloud application.
Where: Sharing options are available in the licensing step within the Data Studio provisioning window.
How: Customers can share or sell their segments using the Data Studio sharing option to make the segments available for use in
Marketing Cloud. Buyer or receivers of those segments can overlap with their own 1st party data sets, and activate their users into
Marketing Cloud.
SEE ALSO:
Data Studio Sharing Access
Earlier Marketing Cloud Release Notes

This page includes Marketing Cloud release notes older than two calendar years. Each year is stored in PDF format and includes a table
of contents for navigation.
PDFs of Earlier Release Notes

• 2020 Audience Studio Release Notes
180
Marketing Cloud Release Notes Receive Release Communications
• 2019 Marketing Cloud Release Notes

Receive Release Communications

Follow these steps to receive release communications from Marketing Cloud.
1. Subscribe here: http://pages.mktg.salesforce.com/preferencecenter
2. In the email you receive, click Preference Center.
3. Select the Subscriptions tab.
4. Choose Marketing Communications regarding Salesforce Products, Services, and Events.
181
INDEX
A O
Advertising Studio 147 One Send 155
B P
browsers Package Manager 51
graded browser support 1 Permissions 108
supported browsers 1 Personalization Builder 143
C R
Clickjacking 52 Release Note July 2020 108
CloudPages 19, 33 release notes 147
Content Builder 46 Release notes
April 2021
D 61
domain verification 153 Content Builder 61
August 2021
E 28, 34–35
Email Studio 19, 46–48, 61, 76 Contact Builder 34
Email Studio 34–35
G Setup 28
GroupConnect 128, 160 January 2020
144, 147–149, 165, 169, 171
J Audit Trail 169
January 2020 155–156 CloudPages 171
Journey Builder 8, 10–11, 16–18, 33, 46, 59, 108–109, 137–138, Content Builder 144, 147–149
155–156 SameSite 165
Journeys and Messages 108–109 Web Studio 171
June 2021 38 January 2021
64, 76–77
M Content Builder 76–77
Marketing Cloud Connect 23, 28–29, 39, 54, 65, 67, 75, 84–85, 99, July 2020
110, 116–118 96, 103, 111–113
Marketing Cloud Contact Builder 69–70 Audience Studio 103
Marketing Cloud Distributed Marketing 67–68 CloudPages 96, 111–112
Marketing Cloud Release Notes 8, 10–11, 16–19, 23, 26, 28–29, Content Builder 111, 113
33, 39, 46–48, 52, 54, 60–61, 65, 67–70, 75–77, 84–85, 91– June 2021
92, 99, 110, 116–118, 127–128, 139–140, 160–163 48–49
Marketing Clud Release Notes 139, 160 Contact Builder 48–49
MC Package Manager 38 Email Studio 49
Microsoft Dynamics CRM Connector 170–171 March 2020
Mobile Studio 139, 160 133–134, 144
MobileConnect 8, 16, 46, 77, 139–140, 161–162 Content Builder 133–134
MobilePush 8, 10–11, 16–18, 33, 60, 91–92, 110, 127, 140, 162– Web Studio 144
163 May 2020
MobilePush SDK 10–11 129–130
182
Index
Release notes (continued) Release Notes (continued)

May 2020 (continued) January 2021 61
CloudPages 130 July 2020
Content Builder 129–130 94, 104
October 2020 Developers 104
81–82, 92–93 June 2021
CloudPages 93 39, 48
Content Builder 81–82, 92–93 Distributed Marketing 39
October 2021 MC Connect 48
19 March 2020
Contact Builder 19 129, 131, 136–137, 142–143, 178
Release Notes Audience Studio 178
2022 Release Schedule 174 Email Studio 129, 136–137
Analytics Builder 133 Platform
April 2021 142–143
52, 54 Setup 142–143
Distributed Marketing 54 May 2020
August 2019 113, 115–116, 118–122, 127–130, 176
141 Audience Studio 176
Marketing Cloud Trailhead 141 Automation Studio 115–116
August 2020 Contact Builder 119–120
175–176 Developers 121–122
Audience Studio 175–176 Distributed Marketing 118–119
August 2021 October 2017
29 181
Distributed Marketing 29 Release Communications 181
Contact Builder 133, 147–148 October 2020
Data Extensions 148 63–64, 79, 81, 85, 87–88
December 2020 Developers 88
179 Distributed Marketing 85
Audience Studio 179 Platform
Distributed Marketing 102–103, 135, 149 63–64, 81
Fallback Address 115 SSO 63–64, 81
January 2020 Synchronized Data 87
135–136, 143–144, 147, 150–155, 161, 165–168, Personalization Builder 143
171–174, 179–180 RMM 115
Audience Studio 179–180 Salesforce DMP 175
Command Center 174 Triggered Send 129
Distributed Marketing 135–136, 150–152 Release Notes 2021 51–52, 59
Email Studio 147, 152–153 Release Notes July 2020 108–109
Interaction Studio 153–155
Platform S
143, 161, 165, 167–168 Setup 26, 52
Mobile Studio Setup 161, 168 Single Send 109
Setup 143, 165, 167–168 support
Provisioning 166 resources 1
Social Intelligence Module 171–172
Social Studio 172–174 T
Social Studio Mobile 173 Transactional Send 108
183
Index
WhatsApp 60
W
184

Marketing Cloud Release Notes: Salesforce, Spring '22

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Marketing Cloud Release Notes: Salesforce, Spring '22

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Marketing Cloud Release Notes

Salesforce, Spring ’22

Marketing Cloud Release Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

Spring '22 Release

January 2020 Release

Spring '22 Release

January 20, 2022 Original publish date

Marketing Cloud App and Setup Spring '22 Release Notes

Marketing Cloud App and Setup Spring '22 Release Notes

Use a Single Identity Provider for Multiple Marketing Cloud Tenants

Multi-Factor Authentication Opt-In Enabled for All Marketing Cloud Tenants

Use a Single Identity Provider for Multiple Marketing Cloud Tenants

Multi-Factor Authentication Opt-In Enabled for All Marketing Cloud Tenants

Settings for Amazon S3 File Locations Are Updated

Password Expiration Email Notifications Are Sent to FTP Users

Update Deployed Items with Package Manager

Marketing Cloud Data Management Spring '22 Release Notes

Interaction Studio Release Notes Spring '22

Interaction Studio Release Notes Spring '22

Manage Profiles Stored in Your Interaction Studio Dataset

Manage Profiles Stored in Your Interaction Studio Dataset

Marketing Cloud Einstein Spring '22 Release Notes

Use Nested Tagging for Einstein Content Tagging

Use Momentum Analytics to Enhance Your Einstein Engagement Scoring Strategy

Use Einstein Send Time Optimization with Automation Studio

Marketing Cloud Cross-Cloud Integrations Spring '22 Release Notes

Enhance Personalization Flow with Quick Send Enhancements

Enhance Personalization Flow with Quick Send Enhancements

Marketing Cloud Journeys Spring '22 Release Notes

Enable Android Deep Linking in Setup

Enjoy CloudPages Enhancements

Enable Android Deep Linking in Setup

Generate JavaScript Web Tokens with AMPscript Functions

Email Form Shared Items No Longer Available in Response Capture Options

Email Studio Classic Web Tools Are Retiring

Classic Editor CloudPages Migrated to Content Builder

Enjoy CloudPages Enhancements

Marketing Cloud Datorama Reports Spring '22 Release Notes

Expand Email Reporting with New Dimensions and Measurements in Datorama

October 2021 Release

October 7, 2021 Add Package Manager release note

Marketing Cloud App and Setup October 2021 Release Notes

Marketing Cloud App and Setup October 2021 Release Notes

Multi-Factor Authentication Opt-In Enabled for All Marketing Cloud Tenants

Multi-Factor Authentication Opt-In Enabled for All Marketing Cloud Tenants

Marketing Cloud Data Management October 2021 Release Notes

Connect Google Advertising Leads in Salesforce

Learn What's New in Interaction Studio

Marketing Cloud Journeys and Messages October 2021 Release Notes

Orchestrate Journeys Based on User Behaviors with Mobile App Events

Orchestrate Journeys Based on User Behaviors with Mobile App Events

Engage Customers Based on Specific Behaviors with In-App Message Triggers

Improve In-App Message Timing with Enhanced Display Controls

Experience Improved Performance with Our Next-Generation MobilePush SDK

Email Studio Classic Web Tools Are Retiring

CloudPages Classic Editor Migrated to Content Builder

CloudPages URLs Support Tenant-Specific Endpoints

Note: CloudPages that use a private domain don’t require an update.

Advance Your Deliverability Features Using Partner Seed List Integration

Delete Contacts Faster by Changing the Default Suppression Period

Easily Add an Automatic Fallback for Interactive Email Forms

Marketing Cloud Einstein October 2021 Release Notes

Compare More Subject Lines in Einstein Copy Insights